X\fe-' b LB F6f7 JX i o Fibrida Tcdchers' T-nilbrm Examinations ibozL-1903 KEY TO Florida Teachers^ Uniform Examinations 1894-1903. COMPILED BY AL. H. FOSTER, Ph.B., B.L.. Supt. Clayton County, (Ga.) Schools; Prea. Middle Ga. College. Formerly: Chair Latin and Greek, Fla. Con- ference College; Dept. of English, Boys' High School, Atlanta, Ga. AND MRS. AL. H. FOSTER. Dept. English and History, Middle Ga. College. Formerly: Instructor in Jasper (Fla.) Normal Institute; English and Latin, Ocala High School; Dept. of Latin, Fla. Conference Col- lege. u p6 V'^ I ubrahTTcongress i Two Copies Received MAY 9 1904 \] Cepyrleht Entry tiuASSi ^ XXc. NO. ZAA^ Copyright, 1903 By AL. H. FOSTEE. PKEFACE. By no means is it the purpose of this compilation to encourage superficial work, for it does not claim to be a short cut to a teacher's certificate. However, it will prove a helpful manual to any one de- siring to make thorough preparation. Also invaluable for teacher's desk, for use in supplementary wOrk. In preparing this compilation, best libraries — public and private — were constantly consulted. As successive examinations are not based on the same text in The- ory and Practice of Teaching, it was deemed unnecessary to include answers to questions on this branch. In re-reading manuscript, it was found necessary to cut out pars- ing-save in instances of peculiar difficulty-and other unimportant matter, in order to reduce volume to more convenient size. Arithmetical work was prepared by Miss Catherine Tatum of Milledgeville, Georgia. Se- cure a copy of "Florida Teachers' Uniform Examination Questions" from the publisher, O. L. Strickland, Palatka, FJorida. Any corrections thankfully received. A. H. F. ORTHOGRAPHY. Sept. '94. 1. Expressing the elements of words orally or in writing. 2. The chief advantage of oral spelling is the drill it affords in syllab- ication, clear enunciation, and correct pronunciation. (a) Written spelling gives a double opportunity to imprint visual images, and it strengthens the impression through both eye and ear. Teaches pupils the forms of English, capitalization, punctuation, etc. Keeps all the pupils engaged. (b) Gives better chance for criticism and correction. Enables pupils to spell automatically, as it were, when they write, hence more easily and with greater facility and accuracy. 3. The analysis of a word is the resolution of it into its component elements. 4. See 3, Sept. '99. 5. Phonic spelling: spelling by sound of letters. 6. Orthographic or written spelling: expressing elements of words in writing. Print, to mark, to stamp. 'i im-print, to mark on, to stamp on. fair, clear, equitable, just. un-fair, not fair. modest, restraint by a sense of propriety, diffident. Im-modest, not modest. "^ sight, act of seeing, vision. iw-sight, act of seeing into, vision into, introspection. Tate, to estimate. over-rate, to estimate above, to rate at too much. 8. (a) Homonyms, (b) Synonyms. 9. Write, to form letters, right, correct. rite, a ceremony. road, a way. rode, did ride. rowed, did row. raise, to lift up. raze, to pull down. rays, of light. seen, beheld. scene, a view. seine, a large net for fish. sight, vision. cite, to quote. site, situation, position. 10. Cylinder, scintillate, preferable, embarrass, thorough, caterpillar, privilege, slight, camphene, sergeant. Oct. '94. 1. See dictionary. 2, (a) Dividing words into syllables. (b) See dictionary. 3. (a) A primitive word is one that cannot be reduced to a more sim- ple form in tlie language to whicli it is native; as, man, good, run. (b) A derivative word is one made up of a root and one or more for- mative elements : man-ily, good-ness. (c) A compound word is one made up of two or more simple words united : school-master, rainbow. (d) man?iooct, man-eater. 4. Monosyllable, a word of one syllable. Dissyllable, a word of two syllables. Trisyllable, a word of three syllables. Polysyllable, a word of four or more syllables. 5. wn-kind, not kind. (Zis-loyal, not loyal. 6e-dim, to make dim. anfe-natal, before birth, en-force, to force on. 6. Sweet-er, more sweet. bsihy-ish, like a baby. cred-ible, that may &e believed. popul-OMS, abounding in people, earth-en, made of earth. 7. See 7, Sept. 1900. 8. (a) Words in ce and ge retain e before able and ous to keep c and tf soft. (b) "Words in oe and ee retain the e unless the suflSx begins with e. (c) Final e is retained before suffix beginning with a consonant. (d) The final consonant is not doubled when in the derivative, the ac- cent is thrown from the last syllable of the primitive. But we have ex- cel ; ex cellent; ex cellence. (e) Some words retain e to preserve their identity. 9. One, a number, won, gained. rye, a grain. ; wry, crooked, distorted. , holy, sacred. wholly, entirely. ' ■ t • beau, a gay, foppish man. . ' bow, something curved. ' 1 choir, a band of singers, quire, twenty-four sheets of paper. 10. Conscience, pageantry, liquidate, conquer, requisition, sufficient, creatable. blasphemy, menagerie, amateur. May, 1895. 1. See dictionary. 3. Sucker, a fish; that which sucks, succor, to help. niarshal, an officer. martial, warlike. collar, for the neck. choler, anger. assent, agreement. ascent, a rising. sweet, like sugar; pleasing. suite, attendants; a set of rooms. 4. mis-lead, to lead wrong, ad-here, to cling to. dis-pleased, not pleased. ' 6 ;- a«^i-cipate, to take before. ea;^ra-ordinary, beyond ordinary. 5. Pay-ee, one to whom money is to be paid. hope-?ess, without hope. whit-isTi, somewhat white. quadru-pZe, tonrfold. clerlc-sTiip, office of clerk, 6. -ible, that may be. -iful, full of. -ish, like. -en, to make {past, par.) -ule, little. 7. Gladden, Rule II., Sec 1, June '99. daintiness, Rule III., See 1, June, '99. copyist — sufBx begins with i; hence y is retained. serviceable. — words in ce and ge retain e before able and ous to keep c and g soft, deference— See 8(d), Oct. '94. 8. Bring, motion toward the speaker. fetch, motion, first from, then toward the speaker (go and bring). indolent, denotes a love of ease, or an aversion to effort, lazy, averse to bodily effort — more contemptuous than indolent. economy, avoids waste and uses money to the best advantage, parsimony, carries frugality to an extreme, involving meanness, doctrine, a principle; tenet; we believe doctrines, precept, a rule authoritatively given; we obey precepts. 9-10. Fleecy, abscess, precede, pedagogue, flimsy, scallop, separation efficiency, cholera, bronchitis, cession, decision, retrieve, sleigh, rhubarb, enough, czar, licorice, privilege, strychnine. Sept. 189.5. 1. A letter is a character used to represent either an elementary sound or a combination of elementary sounds; as, a, x. A syllable is a sound, or a combination of sounds, uttered with one impulse of the voice, and may be represented by a letter or a group of letters, as, m,an, man-ner, man-u-mit. A word is either a syllable or a combination of syllables; as, day, dic-tion, com-pre-hen-sion. A root is either a word or that part of a word which is modified by a prefix or a suffix. An affix. 2-3. See dictionary. 4. Prefix. Signification. Example. Definition, un — not. in adj. and noun, tm-like — not like M/j-healthiness — state of being not healthy. opposite act, in verb. un-Ao — opposite of do pre — before pre-dict — to say before se — aside, apart se-cede — to go apart syn — ivith, together syn-thesis — placing together meta — beyond me^a-physics — science beyond physics 5. (a) Homonyms are words that sound alike but are spelled differ- ently, (b) Ascent, a rising assent, agreement council, assembly counsel, advice rain, water from the clouds reign, to rule rein, for a horse metal, iron, gold, etc. mettle, spirit, courage. 6. Synonyms are words having the same or similar signification. One is always surrounded by clanger. One's life is sometimes in Tperil. Poverty, deficiency in the means of living. Indigence, absence of the necessaries of life. Genius implies high and peculiar gifts of nature; extraordinary power of originating; as, genius for poetry. Talent implies natural strength of intellect; power to execute; as, talent for business. A fortress is protected by its walls, defended by its guns. 8. (a) Pre-cede. (b) Pro-duce. (c) Signi-ty. (d) Dis-miss. (e) Manuscript. Busily, see 1 June, '99 — Rule III. trafficing, not accented on last syllable, hence consonant not dou- bled. '' concealed, final consonant preceded by two vowels, hence not dou- bled, furious, Rule III. traceable. See 7, May '95. 10. Scissors, feud, office, symmetry, separable, dissolve, tongue, differ- ence, capillary, decision. June, 1896. 1. (a-b) See 1, Sept. '95. (c) The alphabet is a system of characters used to represent the elementary sounds of a language. (d) See 1, Sept. '94. (e) Orthography is the art of expressing the elements of words. Treats of elementary sounds, letters, syllables and spelling. 2. See 5, June 1900 and 3, Oct. '94. Synonyms — genius, talent. Homonyms — ascent, assent. Paronyms — manly, mankind. o. Sa;-tort, to twist out. re-pel, to drive back. o6-ject, to throw against. sub-merge, to dip under. pro-gress, to go fortvard. 4. Valient, surely, irascible, loser, Connecti«ut, incense, dogmatical, exhaust, hygiene, prejudice. 6. Cheerful — merry clamorous — noisy, defective — imperfect, edifice — building, enormous — immense. 7. See 7 and 8, Oct. '94. 8. Need, knead, step, steppe, seal, ceil, seed, cede, pique, peak, ere, e'er, air, heir, meddle, medal, counsel, council, stationary] stationery, lock, loch. ^-10. Vicious, dominoes, lettuce, benefited, seditious, gaugeable, attorney, bouquet, sheckel, bilious, chisel, weevil, lachrymal, mortise, cor- puscle, crystallize, battalion, rhubarb, pseudonym, business. Sept. 1896. 1. See dictionary. 2. See 6, May '95. 3. See 5, Sept. '94. 4. See 8, Sept. '94. 5. See 8, Sept. '94. G. See 9, Sept. '94. 7. See 7, May '95. 8. c, soft (=s), in cent. g, soft (=j), in gem. ■€, hard (=k), in call. g, hard, in get. , 9-10. Beefsteak, centennial, billiards, exaggerate, surcingle, occur- rence, lilies, inflamation, tyrannical, vaccinate. June, 1897. 1. See 1, Sept. 1895 and 2, June '96. 3. Admittance, see 1, June '99, Rule II. preference, see same word 7, June '96. modeling, word not accented on last syllable, hence consonant not doubled. Hating, final e is dropped before a vowel. Rule I. desirable, same rule applies. outrageous, words ending in ce and ge retain e before ous and ahle, to keep c and g soft. valuable, final e is dropped before a vowel. glorious, y after a consonant becomes i before a suffix not begin- ning with i, Rule III. plenteous, final y is sometimes changed into e; exception. bountiful, Rule III. 4. Jw-clude, to shut in. ad-junct, joined to. an^e-cedent, going before. lil>er-a,te, to make free. joy-fu\, full of joy. pre-vent, to come before (hinder), semi-circle, half a circle. 6i-ped, a two-footed animal. sub-merge, to dip under, free-dom, state of being free. , 5. Pole, hole, faint, seed, done, poll, whole, feint, cede, dun. 6. i?e-print, to print again, un-fair, yiot fair, mis-judge, to judge wrongly. dis-obey, [opposite of obey), fore-sight, seeing before. 7-10. Venison, licorice, vaccinate, strychnine, fragile, sanguine, pla- giary, palsied, conscientious, neuter, lettuce, surfeit, icicle, pre- cede, teetotaler, facade, audible, parachute, separation, ascension. Sept. '97. 1. (a) See 2, Sept. '94. (b) See 2, Sept. '94. The best results are obtained by addressing both ear and eye. 2. Blamable, see last paper Rule I. chargeable, words ending in ce and ge retain e before ous and able to keep c and g soft. paleness, final e is retained before suffix beginning with a con- sonant. 9 truly, when final e is preceded by a vowel, it is sometimes omit- ted (exception), business, see last paper Rule III. duteous, final y is sometimes changed into e — exception to Rule III, spryly, exception to Rule III. snobbish, see 1, June '99, Rule II. preferred, see 1, June '99, Rule II. benefiting, final consonant is not doubled if word is not accented on last syllable. 4. Lead-en, made of lead. king-cZom, dominion of a king, glad-'rtess, state of being glad, barbar-ism, state of a barbarian. telic-ity, state of being happy. canti-cZe, a litle song. ducli-ling, a little duck. port-a&Ze, that may be carried. Mter-ary, relating to letters or literature. envi-OMS, full of envy. 5. A&-solve, to loose from. ^ un-hurt, not hurt. a,-spire, to breathe toward, ^raws-mit, to send beyond. con-sent, to feel with, inter-cede, to go between, de-pose, to put down. ■pre-fix, to put before, circum-scribe, to write around. semi-circZe, half a circle. 6. Man, mankind, principle, prince, pendant, depend, corporal, corpse, stationary, statics. 7. Knead, to work dough, rabbet, a groove, to pare down, core, the heart of anything, cellar, a room underground, choir, a band of singers, signet, a seal. bawled, did bawl. brews, does brew. fain, gladly. plane, a joiner's instrument. 8. Habit, coarse, easel, domicile, effete, descendant, cylinder, expert- ness, discover, distinguished, demagogue, fictitious, caterpillar, manacle, etymology, fruitful, calamity, ecstasy, eleemosynary, elite, esquimau, efiicient, ancient, rebel, quicken, indelible, rhi- noceros, satellite, scintillate, hypocrisy. June, '98. 1. See 1-2, June 189G. A prefix is a significant element placed at the beginning of a word to modify its meaning. A suffix is a significant element placed at the end of a word to modify its meaning. 2. See 7, Sept. 1902. 3. See 3, Sept. 1900. 4. Bond-ag'e, conditon of being bound, roek-eri/, place where rooks are bred. 10 animal-CM^e, a little animal. sert-dom, state of being a serf. glee-ful, full of glee. child-is?i, like a child. secur-ity, state of being secure, requirement, that which is required, firmness, quality of being firm. pos^pone, to place after. 5. See 5, Sept. '99. 7. Teach-er, trans-fer, two-fold, inter-vene, hoy-ish, op-pose, mole-CM^e, life-Zess, popul-ows, wood-en. 8-10. Damming, bulletin, census, resurrection, restaurant, separation, malleable, privilege, chorister, prejudice, hypocrite, progeny, orchestra, clique, missile. Sept. '98. 1. (a) See 1, Sept. '95. (b) See 4. Oct. '94. (c) Accent is stress of voice on a particular syllable of a word. (d) A trigraph consists of three vowels written together in the same syllable, one only being pronounced or the three together representing a single vocal sound or diphthong. (e) The ante-penult of a word is the last syllable but two. 2. See 3, Sept. 1900. 3. (a) Pre-fer'; (b) con-ten-'tion ; (c) pref'-er-ence; (d) in-dis'-so- lu-ble. 4. (a) See 7, Sept. '97. (b) See 8, Sept. '97. 5. Lamb-fcin, hero-ism, m^Z^i-form, dull-a?'rf-, mis-deed, re-gain, blow- ing, strength-en, super-Qne, out-do. 6. See 6, Nov. 1901. 7. (a) Final e of a primitive word is dropped on taking a suffix be- ginning with a vowel, but retained before a suffix beginning with a consonant; as, move, moving; hate, hateful. Exception: words in ce and ge retain e before able and ous to keep c and g soft; and those in oe and ee retain the e unless the suffix begins with e. Some words retain e to preserve their identity. Ex., change, changeable ; shoe, shoeing ; singe, singeing. (b) In monosyllables and words accented on the last syllable, a final consonant after a single vowel doubles before a suffix be- gining with a vowel {x, k and v are never doubled). Ex., rob, robbed. Exception : The final consonant is not doubled when, in the derivative, the accent is thrown from the last syllable of the primitive. Ex., refe7\ reference. (c) Final y of a primitive word, when preceded by a consonant, is generally changed into i, on the addition of a suffix not begin- ning with i. Ex., daisy, daisies. Exception : Final y does not change before 's. Ex., baby, baby's. 9-10. Caricature, succulent, resuscitate, sergeant, privilege, vassalage, in- terstice, cynosure, tyrannize, scintillate. June 1899. 1. Censurable, that may be censured. '(In adding suffixes, final e is dropped before a vowel. Rule I.) hateful, causing hate. (Final e is generally retained before suffix beginning with a consonant.) gladden, to make glad. (In monosyllables and words accented on the last syllable, a final consonant after a single vowel doubles 11 before a suffix beginning with a vowel {x, k and v are never doubled. Rule II.) concealed, did conceal. (Final consonant preceded by two vowels, hence not doubled.) benefited, did benefit. (Word not accented on last syllable, hence final consonant not doubled.) acquitted, did acquit. (Rule II). occurred, did occur. (Rule II.) pitiable, causing pity, (t/ after a consonant becomes i before a suffix not beginning with i. Rule III.) copyist, one who copies, {y after a consonant is retained before suffix beginning with i.) chargeable, that may be charged. (Words ending in ce and ge re- tain e before able and ous to keep c and g soft.) -4. Cow-join, to join together. ea;-communicate, to exclude from communion, re-gain, to gain back, sub-way, an under-ground, passage, in-sane, not sane. dis-connecl, opposite of connect, ari-join. to join to. o6-solve, to release from. trans-S.x, to pierce through. 2>re-historic, before history. 5. Contro-versy — contro, against. king-dom — dom, domain of. semi-annual — semi, half. be-little — be, to make. citizen-ship — ship, office of, state of. animal-cule — cule, little. trans-mit — trans, over, beyond. api-ary — ary. place where. af-flx — af, to. ; parent-age — age, state of being. <>. Bis-ciiit, ttcice cooked. coraira-dict, to speak against. wood-e». made of wood. multi-pZe, many fold. mournful-Zy, in a mournful manner. teach-er, one who teaches. name-Zess, without a name. melodi-OMS, full of melody. pre-cede, to go before. j poZy-syllabic. consisting of many syllables. ■7. Cent — scent, odor; sent, did send. pear — pair, two of a sort; pare, to peel, air — heir, one who inherits; ere, before, rain — reign, to rule; rein, the strap of a bridle, meat — meet, to assemble; mete, to measure, you — yew, a kind of tree; ewe, a female sheep, idle — idol, an image; idyl, a poem, fain — fane, a temple; feign, to pretend, isle — aisle, a passage in a church; I'll, I will, raise — rays, of light; raze, to pull down. :S. Capacity — ability, capability. rivalry — emulation, competition, talkative — garrulous, loquacious, famous — renowed, illustrious. bring — fetch, bear, carry, forsake — desert, abandon. judgment — penetration, discernment, discrimination, final — conclusive, ultimate, poverty — indigence, pauperism, character — reputation. 9-10. Aqueduct, cocoa, victuals, courtesy, almond, languor, salmon, gher- kin, chamois, equity, consensus, raspberry, reservoir, cupboard,, bellov^fs, forehead, scallop, skein, copse, diaphragm. Sept. 1899. 1. See 1, last exam. 3. RemoY-al, heauti-fy, audit-or, rust-ic, pres-e/ice. Foh-age, a collection of leaves. tann-ery, place ivhere tanning is done. m.o\e-cule, a small mass. serf-dom, state of being a serf. aw-ful, causing awe. child-isTi, like a child. ahil-ity, quality of being able, induce-men^, that which induces, w^icked-ness, state of being wicked. pos^humous, done after one's death. 5. Rude — rood; sear — sere; surf — serf; serge — surge; auger — augur; throw — throe; team — teem; suite — sweet; root — ^route; strait — straight. G. See 8, June '99. 7-10. See 9-10 last exam. June, 1900. 1. Admiring — continuing to admire. (In adding suffixes, linal e i& dropped before a vowel. Rule I.) blamable — that may be blamed. (Rule I.) movement— act of moving. (Pinal e is generally retained before a. consonant.) plaguing — continuing to plague. (Rule I.) erasing — continuing to erase. (Rule I.) melodious — abounding in melody, {y after a consonant becomes i before a suffix not beginning with i. Rule III.) enviable — that may be envied. (Rule III.) greediest — most greedy. (Rule III.) ceremonial — relating to ceremony. (Rule III.) tardiness — state of being tardy. (Rule III.) 2. Demoni-ac, vigil-ance, popul-o«s, ta\^-ing, solu-&Ze. 3. See Rule I. above and 7(a) Sept. '98. 5. Synonyms are words having the same or simlar signification. Homonyms are words agreeing in sound but differing in significa- tion. Paronyms are words of the same origin. Speech — address, oration, harangue, declamation. Diction — style, phraseology. Judgment — discernment, penetration, discrimination. Danger — peril, hazard, jeopardy. Cautious — wary, circumspect. So — sow; steal — steel; pearl — purl; load — lode; rute — root. 6. Frightful — dream or shriek. tremendous — shock or storm. terrible catastrophe, hurricane, or roar. 13 shocking news. horrible deeds, sights, or stories. dreadful gloom. fearful contest or wave. awful solitude. 7. Marriage — act of marrying. hennery — place where hens are kept, animalcule — a minute animal, kingdom — domain of a king, joyful — full of joy. publish — to make public, security — state of being secure, excitement — state of being excited, goodness — state of being good, post-script — written after. 8-10. Coalesce, tariff, paragraph, critique, lyceum, nausea, juicy, covetous, badinage, choler, sub-poena, synagogue, mignonette, chrysalis, ptyalism. Sept. 1900. 1. See 1, last exam. 2. See dictionary. 3. A-bed — a, in. after-noon — after, following (in time), be-little — be, to make, mid-summer — mid, middle, mis-name — mis, wrongly, wrong, with-stand — with, against, un-kind — un, not. out-strip — out, beyond, dis-obey — dis, not, opposite act. fore-sight — fore, before. 4. See 4, June, 1899. 5. See 6, June '99. 6. See 6, Oct. '94. 7. Bog, boggy. (Rule II; see 1, June 1899.) note, noting. (Rule I; see 1, June 1899.) begin, beginner. (Rule II; see 1, June 1899.) victory, victorious. (Rule III; see 1, June. 1900.) daisy, daisies. (Names in y after a consonant add es and change y to i according to Rule III. to form plural.) 8. See 7. June, 1899. 9. See 6, Sept. '99. 10. See 9-10, June. 1899. June, 1901. 1. See 7, Sept 1898. 4. See 5, Oct. '94, and 4, June '97. 5. Stud-ewi, One ivho studies, liber-a^e, to make free. refer-ee, one to tohom something is referred. preach-er, 07ie who preaches. For others, see 4, Sept. '97, and 4, June '98. 6. See 5, Nov. 1901. 7. See 6, Sept. '95. abstinence — temperance. alarm — fright, terror, consternation, queer — odd, whimsical, singular. 14 eminent — celebrated, distinguished. poverty — indigence, pauperism. noted — famous, renowned, illustrious, notorious. misfortune — calamity, disaster, mischance. incompetent — incapable. audacity — impudence, boldness. heartily — earnestly, sincerely, cordially, zealously. 8-10. Delusion, antecedent, blackguardism, brigadier, burlesque, courtesy^ handkerchief, celibacy, ecstasy, bronchitis, indictment, covetous, cognac, circuit, cynic, unction, politician, raspberry, leisure^ hearth. H Sept. 1901. 1-2. See dictionary. 3. See 2, Sept. 1902. 4. A6-duct, to lead away, trans-vait, to send heyond. Uyper-cviticKl, over critical, inier-vention, a coming hetween. wn-paid, not paid, in^ro-duce, to bring within. ^osi-prandial, after dinner, circttm-navigate, to sail around, re-cur, to come liack. an^i-podes, v^^ith feet opposite. 5. See 3, Sept. 1902. Synonyms. 6. Melodious. (See 1, June '99, Rule III.) coniprl. (See 1, June '99, Rule III.) playing. (See 1, June '99, Rule I.) accountable. (The final consonant of the prefix assimilates to the 'nitipl Iptter nf the root.) supposition. (Same rule applies.) occurring. (See 1, June '99, Rule II.) duteous. (Final y is sometimes changed into e.) dyed. (See 1, June '99, Rule I.) preference, i Final consonant is not doubled when accent of de- rivative is thrown from last syllable of primitive.) virtuous. (See Rule I.) 7. See 6, Sept. 1902. 8. Parachute, epoch, attache, besiege, deception, pharmacist, phlegm. pacify, occipital, sanction, catarrh, schism, scheme, effete, pique,. chlorid, calyx, benzine, piquant. Nov. 1901. 1-2. See dictionary. 8. See 3, Sept. 1900. 4. A-vert — to turn from. Sis-loyal — not loyal. afZ-duce — to bring forward, out-do — to do heyond. C07i-cur — to agree icith. inter-cede — to go between. de-pose — to put down, ante-eedent — going before. circum-na\\gate- — to sail around. semi-circle — half a circle. 5. Sweet, suite; assent, ascent; borough, burrow; vain, vane, vein; 15 kernel, colonel; freeze, frieze; serial, cereal; collar, choler; ses- sion, cession; pair, pare, pear. G. Kingship — office of a king. dispel — to drive asunder. lioness — a female lion. posthumous — after one's death. manhood — state of being a man. curable — that may be cured. hypercritical — over critical. liberty — state of being free. heroism — state of a hero. circumscribe — ^to write around. 9. Ult. — last month, pp. — pages. mdse. — merchandise. mme. — madame. et al. — and others. for example — e. g. that is — i. e. namely-T-viz. and the rest — etc. 8-10. See 9-10, June '99. June 1902. 3. (a) Principle — rule of action. principal — chief. (b) seed — what is sown. cede' — to yield, to transfer. (c) bring — motion toward the speaker. fetch — motion first from, then toward, the speaker. (d) seem — has reference to semblance. appear — has reference to a thing's being presented to our view. (e) black — of the darkest color, white — having the color of snow. (f) good — possessed of excellent qualities. bad — evil. (a) Homonyms; (b) homonyms; (c) synonyms; (d) synonyms; (e) antonyms; (f) antonyms. 4. See 3, Oct. '94. 5. See dictionary. G. con-vene — to come togetTiei. in-sane — not sane, ad-here — to stick to. ?'e-capture — to capture again, inter -xeniion- — a coming between. cuY-ahle — that may be cured, puri-f^/ — to make pure, teach-er — one loho teaches. secnr-ity — state of being secure. », ment-aZ — relating to the mind. 7. Inflexibility — Class : Derivative. Base : stem flex — bend. Adjuncts: prefix in — not; suffix ible — that may be; ity — state of being. Meaning : state of not being able to be bent. 10 Extraordinary — Class : Derivative. Base : Stem ordin — order. Adjuncts: Prefix extra — beyond; suffix ary — relating to. Meaning: Beyond that relating to usual order of things. Co-ordination — Class : Derivative. Base : Stem ordin — order. Adjuncts: Prefix co — together; suffix ate — having; ion — state. Meaning — State of having same rank. Prerequisite — Class : Derivative. Base : Stem requis — to require. Adjuncts: Prefix pre — before; suffix ite — being. Meaning : Being previously required. Infallible — Class : Derivative. Base : Stem fall — to deceive. Adjuncts: prefix in — not; suffix hie — that may be. Meaning : That may not tte deceived. 8-10. Harass, bachelor, cancel, vault, clamor,' psychology, cancel, Egypt- ian, conquer, concede, apropos, ascertain, surgeon, discipline, lat- tice, unconscious, essential, unction, extirpation, facetious. Sept. 1902. 2. Root, of a plant; route, a way. borough, a corporation; burroiv. a hole in the ground made by animals. ton, a weight; tun, a large cask. skull, a bone of the head;scull. a boat. pour, to empty out; pore, an opening, to study closely. rice, a grain; rise (noun), an ascent. peak, the top; pique, ill will. ode, a poem; owed, did owe. jam, preserved fruit; jamb, side piece of a door. core, heart of anything; corps, a body of troops. 3. Frugality is saving systematically and rigidly. parsimony carries frugality to an extreme, involving meanness. penitence, sorrow for sin. remorse, a gnawing of conscience. delusion, deception from want of knowledge. illusion, deception from morbid imagination. plurality of votes, more votes than those given for any other can- didate. majority of votes, more than half the votes given for all the can- didates. narrative, a story of connected incidents. description, a sketch or picture in words. (Such words are called synonyms.) 4. See 6, Nov. 1901. * 5. See dictionary. 6. See 7, Nov. 1901. 7. See 2, June '98. 8. See 3, Nov. 1901. 8-10. See 9-10, June '99. 17 READING. Sept. '94. 1. (a) Reading is the act of the mind in getting thought by means of written or printed words arranged in sentences. This act of the iliind may or may not be followed by the oral expression of the thought. In the former case it is oral reading, in the latter it is silent reading. (b) Articulation, strictly defined, is the utterance of single elementary sounds composing a syllable or a word; enunciation, the utterance of combined elements in syllables or parts of syllables. (c) Slurring syllables and leaving off final sound. 2. Emphasis is special prominence given to words and phrases. This may be done by an increase or decrease of force, a change of stress, form, quality, pitch or movement or a change in the combination of two or more of these elements. 3. Yes. Quantity has reference to loudness or volume of sound; pitch to the elevation or depression of a tone. 4. (a) Have pupils stand erect while reading, in front of recitation seat or out in the aisle. Miltary posture, standing erect on both feet and shoulders well thrown back. (b) Book should be held in left hand, unless book is too heavy, in which case both hands may be used. Should be held below level of the face, about fourteen inches from the eye and at right angles to the line of vision. (c) While teacher slowly elevates hand, class, standing, should inhale quietly, filling lungs to utmost capacity. As teacher lowers hand, pupils exhale slowly and quietly. Repeat several times. (d, e) Give simple drills to the end that gestures and facial express- ion will harmonize with sentiment to be expressed and nature of subject. 5. (a) Corrections should be made by class at end of individual reci- tations. Reader should not be interrupted. (b, c) Question pupils as to meaning of what they are reading; have them reproduce thought in a conversational tone; call for meaning of new words; have paragraph read by several pupils until expression is satisfactory. See 2, Oct. '94. 1. (a) Getting from the written or printed page exact thought in- tended by author and imparting it to hearers in such a manner that they may also understand it clearly and without conscious effort. Good reading demands skill in instant interpretation of words and letters and special attention to articulation, accent, emphasis, inflection, modulation, and pauses. (b) Word mastery and grasp of thought and feeling. 2. Lead pupils to clearly apprehend the thought, and appreciate what the language describes, then the proper oral expression will be a com- paratively easy matter. Give special attention, however, to naturalness. 3. Punctuation points render the meaning clear in that they are a guide to construction. Furthermore, they correspond more or less closely to the pauses made. 4. The loorcl method because it is the natural method. 5. Pauses for rhetorical effect — that is, pauses that assist in the proper modulation of the voice. Grammatical pauses are indicated by the marks of punctuation; rhetorical pauses, however, depend for their correct usage upon the reader's understanding of thought to be rendered. Sept. 189.5. (See Sept. '94.) 18 June '96. 1. The iDord viethod proceeds on the principle of first the idea, then the spoken word, then the written or printed word. By this method, words are taught as tvholes. No account is taken of the elements of words whether sounds or letters, until pupil is thoroughly familiar with the written or printed forms of thirty or forty "children's words." (b) The pJionic method avoids the names of the letters at first alto- gether, and simply seeks to teach their powers. Groups of words are given in which the same sounds occur and these words are decomposed into their elementary sounds which children are taught to utter sepa- rately. (c) See 1, Oct. '94. 2. (a) Pitch is the degree of elevation of the voice. (b) Force is the quantity of voice used in reading or speaking. It is quantity as applied to vocal delivery. (c) Movement is the rate with which words and sentences are uttered. (d) See 2, Sept. '94. (e) Inflections are the variations of the pitch of the voice on different words or syllables of a sentence. 3. Lessons should be short and intensive. Take special pains that pupils read understandingly. Question pupils as to meaning of what they are reading and explain allusions. Interest pupils in the life of the author, and give information in re- gard to his literary productions. Let the meaning of every word be tinderstood, every reference ex- plained, every choice expression memorized. Have pupil translate selec- tion into his thought and language. In reading or speaking the head and body should be erect, the chest fully expanded, the shoulders well thrown back — not rigid and formal, but easy and natural. 4. See 1, Sept. '97. 5. (a) See 2, Oct. '94. (b) Too rapid utterance by which the effect of the verse is lost to the ear; a plain and dry articulation which does not indicate the beauty of the sentiments and the rhythm; chanting tone; a sing-song style. Sept. 96. (see Sept. '94.) June 1897. 1. See 1, Sept. '99. 2. Blackboard drill reviewing words already learned. Introduce new words by means of objects or pictures and conversation lessons. From blackboard, teach form of word — script. Have pupils copy word in script. 3. (a) Monotone is a sameness of pitch on and between successive words and syllables. (b) See 2, June '96. (c) Modulation is the variation of the voice made in reading and speaking. (d, e) See 2, June '96. 4. (a, b) See Grammar. 2, June '98, 2d or 3d grade. (c) See Composition, 1, June '99. (d) Two or more lines or verses forming a division of a song or poem. (e) Apostrophe, as a figure of rhetoric, is a turning -from, the regular course of the narrative to address some real or imaginary person or object. .5. Lead the pupil to perceive that his articulation is really faulty; 19 the ear must be trained to detect the difference in the sounds, and to notice when the incorrect one is given. The pupil must be taught the position of the organ in making sounds and be drilled upon them until he can make them at his will. May be largely overcome by persistent and careful drill in the pronunciation of words in which most difficulty is experienced. Do not allow rapid or careless reading. 6. See 1, Sep. '94. The necessary condition of both silent and oral reading is a clear ap- prehension of the thought and feeling as presented in the language read; hence reading is not merely an act of the lips but an act of the mind. Sept. 1897. 1. Spelling, writing, composition, history or literature. 2. Blackboard and crayon. 3. (a, b). See 1, Sept. '94. (c) Reading, correctly taught, is an act of the mind; pupil is required to understand words and hence grasps the thought; easy natural expres- sion is the result. A process of word calling is mechanical — a mere act of the lips. Begin with script. If we begin with print, forms must be fixed in the mind of child by reproduction work in print. (d, e) But making printed forms is not a means of expression that the child uses permanently. "Writing, the second great means of language expression, should be put into the power of the child as soon as possible in order that he may express his thought as freely with the pencil as with the tongue. 4. See 1, June '96. (a) The sentence method is that which begins with sentences instead of letters or separate words. By it, the child's attention is called to some thought orally expressed and then the written expression for this as a whole is presented and taught. The letter or alphabetic method begins by teaching the child the names of the letters. When these, or a sufficient number of them, have been learned, the child is taught to pronounce words by means of these names. (b) When child has acquired power and habit of constructing the sound of a word for himself. 5. Reading Drill — (a) I. Preparation — Word Mastery: Writing all new words. Reading copied words. Teaching meaning of words. Their use in original sen- tences. II. Sentence Reading. Grasp of thought and feeling. Vocal expression of thought and feeling. (b) Word drill may now be united with the reading exercise proper. Not only should there be a more discriminating analysis of the thought but also increasing attention to figures of speech, historical and literary allusions, style, etc. Each choice selection should be made basis of a practical and suggestive lesson in English literature. Lessons should be short and intensive. Text should be studied partly with reference to beauty of literature contained. Instruction should impart to pupil an increasing appreciation of good English, and greater power and facility in its use. June 1898. 1. First Steps in Reading — I. Words as wholes : Concept or idea represented — objective. Words as sounds. Words as forms — script or print. Writing words — script or print. II. Word in combination : Groups or phrases. Sentences. Paragraphs, 20 III. Word analysis : Words as sounds — phonic. Words as forms — letters. 2. To enlarge the pupil's vocabulary, Increase his command of lan- guage, train the voice, elevate the taste, sharpen the intellect, and refine and ennoble the feelings. See 3, June '96 and 5(b), Sept. '97. 3. Clear conception, vivid imagination, real sympathy, good judg- ment, distinct articulation, full and free respiration, perfect control of the voice. 4. See 1, Sept. '97. 5. (a) The one begins with the vi^ord as a unit, the other the sentence. See 4, Sept. '97. (b)) Union method" will give most satisfactory results. Exclusive use of any one method, even for a few weeks, results in habits or tendencies that must be corrected before natural and accurate reading is possible. It is essential that child read not only words but — after a short time — increasing by phrases and sentences, and be made familiar with phonic elements of spoken words. Begin with word method. (a) The getting of the thought comes first. Statement is true, for mas- tery of the thought is the first requisite of expression. No; such teaching does not lead to self-help and fluency but to the reverse. Sept. '98. 1. (a) Thought-getting and thought-giving. (b) It is a pre-requisite to the thorough mastery of other lines of study. Study of text-books differs from reading solely and simply in intensity. 2. As an act of the lips, mechanics of reading only are involved; but reading is thought getting and thought giving. Thinking is the mind's mode of action; hence reading is obviously an act of the mind. (b) From first lesson. 3. Use well-selected material to arouse interest; assign short lessons but requires intensive study; question pupils as to meaning of what they are reading and have them summarize selection read, in their own lan- guage. If there is a tendency to slurred and confused utterance, give special drill work in articulation. If pupil reads in an artificial tone, have book closed and call for substance in his own words, and have passage re-read until same variety of inflections is put into printed words. See 2, Oct. '94. 4. (a) Enables pupil to acquire distinct and clear articulation, and correct pronunciation. Dull reading and failure to appreciate what Ian guage describes characterizes first method. (b) The second interests the mind, enlists the attention, awakens the feelings, renders the imagination active and responsive, and, in short, prepares pupil for lively apprehension of thought to be read. June '99. 1. (a; See 2, June '96. (b) Tone or quality of voice is the kind of sound employed in reading or speaking. (c) Volume is quantity of voice. (d) It is the dropping of the voice at the end of the sentence, which indicates that the sense is complete. (e) The force given to one or more syllables of a word. 2. See 4(a). Sept. '97 and 5(b) Sept. '98. 3. See 3, June '98. 4. Have pupil spell new words as they occur, and teach tvriting by copying exercises. Reading lessons furnish abundant subject matter for composition work, as sentence-building, reproduction work, original ex- 21 ercises, etc. Occasional supplementary reading affords variety in practice for young readers and prevents memorizing process. Tests pupil's ability to read at sight. In this way, Biography, History and Geography can be effectively taught in connection with reading lessons. Sept. '99. 1. (a) To make learner automatic and quick in the recognition of words and letter forms and values. (b) To secure his interest in the content — the spiritual element of the printed forms. The first or immediate purpose involves the mechanics of reading — dis- tinct and clear articulation and correct pronunciation as well as insLant Interpretation of words and letters. The second or ultimate purpose involves character-growth of learner, his introduction to enjoyment of truth, goodness and beauty as seen by others and expressed by them in the world's best literature. 2. Mastery of words. 3. (a) Concept or idea represented, sound, and form, (b) To be taught in above order. 4. (a) When pupil acquires power to "make out" and pronounce new written or printed words. (b) (1) That the ear may acquire a correctness and delicacy of per- ception. (2) Correct pronunciation and distinct articulation. 5. Some authorities consider the word as the unit, others the sentence. 6. Because the sentence is the unit of expression. Pupil taught this way reads with more ease and naturalness of expression. 7. (a) Apprehension of the thought. (b) Thought- getting precedes thought-giving. 8. By means of conversation lessons, mind of pupil is interested, the attention enlisted, the feelings awakened and pupil receives the needed assistance in the grasp of the thought to be expressed. 9. It tends to arouse a literary appetite, elevate the taste and refine and ennoble the feelings. Supplementary reading tests the ability of pupils to read intelligently without previous drill, tends to correct the memorizing process, interests pupils in reading good books, creates a thirst for knowledge and tends to inspire them with a just appreciation of the beautiful and true in thought and word. 10. Author not mentioned. June 1900. 1-3. See- 1-3, June '99. 4. See 2, Sept. '97. 5. See 9, Sept. '99. 5ept. 1900. See June 1900 — duplicate. June 1901. 1. (a) The ability to recognize or name word at sight; to utter it with ease, accuracy and force; to spell or analyze it by sound and by letter, and to apprehend its meaning and use it intelligently. 2. (a) Give pupil needed assistance in grasp of thought to be ex pressed. There is a very small place for vocal imitation. Thought will control expression. If the thought is in the child's mind in its fullest intensity, the expression will be appropriate. (b) Mastery of the thought. 3. See 4, June '99. 22 4. (a) Preparation enables pupil to grasp the thought and hence ac- quire fluency and naturalness of expression. Recitation affords drill in mechanics of reading. (b) Tends to correct and prevent memorizing process. Tests ability of pupil. (c) Silent reading: See 2(a), Sept. 1901. Discussion of matter read leads pupils to enter into the thoughts and feelings of the writer. Arouses interest. Sept. 1901. 1. See 5(a), Sept. '97. 2. (a) Because thought controls expression. See ques. 6, June '98. (b) By requiring a thorough mastery of words. Child should not be allowed to read a sentence aloud until he knows its words and its mean- ing. Have child get the thought by means of written words and not by hearing the sentence read. 5. See 3, Sept. '99. Nov. 1901. 1. See 1, Sept. 1901. 2. See 3, June 1901. 3. See 4, Sept. '97. 4. See 2, Sept. '99. 5. See 2, Sept. '97. June 1902. 1-2. (a) Faulty articulation: Have pupil practice upon those exercises which will give an easy action of lips, tongue and palate. Give drill work in utterance of the elementary sounds and in the phonetic analysis of syllables and words. (b) Incorrect pronunciation: Encourage habit of consulting diction- ary. Call attention to mistakes. Have pupils to keep a list of words which they mispronounce and give frequent drill work therein. (c) Unnatural tone: Conversation drill. Lead pupil to see the adap- tation of the tone to the sentiment. (d) Lack of expression: See that pupil has clear grasp of thought. (e) Repetition: Require silent reading preparatory to oral. 3. Punctuation marks serve as guides to the meaning. 4. By instruction designed to give pupil clear concepts and a vivid mental picture of what the language describes. 5. (a) Manner of delivery, (b, c) See 2, June '96. (d) See 1, Sept. '95. (e) The correct utterance of words. Sept. 1902. 2. Improves the memory, affords drill in expression, extends and re- fines the vocabulary. 3. Material should be of recognized literary standing, entertaining, af- ford information and culture to pupils and be simple enough for them to understand. At this stage of the work pupil is presumed to have mas- tered the mechanics of reading and should now read with ease and en- joyment much of the choicest literature. 5. See 2(a), June 1902 and 5, June '97. 6. See 5, Sept. '97. 23 UNITED STATES HISTORY. Second Grade. Sept. '94. 1. (a) The solemn declaration of the Congress of the United States of America on July 4, 1776, by which they formally renounced their sub- jection to the government of Great Britain. (b) Thomas Jefferson. 2. In 1087, Andros ordered the legislature to deliver to him the char- ter of Connecticut. To prevent its coming into his possession it was taken from hall and kept safely hidden in a hollow oak tree which was called therefrom the "charter oak." 3. (a) 1829-37. (b) Nullification, and National Bank question. 4. Admission of Texas. 5. The doctrine of non-interference of European powers in the polit- ical affairs of the nations of the American continent. Sentiment ad- vanced by President Monroe that the United States government; is op- posed to any extension of monarchical institutions on the American con- tinents. 6. Franklin, Pierce, Taylor, Lee, Davis and Grant. 7. Era of political harmony. Monroe was President. 8. (a) See 1, May '95. First Grade, (b) William D. Mosely. 9. Morse, telegraph; Fulton, steamboat; Edison, electric light; Howe, sewing machine; Whitney, cotton gin. 10. Bull Run, Confederate; Gettysburg, Union; Atlanta, Union; Chickamauga, Confederate; Chancellorsville, Confederate. May '95. 1. On the explorations of John and Sebastian Cabot. 2. The Puritans came from England to America, that they might "worship God in accordance with the dictates of conscience. 3. See 5, Sept. '94. Second Grade. 4. Spanish Explorer — Columbus, West Indies; English — John Cabot, Atlantic Coast of North America: Dutch — Henry Hudson, Hudson River; French — Champlain, Lake Champlain, and Cartier, the St. Lawrence River. 5. See 3, Sept. '94. First Grade. 6. Jackson inaugurated the "spoils system" by giving offices to his political friends, declaring that "to the victors belong the spoils." 7. (a) His failure to carry out the principles of the party electing him — especially his veto of the United States Bank Bill. (b) His using too freely the veto power. 8. The Battle of Gettysburg was fought July 2nd and 3d, 1863, with Generals Meade and Lee comanding the opposing forces. At the close of the first day the Union troops were entrenched on a range of hills south of the town. Gulp's Hill, the eastern spur, had been taken by the Confederates but had to be abandoned the following day. The turning point of the battle, and of the war, came with the repulse of Pickett's brigade as it charged up Cemetery Ridge in the face of a fire which cut down three-fourths of their number. Union victory. Confederate loss 36,000. Union 23,000 men. 9. The presidential election of 1876 was claimed by both Democrats and Republicans. The Joint Electoral Commission was composed of five U. S. senators, five U. S. representatives, and five justices of the Supreme Oourt, appointed to settle the dispute. By their decision, Rutherford B. Hayes became president. 24 10. Important events 1891-'y5 — The settlement of differences between the United States and Italy, the Columbian Exposition at Chicago, the death of the poet Whittier and of James G. Blaine, the statesman; the strike of the Pullman employees, and the establishment of "Greater New York." June '96. 1. For Americus Vespucius, who made several voyages to the New World, and wrote interesting accounts of his travels. 2. Virginia was settled in 1607 at Jamestown by Englismen in search of wealth and adventure. 3. See 2, Sept. '94. Second Grade. 4. (a) See 5(b), Sept. '94. Second Grade. (b) The Venezuelan boundary dispute between that country and Great Britain in which the U. S. interfered, citing the "Monroe Doctrine as authority for so doing. 5. 1492 — Discovery of America by Columbus; 1607 — Jamestown set- tled; 1620 — Landing of Pilgrims at Plymouth; 1754 — French and Indian War began; 1775 — Battles of Lexington and Concord; 1787 — Constitution adopted; 1812 — Declaration of War with Great Britain; 1845 — Admission of Texas and Florida; war with Mexico declared; 1861 — Opening of Civil War; 1863 — Emancipation Proclamation, Battle of Gettysburg and fall of Vicksburg. 6. Saratoga — American victory 1777, causing surrender of Burgoyne and six thousand troops. Yorktown — Surrender of Cornwallis to Washington. Gettysburg — Greatest battle of Civil War. Union victory. Richmond — Capital of Confederacy and the vicinity of last battles of the War. Chicago — Terrific conflagration 1871. World's Fair, 1893. 7. See 9, Sept. '94. Second Grade. 8. Hayes — Invention of electric light; Garfield — His assassination; Arthur — Standard time adopted; Cleveland — Charleston earthquake; Har- rison — Passage of McKinley Tariff Bill. .9. Thomas Jefferson — Declaration of Independence, Embargo Act, Louisiana Purchase; Alexander Hamilton — Successful financial policy; Daniel Webster — Nullification tariff; Compromise Bill; Andrew Jackson — Nullification; Seminole War; United States Bank; Grover Cleveland — Venezuela boundary dispute; Civil Service Reform. 10. See 4, May '95. First Grade. Sept. 1896. 1. See First Grade, 1, Sept. '94. , 2. See First Grade, 2, Sept. '94. 3. (a) Revolutionary War — Cause, "Taxation without representation"; result, Independence of America. (b) War of 1812-14 — ^Cause, impressment of American seamen by Great Britain; result, our prestige as a nation was established abroad and England has never since attempted to interfere with our commerce. (c) Mexican War — Cause, annexation of Texas; result, the settlement of the boundary between Texas and Mexico and the cession to the United State of California, Nevada and Utah, nearly all of Arizona, New Mexico, Colorado and Wyoming. (d) Civil War — Cause, secession of Southern States; "State rights"; slavery question; result, the preservation of the Union and emancipation of the slaves. 4. Orators — Lincoln. Generals — Washington, Jackson, Wm. H. Harrison, Taylor, Pierce, Grant, Garlield and Ben. Harrison. 5. Jackson — Orphan of Irish parentage, soldier in continental army at thirteen, worked at saddler's trade and taught school. Fillmore — Without opportunities for education, at fourteen was ap- prenticed to a fuller, spending spare moments in study, afterward clerk in a law office until admitted to the bar. Lincoln — Grew up as a farmer boy, without educational advantages. Johnson — Was never at school a day in his life — at ten, apprenticed to a tailor. Garfield — the son of a widow, his helping to support the family pre- vented his attending school; later he was janitor in Hiram College that he might become a student there. 6. Washington, 1789-'97, Federalist; John Adams, 1797-1801, Federal- ist; Thos. Jefferson, lS01-'09, Republican; James Madison, 1809-'17, Re- publican; James Monroe, lS17-'25, Republican; John Q. Adams, 1825-'29, Republican; Andrew Jackson, 1829-'37, Democrat; Martin VanBuren, 1837-'41, Democrat; Wm. Henry Harrison, 1841-'41, Whig; John Tyler, 1841-'45, Whig; James K. Polk, 1845-'49, Democrat; Zachary Taylor, 1849- '50, Whig; Millard Fillmore, 1850-'53, Whig; Franklin Pierce, 1853-'57, Democrat; James Buchanan, 1857-'61, Democrat; Abraham Lincoln, 1861- '65, Republican; Andrew Johnson, 1865-'69, Republican; Ulysses S. Grant, 1869-'77, Republican; Rutherford B. Hayes, 1877-1881, Republican; James A. Garfield, 1881, Republican; Chester A. Arthur, 18Sl-'85. Republican; Grover Cleveland, 1885-'89, Democrat; Benjamin Harrison, 1889-'93, Re- publican; Grover Cleveland, 1893-'97, Democrat; William McKinley, 1897- '01, Republican; Theodore Roosevelt, 1901-' — , Republican. 7. Five. (1903). 8. William D. Mosely. (b) Andrew Jackson. 9. See First Grade, 1, May '95. 10. Free coinage of silver on a basis of 16 to 1. June 1897. 1. The Northmen. Their claim is not a good one, because their ex- plorations, long forgotten, failed to benefit mankind. 2. Indians were divided into tribes, each tribe having its own chief or "sachem" who was almost invariably a renowned warrior. Their dwellings were tent-like in structure, made by fastening saplings to- gether and covering the same with the skins of animals. They had few utensils, these being made of stone or copper. For clothing, they wore the skins of wild beasts and shoes or "moccasins" of buckskin, with shell beads for ornaments. Their food consisted chiefly of wild game and fish, Indian corn and beans. 3. See 2(b), Sept. '98. First Grade. 4. Author, Thomas Jeferson; adopted July 4, 1776, by the Continen- tal Congress in session at Philadelphia. 5. Virginia — Financial gain. Maryland — The founding of an asylum for persecuted Catholics. Pennsylvania — The founding of an asylum for persecuted Quakers. Rhode Island — The securing of civil and religious liberty to people of all denominations. Georgia — The establishment of a refuge for the poor and persecuted, especially for honest but unfortunate men, imprisoned for debt. 6. Andre — English officer sent to negotiate with Arnold for West Point; he was captured by Americans and hanged as a spy. For others, see 7, June '98. Second Grade. 7. See First Grade 1, May, '95. 8. In New England, farmers and their sons did their own work; in 26 the South it was done by negro slaves, while the owner, a man of wealth and influence, lived a life of ease. Roads were few, rivers had to be forded, traveling done chiefly on horseback or in heavy coaches. Mail was carried in passenger coaches. Material for clothing was made largely at home. Candles were used for lighting. Gentlemen wore cocked hats, their hair in a cue, knee breeches and shoes with heavy buckles. Ladies wore high-heeled shoes and lofty headdresses, and their dresses of rich brocade, were fashioned to wear over large hoops. The common people wore homespun. 10. The enactment of the New York legislature in 1897, whereby New York, Brooklyn and adjacent towns were all united under one municipal government, raising New York to the second in rank, in area and popu- lation, among the cities of the world. Sept. '1897. 1. Louisiana — purchased from France. Ohio — became undisputed English territory after French and Indian War, and passed to the United States after War for Independence. Florida — purchased from Spain. California — by conquest, from Mexico. Alaska — purchased from Russia. 2. (a) In 1619, by the Dutch. (b) In 1808, by the Federal Constitution; q. v., Art I, Sec. 9. 3. In 1800 an equal number of electoral votes were cast for Thomas Jefferson and Aaron Burr respectively; in 1824, of four candidates for president, no one received a majority; in 1876, double returns were sent in by several of the Southern States, the Democratic electors claiming that they had been elected fairly, the Republicans, that voters had been prevented from voting. In the first two instances, Jefferson and J. Q. Adams respectively were elected by Congress; in the last-mentioned, tie electors of both parties submitted their votes to an "Electoral Commis- sion" consisting of five U. S. senators, five representatives and five judges of the Supreme Court, which decided in favor of the Republican candi- date, Rutherford B. Hayes. 4. (a) New England bitterly opposed the war of 1812-14, and in De- cember, 1814, a convention was called at Hartford to protest against it. The meeting was conducted secretly, no record was kept, but it was found out that they advised secession. Peace was declared before their committee, with a statement of their objections, could reach Washington. (b) See 4 (b), June, '97. First Grade. 5. New England view, that Constitution was established by the peo- ple of tJie United States as a tvhole, and this, the Constitution, establishes a national government. Southern view : That the Constitution is a com- pact between the States. 6. (a) See 4 (b), Oct., '94; (b) Reciprocity, a treaty concluded be- tween two nations conferring equal privileges as regards customs or charges on imports, (c) See 10 (cK First Grade, June. '96. (d) See 4 (e), Oct., '94. (e) See 4 (c), Oct., '94. 7. See Second Grade, 9, Sept., '94. 8. Samuel Adams — American Independence. Wendell Phillips — Abolition of slavery; and other reforms. Daniel Webster — Federalism, union and tariff question. John C. Calhoun — State rights and opposition to the tariff. Benj. H. Hill — State rights in the Union. 9. Nebraska (1S67) ; North and South Dakota, Montana, and Wash- ington (1889); Idaho and Wyoming (1890); Utah (1896). 10. President McKinley, upon coming into ofiice, immediately called 27 an extra session of Congress to consider new tariff measures, (b) Dingley Tariff Bill. June, 1898. 1. (a) On the return of Captain John Smith to England (1609), the settlers ceased to provide for themselves and the supplies left by him were soon exhausted. Famine ensued. Of five hundred souls but sixty survived the winter of 1609-10. The settlement was about to be aban- doned when ships and supplies arrived from England, thus putting an end to the "Starving Time." (e) Lord Delaware, the new governor, took charge of the colony and conditions improved. Tobacco raising became the chief industry, was used as currency. Slavery was introduced in 1619, thus facilitating its production. 2. In 1619, a ship-load of young women were sent from England, and each settler so inclined paid one hundred pounds of tobacco for her passage and chose one of the number for his wife. 3. "Bond servants," in some places called "redemptioners," were poor children sent over to the colonies, and bound to serve their masters un- til they were of age, or adults bound for a term of years. During their bondage they could be bought and sold like slaves. This way of procur- ing laborers, became very common. There were "slaves" in all the colonies, but in New England negroes were mostly kept for house-servants, by far the larger number being taken to the colonies which raised tobacco, rice and Indigo, where their labor could be more profitably employed. (b) To no one man or set of men can the credit be given. They were guaranteed from interference by the United States government by the first amendment to the Constitution, and had been demanded by practi- cally all of the States. 4. Born in Hanover County, Va., May 19, 1736, he practiced law; gained a reputation as an orator; became a member of the Virginia House of Burgesses, introducing the resolution opposing the Stamp Act; was del- egate to Continental Congress in 1774, and first governor of the State of Tirginia. 5. In most of the New England colonies, the congregational form; in the South, the regular church of England form was transplanted. The Dutch form of church was for a while maintained in what later became the New York colony. 6. (a) At the beginning of the War of 1812, the United States had ttnt a small navy. During the summer of 1813, Commodore Perry fitted out a fleet on Lake Erie, where, in September, he won an immortal victory. (b) The British, under General Ross, on march to Washington, were ■opposed at Bladensburg Bridge by six hundred sailors from Barney's fleet, who were forced to surrender. Resulted in the taking and burn- ing of Washington. 7. Arnold. See 6 (b), Sept., '95. Ethan Allen — Revolutionary hero who captured Ticonderoga (1775), ^iemanding its surrender in the name of the "Great Jehovah," and the Continental Congress." Roger Williams — Founder of Providence, Rhode Island. Lafayette — French nobleman who gave material aid to America in the war for independence. Daniel Boone — Celebrated pioneer in the settlement of Kentucky. Alexander Hamilton — See 3, June, 1902. First Grade. Washington Irving — "Father of American literature," author of the ■"Sketch Book." - Alex. H. Stephens — Vice-president of the Confederacy. 28 Admiral Dewey — Won the "Battle of Manilla," May, 1898. 8. Most important campaigns and battles from Bull Run to Gettys- burg. Campaign of General Sterling Price in Missouri, Confederate Victory. (1861). Grant's operations in the West (1862-3), resulting in the fall of Vicks- burg and the control of the Mississippi by Union forces. In the east (1862-3), Jackson's valley campaign (Virginia), Confeder- ate victory; McClellan's peninsular campaign, Confederate victory; Lee's invasion of Maryland, terminating in the drawn battle of Antietam; Battle of Fredericksburg, Confederate victory; Chancellorsville, Confed- erate victory, and Lee's invasion of Pennsylvania, ending in the Battle of Gettysburg. ' On the coast, the Monitor had withstood the Merrimac ('62), the block- ade of Southern ports had been made more effective, and Admiral Farra- gut had taken New Orleans. 9. See Second Grade, 10, June, '97. 10. Spanish misrule in Cuba and the blowing up of the United States battleship Maine in Havana Harbor, Feb. 15, 1898. Sept. '98. 1. (a) Spain, England, France, Holland, Norway, (b) Spain. 2. Virginia — Church of England. Massachusetts— Puritans. Connecticut — Puritans. Rhode Island — Dissenting Puritans from Massachusetts. Maryland — Roman Catholics. Delaware — Swedish Protestants and others. Pennsylvania — Quakers. New Jersey — Quakers and Presbyterians. New York — Dutch Protestants. New Hampshire — ^Puritans. i North Carolina — Church of England. South Carolina — Church of England and French Huguenots. Georgia — Church of England and Lutherans. 3. (a) Governor Berkeley would take no steps to protect the border settlements of Virginia from the Indians; accordingly the colonists armed themselves and chose Nathaniel Bacon as their leader. They were pronounced rebels by the governor, who attempted without success to arrest Bacon. Latter continued his Indian warfare and was proclaimed a traitor. Civil War reigned and Jamestown was accidentally burned. The death of the leaders brought the rebellion to an abrupt end. (b) In 1619 a Dutch trading vessel brought to Virginia a cargo of African negi^oes, who were sold to the planters as slaves. (c) See 179.3, Eli Whitney, a native of Massachusetts and a tutor in the family of Nathaniel Green, near Savannah, invented the cotton gin. (d) See Second Grade 5 (b), Sept.. '94. (e) See "Carpet-baggers," First Grade. 4, June, '97. 4. (a) See 4 (b), Sept., '94. First Grade, (b) See (8), May, '95, Second Grade. 5. Blue laios, certain laws said to have been adopted in the early gov- ernment of the New Haven colony and so called on account of their strin- gency. Minute-men — were bands of militia organized just prior to the Revolu- tion, and ready for service at a "minute's notice." Loco-focos. — See First Grade, 4, June, '97. i; Henry letters — purported to give evidence of a plot on the part of Eng- 29 land, to induce New England States to withdraw from the United States and join themselves to Canada. President Madison paid Henry $50,000 for them, but they proved to be fraudulent. Aholitionists — the term by which were known those who demanded the abolition of slavery in the South. 6. The Acadians were French settlers from Normandy who retained the customs and traditions of Prance although the territory belonged to England. On the breakout of the French and Indian War between those countries England ordered them transported, on the plea that they would give aid to the enemy. Without warning their homes were burned and they were hurried on board ships which scattered them throughout the colonies. (b) "Evangeline", by Longfellow, gives the pathetic story of their wanderings. 7^ English impressment of American seamen. Orders in council, Milan Decree, Embargo Act. 8. (a) Andrew Jackson was a man of indomitable will and determi- nation; of irascible temper and strong prejudices. He became famous as the "Hero of New Orleans," in 1815, and in the Creek and Seminole war he rendered valuable service to his country- He vetoed, as presi- dent, the bill to recharter the National Bank. His political opponents were Clay, Webster and Calhoun, though the latter was of his own party. On the passage of the Nullification Ordinance, with his characteristic promptness, he despatched an armed vessel to enforce the collection of duties at the ports of South Carolina. 9. See 6, Sept., '96. Second Grade. 10. Cervera — Spanish Admiral whose fleet was captured by American naval force in Santiago Harbor. Blanco — Captain-general of Cuba during Cuban war with Spain for in- dependence, Hohson — American naval officer who sank the "Merrimac" in Santiago Harbor. Shafter — American general in command at battle of Santiago. Schley — American Admiral in command of naval forces at Santiago. June, 1899. 1. See 10, May, '95. First Grade. 2. Balboa with a company of Spaniards, crossing the Isthmus of Da- rien, first saw the Pacific Ocean from the top of mountains, from whence, descending to the shore, he rushed into the water with flag and sword and claimed all countries touched by the ocean for Spain. 3. Witches were persons supposed to be endowed by Satan with the power of harming others, by causing sickness or other misfortune. Ner- vous disorders, in particular were attributed to these supposed "witches" who were punished severely and even executed. , This delusion reached its height in Salem, Mass., in 1692, twenty inno- cent persons being hanged in one month. 4. The Louisiana purchase. See 1 (a). May, '95; First Grade and 7, Sept. '95. 5. Since the trial trip of Fulton's first steamboat, the "Clermont," in 1807, navigation has been revolutionized in every part of the world. The steamboats on the Great Lakes and our western rivers were responsible for the unprecedented stream of immigration which in twenty years, gave to the States west of the Alleghanies a population of four millions and led to the marvelous development of the Middle West. In 1819 commerce received a mighty impetus through the introduction of steam on seago- ing vessels, thus shortening to less than a week, the two or three month's trip from Europe to America. 30 G. The Battle of Olustee was fought Feb. 20, 1S64, and was the re- sult of an attempted invasion of the State by the Union forces under General Seymour, who had begun a march along the line of railway from Jacksonville to Tallapoosa. At Olustee, he was opposed by a Con- federate force under Generals Finegan and Colquitt, and after a sharp, battle lasting several hours was forced to retreat to Jacksonville. This was the last expedition undertaken against Florida, during the war. 7. The hard life of the early settlers gave little time for education. Schools were few and generally poor; the discipline in them was severe and sometimes brutal. At the close of the Revolution there were schools in most of the leading towns and cities. Colleges established before that time were Harvard, William and Mary, Yale and Princeton, alsa one in New York and another in Philadelphia. Nowhere has the ad- vancement of the age been so much felt as in the schoolroom and neither time nor money is spared in providing the best text-books, school appa- ratus and all appliances helpful in the training of the young, while by expenditure of large sums of money for the support of common school education has been placed within the reach of all. 8. In 1766; while Florida was under British control Dr. Andrew Turn- bull, at an expenditure of $67,000, planted a colony of Greeks, Italians and Minorcans at Mosquito Inlet. The settlement was named New Smyr- na and was a success. Indigo and sugar cane were the chief articles cultivated. On account of alleged cruel treatment, the colonists after- ward removed to St. Augustine. 9. Fearing the seizure of Florida by the British as a base of opera- tions against the United States in the war of 1812, President Madison, appointed commissioners from Georgia to negotiate the cession of Flori- da by Spain. On a failure to secure the provinces, Congress secretly proposed that forcible possession be taken, should a foreign power show intention of seizing them. The plan became known and a force of Geor- gia frontiersmen, uniting with the border settlers on the Florida side of the St. Mary's River formed an independent "Republic of Florida," which survived several years but on account of its inability to enforce law and order, in 1816, the territory of the "republic'' was again brought under Spanish control. (b) Francis was a leader in the Creek "War, 1812-13, was captured by General Jackson, by means of a decoy vessel flying the British flag, and hanged. His daughter, Mollie, barely escaped capture at the same time She afterward married a white man, Duncan McRimmon, whose life she had once saved, in a manner similar to the story of Pocahontas in Vir- ginia. 10. (a) ThSt.t "West Florida be annexed to Alabama. (b) Florida's first provisional governor was General Andrew Jackson. The ""Vidal" affair caused some ill-feeling on account of Jackson's arbi- trary method of procedure. Wm. P. Duval was the first territorial governor. The selection of Tal- lahassee as the State capital; the division of the territory into four coun- ties — Escambia, Jackson, Duval and St. Johns; and the Seminole "War occurred during his term of office. Sept. '99. 1. (a, b) See 3, Sept. '96. Second Grade, also 10, June '98, Second Grade. (c) Battles of the Revolution — Bunker Hill, Saratoga and Yorktown; War of 1812-14 — Perry's Victory on Lake Erie; Battle of the Thames and New Orleans; Mexican War — Buena Vista, Monterey and Vera Cruz; Civil War — Bull Run, Gettysburg and Antietam; Spanish-American War 31 — Manila, Santiago, and the sinking of Cervera's fleet outside Santiago Harbor. (d) Revolution — American commanders: Washington and Schuyler; War of 1812 — American: Commodore Perry and Gen. Jackson; British Commodore Barclay and Gen. Prevost; Mexican War — Americans; Gen- erals Taylor and Scott; Mexican: Generals Ampudia and Santa Anna; Civil War; Federal: General Grant and Sheridan; Confederate: Gen- erals Lee and Jackson ; Spanish-American War — American : General Shat- ter and Admiral Dewey; Spanish, Admiral Cervera and General Toral. 2. (7) Sept. '94, First Grade. 3. (1) May '95. First Grade. 4. Treaty of Paris, by which England recognized the independence of the thirteen colonies and gave America the right to fish off the banks of Newfoundland; Treaty of Peace with France in 1800; Treaty of Ghent following war of 1812-14, declaring peace with England; Treaty of Wash- ington, between England and the United States, providing that all causes of difference between the two countries be settled by arbitration; Treaty toith Mexico, following the Mexican War, which gave us California, Utah, Arizona and part of New Mexico and Colorado. 5. Philip Livingston.— Signer of Declaration of Independence. Horace Greely. — Founder of New York Tribune; candidate for the presidency on Liberal Republican ticket and defeated by Grant. Wm. H. Setvard — Secretary of State during Lincoln's administration. Marchand — French army officer who planted the French flag at Fasho- da, Africa, in 1898, barring the British passage to Uganda. He after- ward withdrew. Dreyfus — French army ofiicer, accused and unjustly convicted of treas- on and banished, but afterward pardoned by the president. Eruger — President of the Transvaal Republic recently conquered by Great Britain. Kitchener — British general who conquered the Soudan and took active part in the South African war. Aguinaldo — See 10 (c), Sept. '98, First Grade. Deioey — American naval oflacer who sank the Spanish fleet in Manila Bay, May 1, 1898. Torral — Spanish General who surrendered Santiago to the Americans July 17, 1898. 6. Bell telephones. For others see 9, Sept. '94, Second Grade. 7. Spain, England, Spain, United States. 8. East Florida was the Peninsular, bounded on the west by the Gulf of Mexico and the Apalachicola River, and on the north by a line run- ning from the junction of the Flint and Chattahoochee Rivers to the source of the St. Mary's and down this to the ocean. West Florida extended from Lake Pontchartrain and the Mississippi River as far north as the thirty-first parallel, which formed the northern boundary to the Chattahoochee River, the eastern boundary. dary. (b) In 1763, when Florida became British territory. (c) In 1822, upon its organization as a territory of the United States. 9. Principal engagements: Murder of Gen. Thompson; Massacre of Major Dade's command; Battles in Big Wahoo swamp. Ft. Mellon, Okee- chobee and attack on Col. Harney on the Caloosahatchie. Officers in command : Generals Clinch, Call, Gaines, Scott, Jesup, Her- nandez, Eustis, Taylor, Armistead and Worth. Treaties : In 1812, concluded at Payne's Landing, the Indian agreement to send certain chiefs to examine the lands in the West appropriated for their use by the United States. 32 1S3G — Agreement of the chiefs to make peace if allowed to occupy the land south of the Withlacoochee. 1837 — Several chiefs agreed to prepare to go "West at once, the United States promising to buy their fai-ms and cattle and to allow the negroes to go with them. 1839 — Indians agreed to stay below Peace Creek and Lake Okeechobee, and no white man was to enter territory assigned them. 10. David S. Walker, constitutional convention; Harrison Reed, inau- guration of public schools; O. B. Hart, Florida allowed two representa- tives in Congress; Marcellus L. Stearns, disagreement over the election of presidential electors in '7(3; Geo. F. Drew, reduction of rate of taxa- tion by two and a half mills; Wm. D. Bloxham, sale of huge tract of public land to Philadelphia capitalists; Edward A. Perry, yellow fever scourge; Francis P. Fleming, discovery of phosphate; Henry L. Mitchell, new school law enacted; Wm. D. Bloxham, fishery convention at Tampa; W. S. Jennings, Jacksonville fire. June 1900. 1. First voyage, 1492, on which were discovered first San Salvador, then Cuba, Haiti and other islands; Second, in 1893, founded a colony at San Domingo, Haiti and explored other islands; third, landed at mouth of Orinoco River, South America in 1498, and fourth, touched at Isthmus of Darien, 1502. 2. All were patriot leaders in opposing British injustice to the colo- nists : Adams, Hancock and Franklin were signers of the Declaration of Independence; Otis and Patrick Henry aroused the Americans by their oratory. 3. See tj, Sept., '96, Second Grade. 4. The International Exposition, at New York, 1853; Centennial Expo- sition in Philadelphia, 1876; International Cotton Exposition, New Or- leans. 1884; World's Columbian Exposition, Chicago, 1893; International and Cotton States Exposition, Atlanta, 1895; Pan-American Exposition, Buffalo, 1901. 5. Charles C. Pinckney — American commissioner to France during trouble in 1800; "millions for defense but not one cent for tribute" was his famous declaration. Sergeant Jasper rescued the flag, shot from its staff, during the siege of Fort Moultrie by the British in 1776. George Peabody, American philanthropist, who endowed a free library and institute of Art and Science at Baltimore and left large sums for educational purposes. Blaine, statesman, many years member of Congress and Secretary of State under Benjamin Harrison. Schley, American admiral in Spanish-American War. Clarke, Senator from Montana, unseated because convicted of bribery. Roberts, Mormon Congressman elected from Utah, but not allowed to take his seat because convicted of polygamy. Taliaferro, United States Senator from Florida. 6. See Preface. 7. Ponce cle Leon was a soldier, broken in health and fortune, who sought a fabled fountain of perpetual youth. He landed in Florida in 1513, and prosecuted his fruitless search among her springs and groves. Narvaez, in 1528, explored Florida in search of gold, but found only hostile Indians and starvation. They finally constructed rude boats and put to sea, but only four survivors reached Mexico to tell of their priva- tions. 8. Gen. Jackson, having been sent to stop the incursions of the Sem- inoles into Georgia, drove them out. destroyed their chief village, and 33 executed two men — Arbuthnot and Ambristee, who had aided the In- dians and were British subjects. 9. See 4, May, '95, First Grade. First military governor, General An- drew Jackson. 10. For educational progress see 10, Sept., '99 (First Grade). For development of resources see 9, June, 1900 (First Grade). Large depos- its of lime and kaolin are also being profitably mined; forests of yellow pine furnish lumber and turpentine; the palmetto is utilized through the fibre it furnishes; tropical fruits are cultivated and early vegetables are raised for northern markets — these are a few of the ways in which the State's resources are being developed and her industrial interests ad- vanced. Sept. 1900. 1. (a) From the name given in one of her charters, "His Majesty's Ancient Colony and Dominion of Virginia," and because v/hen banished from England, Charles II was invited to reign as king in Virginia. (b) The cavaliers possessed large landed estates, owned many slaves, spent much time in, hunting and fishing, and in dispensing kindly hospi- tality to visitors. Illustrious descendants — Washington and Lee. 2. (a) The Desire, launched at Marblehead, Mass. (b) Attendance at church every Sunday was obligatory upon all and absence without a good excuse was punishable. Quakers found in Mas- sachusetts were subject to banishment and loss of an ear for first offense; for second, loss of the other ear, and for third, the tongue was bored through with a red-hot iron. Four were hanged. 3. (a) The relief of men, imprisoned for debt. (b) A treaty of peace and annual presents of guns, ammunition and other articles established friendly relations. (c) The Salzburgers were Lutherans persecuted in their native valley in the Austrian Alps, who sought homes in Georgia, locating on the Sa- vannah River at "Ebenezer." (d) The importation of slaves was forbidden, as that would encour- age indolence on the part of white settlers. (e) In 1785 they came to Georgia — Chas. Wesley, as private Secretary to Mr. Oglethorpe, and his brother, John, as a missionary to preach to the Indians and colonists. 4. The paper money issued by the Continental Congress, so far ex- ceeded the country's ability to redeem it, that it continued to decrease in value, until two hundred dollars in bills equaled only one in coin. The States also issued paper money which lost its value in the same way. After the Revolution, owing to the scarcity of money, produce was bartered for necessary articles. Taxes were levied by the States to pay running expenses, but fre- quently the people were too poor to pay them. In Massachusetts a band of men led by Daniel Shays, having refused to pay them, threatened to destroy the State government unless paper money was issued to relieve them. 5. See 5, June, '99. First Grade. 6. See 7, Sept. '94, First Grade. Tariff — Democratic party against, Republican, for a high protective tariff — a leading issue since 1828. United States Bank — A prominent issue in 1868 ; Whigs for; Democrats against. Annexation of Texas — Supported by Democrats, opposed by Whigs; was the issue of campaign of '44. Slavery Question, or some phase of it, was a constant bone of conten- tion until 18(50; Democratic party favoring its extension in the territo- 34 ries, the Whigs and later the Republicans contending for its restriction within existing bounds. Money question was a prominent issue in 1896 and again in 1900. Free and unlimited coinage of silver and gold on a basis of sixteen to one," being the Democratic platform, and "sound money" the Republican plat- form. 7. Discovered by Ponce de Leon in 1513, explored by Narvaez in 1528, and by DeSoto in 1539; colonized by French protestants 1564 who were exterminated by the Spaniards the following year; Menendez, the same year founded St. Augustine, the first permanent settlement in the United States; Florida became English territory in 1763 and came again under Spanish rule 1783 : ceded to United States in 1821. 8. See 9 (b), June '99, Second Grade. 9. Commissioners appointed by legislative council in 1823, selected for the capital, the Seminole town, Tallahassee. First Legislative Council — Pensacola, 1822; Second — St. Augustine, 1823; Third— Tallahassee, 1824. Counties established in 1H22— Escambia, between the Perdido and Apa- lachicola Rivers; Jackson, between the latter and the Suwanee River; Duval, from the Suwanee to the Ocean and north of a line from the mouth of this river to Jacksonville, and St. John, end of the peninsular .south of this line. (b) 1844, by United States, cost eighty-flve thousand dollars. The principal appositive only takes the sign and should be placed immediately preceding the thing possessed. (3) This was Franklin the philosopher and statesman's motto. 5. (1) To denote mere futurity, shall is used in the first person and will in the second and third. (2) To express determination loill is used in the first person and shall in the second and third. (3) In asking questions shall or will is used according as one or the other is to be used in reply. 6. (a) The present participle is formed by adding ing to the verb root; the perfect by adding ed to the verb root (irregular verbs, how- ever, have a variety of endings for this form; as, d, t, n or none at all)., the compound participle is a combination of a simple participle with one of the auxiliary participles being, having or having been. (b) A verbal noun in ing is the name of an action and hence may be used as the subject or object of a verb. A verbal adjective in ing is a descriptive word used to qualify ^nouns. as other adjectives do. (c) To see is to believe — equivalent to seeing is believing. (d) Rise, rises, rising, rose, risen. Talk, talks, talking, talked. (d) Verbs that have same form for past tense and past participle have only four forms; those that have distinct forms for each have five. (e) See 8, Sept. 1902, Second or Third Grade. 8. Noun — To live for others is noble (subject). We should learn to govern ourselves (object of verb). He is about to leave us (object of prep.) To bear our fate is to conquer it (pred. nom.). Delightful task! to rear the tender thought (explanatory mod.). Adjective — His title to command rested on force (mod. of "title.") Adverb — 'We will strive to learn (mod. of "please"). Noun Clause — When he will come is not known (subject of sentence). We know that the earth is round (object of verb). Things are not what they seem (comp. of verb be). The fact, that he is not here, is significant (appositive). Give careful attention to what you read (object of prep.) June 1899. "; 4. See 5, June '99, Second and Third Grade, 5. See 1, Sept. 1902, First Grade. 6. See 7, June '98, Second or Third Grade. 8. (a) See 8, June '98, Second or Third Grade. (b) As the non-restrictive clause adds a thought, or makes an explana- tion in a parenthetical sense, it must be set off from the rest of the sentence by a comma. 9. Neither you nor I can go (correlative). A fish breathes though it has no lungs (subordinate). Longfellow is the poet who wrote "Evangeline" (conj. pronoun). I love him because he is kind (conj. adverb). The tree lies where it fell . . (com. conj. adverb). 10. That day was gloomy (adjective). He is one that lives for others (conj. pronoun). They say that we are weak (conjunction). That is preferred (adj. pronoun). 70 Sept. '99. 1. By the conjugation of a verb is meant an orderly arrangement of its forms in the different modes and tenses. 2. (a) See 8, June '99, Second or Third Grade, (b) (1) Verbal noun, object of at. (2) Predicate adjective, or imperfect participle, complement of the verb is; combined with the verb is, it makes the progressive form of the verb play. (3) Verbal adjective modifying the noun boy. 3. (a) See 4, Sept. '94, First Grade. (b) Adjective adverbial and substantive. (c) See 8 (b), Sept. '98, First Grade. 4. (a) The speaker addressing the audience is a deep thinker. Si- mon Peter having a sword, drew it. (b) The cackling of geese saved Rome. True worth is in being not seeming. To succeed requires perseverance. 6. Do — ^Infinitive; principal word of infinitive phrase. All — Adjective pronoun, object of do. Complain — Infinitive, object of prep, except. What — Conj. pronoun equivalent to ' that which. Into — Preposition, introducing phrase. 8. (a) See 4 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. (b) See 1 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. (c) An expletive is a word used in such a way as to give fulness to a sentence, or to render it agreeable to the ear. (d) Reject such as are shop-worn (conj. pronoun). The house was abandoned, as it was unsafe (conjunction). What other toil is as hard? (adverb). I con3ulted him as a physician (preposition (or sign of apposition).). 9. (a) Any noun not ending in s must add the apostrophe and s ('s) to denote possession. A plural noun ending in s expresses ownership by addition of apos- trophe only. If plural does not end in s, ownership is expressed in the same way as in singular nouns. Singular proper nouns ending in s take the full possessive sign ('s) to denote possession. (a) See 2, Sept. '97, Second or Third Grade, man, men man's, men's man, men bird, birds bird's, birds' bird, birds j 10. Personal — He has arrived (simple). You yourself should go (compound). Relative — Whoever studies will learn (compound). I remember ivhat you said (double relative, simple). Take whatever seems best (double relative, compound). Interrogative — ; Who is there? Adjective — • ' That book is mine (demonstrative). Some men are scholars (indefinite). He gave each boy an apple (distributive). ! Each child loves the other (reciprocal). 71 June 900. 1. See 1, Sept. '98, First Grade. 2. Boy's, boys'; plaintiff's, plaintiffs'; bridegroom's, bridegrooms'. For other forms, see 4, Sept. 1900, Second Grade. 3. See 5, Sept. '98, First Grade. 4. Noun — Subject of a sentence. Object of a transitive verb. Complement of a verb. Appositive. Object of for. Independent. Adjective. Adverb. i" i | He came to see me (infin. phrase used as adv.; mod. came; expresses purpose. I told him to come home. 5. See 8, June '99, First Grade. 6. A noun clause is one performing the office of a noun; as. That the earth is round has been proved. The object complement of a verb is that part of the predicate of a sen- tence which represents the receiver of the action; as, Brutus stabbed €aesar. An attribute complement is a noun, pronoun, or adjective completing the predicate of a sentence, and relating to the subject; as. He is a teacher: I am he; You are weary. 7. Conjunctive adverbs are words that perform, at the same time, the office of a conjunction and of an adverb; as, We listen when pleas- ure calls, 8. A noun or pronoun used to complete the meaning of a transitive verb is called a direct object; as, I have the book. When added to a verb to denote that to or for which anything is, or is done, or that from which anything proceeds, it is called an indirect ob- ject; as, I bought him a book. Sept. 1900. 1. In such cases, the real subject follows the verb and there is an ex- pletive — ^used merely to introduce the sentence. It, the apparent subject, is an expletive — serving merely to introduce the predicate and give it a prominent place. 2. See 8, June 99, First Grade. 4. (a) Who (whose, whom), which and what when used in asking questions and not followed by a noun, are interrogative pronouns; whose, which and what used before nouns in questions are interrogative adjectives. (b) A conjunctive pronoun is one that connects a clause of which it forms a part to some word which the clause modifies, usually called rel- ative pronouns. Who, which what, and that are used as conjunctive pro- nouns — also as, after the words such, many and same. The conjunctive pronoun that is preferred to who or which when the antecedent includes both persons and things, and usually after an adjec- tive in the superlative degree. 5. (a) The man saw me. The man rode by. The boy flies his kite. The bird flies swiftly. (b) Trees grow. Dewey destroyed the Spanish fleet. 6. (a) The subjunctive mode is used only in subjoined dependent propositions. 72 (b) It has only three tenses; viz., present, past and past perfect, (c) As regards terminations, — s gives place to the root of the verb as, If it rai7i (not rains) I shall not go. (d) If the weather he fine {to-morrow) , the company will be large. Here be, though present in form, expresses future time. If the weather were fine (to-day), the ship would sail. In this sentence, tcere is past in form, but expresses present time. (e) "When the conjunction is omitted before subjunctive clause, the first auxiliary precedes subject; as, Had I been you, I would have spoken. 8. See 9, June '99, Second or Third Grade. 9. See 8, Sept. 98, First Grade. ^■tl June 1901. 1. See 1 and 2, Oct. '94, Second or Third Grade. 2. (a) See 5, Sept. '97, Second Grade. (b) See 1, Sept. '94, First Grade. (c) Prince, prince's, princes, princes', princess. 3. (a) Beeves, beliefs, pennies, attorneys, 5's. (b) Moses', ladies', people's, McKinley-Roosevelt's, fox's. 4. See 7, Sept. '98, Second Grade. 5. See 4, June '98, Second Grade, 7. See 6, Jne 1901, Second Grade. Present tense in its simple form is the root form of the verb. Past tense is formed (a) by a change in the body of the word; (b) by adding d or ed to the present. Perfect tenses, except in the progressive form, are formed by means of the indefinite present, past and future of have, followed by the past par- ticiple. The progressive tenses are formed by the parts of the verb be; fol- lowed by the imperfect participle. The future tenses are formed by means of the auxiliary verbs shall and will followed by the infinitive mode. 9. See 6, June '98, Second Grade. Sept. 1901. 1. (a) See 2, Sept. '94, First Grade. (b) See 1, Sept. '95. (c) See 9, Sept, 99, First Grade. 2. See 5, June '99, First Grade. See 4, June '97, Second or Third Grade, See 10, Sept. '99, First Grade. See 3, Sept. 99, Second or Third Grade. 3. See 3, Oct. '94, Second or Third Grade. See 3, Sept. '94, Second or Third Grade. See 6, June '96, Second or Third Grade. 4. Active — He gave me a dollar. Passive — A dollar was given me by him, I was given a dollar by him. Active — The tailor made me a coat. Passive — A coat was made for me by the tailor. Active — I promised him a book. Passive — He was promised a book by me. A book was promised him: by me. Active — ^My friend offered me a position. Passive — ^I was o:ffered a position by my friend. Passive — ^A position was offered me by my friend. Active — The dealer sold me a book. 73 Passive — I was sold a book by the dealer. A book was sold me by tbe dealer, 5. An objective attribute is a noun or adjective showing the office, name, class, or quality conferred through the action expressed by the verb. Ophelia thought Hamlet really insane (adjective). Teaching had made her irritable (adjective). We should consider time as a sacred trust (noun). 8, 9. See 8, Sept. '98, First Grade, Nov. 1901. 1. (a) See 2, Sept. '94, First Grade, (b) See 1, Sept. '95. (e) See 9, Sept. '99, First Grade. 2. See 2, Sept. 1901, First Grade. 3. See 3, June '96, First Grade. 4. See 4, May '95, First Grade. 5. See 8, June '99, First Grade. 6. See 8 (a), Sept. '98, First Grade. June 3, 1902. 1. See G, June '96, Second or Third Grade. See 1 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. Classifying the words of a sentence as parts of speech and naming their relations to other words is called parsing. 4. See 8 (b), Sept. 98, First Grade. 5. See 5, June 1900. 6. See 10, June '98, Second or Third Grade. 7. See 4, June '98, Second or Third Grade. Sept. 1902. NOUN. VERB. I. Common I. Form 1. Concrete 1. Regular 2. Abstract 2. Irregular 3. Collective 3. Redundant II. Proper 4. Defective II. Use PRONOUN. 1. Transitive I. Personal 2. Intransitive 1. Simple III. Rank 2. Compound 1. Principal II. Relative 2. Auxiliary 1. Simple ADVERB. 2. Compound I. Use 3. Double relative 1. Simple III. Interrogation 2. Interrogative IV. Demonstrative 3. Conjunctive V. Indefinite II. Meaning 1. Place ADJECTIVE. 2. Time I. Quality 3. Number 1. Common 4. Manner 2. Proper 5. Degree II. Quantity 6. Cause 1. Cardinal numerals 7. Assertion and denial 74 III. 2. Indefinites [ONSTRATIVE CONJUNCTION. I. Co-ordinate 1. Articles 1. Copulative 2. Ordinal numerals 2. Disjunctive 3. Pronominals 3. Adversative 4. Illative II. Subordinate 1. Time 2. Reason or cause 3. Supposition or condition 5. Comparison 4. End or purpose 2. (a) See 2, Sept. '96, Second or Third Grade. See 4, June '98, First Grade. (b) Inflections may be made in four ways: (1) By adding a letter or syllable (see 4, May '95, Second Grade). (2) By an internal change in the word; as, ride, rode; man, men. (3) By the use of helping words; as, learn, will learn, have learned, had learned; more happy, etc. (4) By the use of word quite different in spelling and sound; as, be, am, is, was; good, better, best. 3. (a) See 4 (a, b), Sept. '94, First Grade. (b) Nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjectives and adverbs. See 3. June 1900. Second or Third Grade. The eye is the window of the soul. / am here without hope. We will strive to please you. You are prompt to obey. The retreat began a day later. 4. The principal parts of a verb — the three forms from which the other parts are derived — are the root, the past tense, and the perfect par- ticiple; as, love^-loved, loved; do, did, done. The tenses are named present, past, or future, according as they ex- press present, past or future time. These are called the three primary tenses; as, I see, I saw, I shall see. Historical present: see 7 (a), Sept. '99, Second or Third Grade. The perfect participle — representing action as completed — is formed from many verbs by adding ed to the root; as, refuse, refiised. From certain other verbs is formed irregularly; as, do, done. The participle in ing is called an imperfect participle because it repre- sents an action or state as incomplete, or continuing. Combined with some form of be, makes progressive form of the verb from which it is derived; as, is speaking. A verbal adjective is a participle or an infinitive performing the office of an adjective. A verbal noun is a participle or an infinitive performing the office of an adjective. A verbal noun is a participle or an infinitive used as a noun. See 4, Sept. '99, First Grade. The ancient form-, or solemn style, is used in the Bible, in religious worship, and sometimes in poetry and burlesque; as, art, wast, wert, Shalt or wilt, hast, hadst, workest, workedst, worketh, doth, hath. The emphatic form represents an act with emphasis; as, I do write. He did go. Used in the present and past indicative and subjunctive, and in the present imperative. Formed by prefixing the present and past tenses of to do to the simple form of the verb. 75 Two or more words used together in a sentence to make an assertion, are called a verb phrase; as you have been whispering. Potential verb phrases express action, being or state, as possible, nec- essary, obligatory, etc.; as, You can learn. (1) I think that he is right. (2) I think him to be right. First sentence containing an objective noun clause; second an objec- tive noun phrase equivalent in meaning to the clause. The meaning of the two sentences is the same, but the clause has been abridged to a phrase. These are called grammatical equivalents. 5. See 6, Sept. 1900, First Grade. 6. See 8 (a), Sept. '98, First Grade. 7. (a) See 8 (b), Sept. '98, First Grade. (b) When pleasure calls, we listen, (conjunctive adverb). ivhat is approved is not always just. (com. conjunctive pronoun). There is no occasion for anxiety, (conj. adverb). That plants do grow is learned from observation, (conjunction). GEOGRAPHY. Sept. '94. — Second Grade. 1. (a) Fifteen degrees, (b) Every circle contains 360 degrees. The -earth, rotating on its axis, requires twenty-four hours (approximately) for each rotation. One twenty-fourth of three hundred and sixty de- grees is fifteen degrees; hence the earth travels through fifteen degrees of longitude in one hour of time. 2 . States. Louisiana Mississippi Arkansas Tennessee Missouri Kentucky Illinois Iowa Wisconsin Minnesota Cities. Industries. New Orleans Production of cotton. Production of sugar-cane. Baton Rouge Cotton-shipping. Natchez Manufacture of cottonseed-oil. Vicksburg Cattle-raising. Production of corn, lumbering. Memphis Tobacco-raising, sheep-raising. St. Louis Production of wheat. Manufacture of flour. Quincy Manufacture of agricultural implements. Davenport Dairying. Dubuque Hog-raising; production of hay. LaCrosse Coalmining. St. Paul Fruit-raising; production of oats, rye and barley. 3. Nova Scotia, in Canada, on Atlantic coast, with Gulf of St. Law- rence north, the Atlantic east, Bay of Fundy south, and New Brunswick west. Florida — projects from south-eastern coast of the United States; Geor- gia and Alabama north, Atlantic Ocean east and south, and Gulf of Mex- ico and Alabama west. Yucatan — projects into the Gulf of Mexico, and is bounded on north, east and west by it; Central America is south. Lower California belongs to Mexico, California is north, Gulf of Califor- nia on east and Pacific Ocean south and west. Alaska Peninsula — projects from northwest coast of North America; Behring Sea, and mainland north, Pacific Ocean, east, south and west. 4. Countries. Capital. Form of Government. 76 Venezuela Guiana Caracas British — Georgetown. Dutcla — Paramaribo. French — Cayenne. Rio Janeiro. La Paz. Asuncion. Montevideo. Buenos Ayres. Santiago. Lima. Quito. Bogota. Republican. Colonial dependencies. Republican. Republican. Republican. Republican. Republican. Republican. Republican. Republican. Republican. Republican. Brazil Bolivia Paraguay- Uruguay Argentina Chile Peru Ecuador Colombia 5. Cuba, Havana; Haiti, Santo Domingo; Jamaica, Kingston; Porto Bico, San Juan. G. (a) 180 degrees either east or west, (b) 90 degrees either north- or south, (c) Parallels on which longitude is measured are circles; hence contain 360 degrees; therefore 180 degrees east and 180 degrees- west are identical, being half the distance around the earth. Latitude is measured on the meridians north and south of the equa- tor, each meridian being half a circle or ISO degrees. Hence 90 degrees,. or one fourth an entire circle, falls at the poles and is the greatest latitude possible to a place. 7. (a) The Apalachicola and Suwanee Rivers. 8. (a) The most important railroad systems are the Atlantic Coast Line, Seaboard Air Line. Florida East Coast System, Georgia Southera and Florida^ and the Louisville and Nashville. (b) Over three thousand miles. 9-10. Jacksonville — Northeastern part of Florida near the mouth of St. Johns river. Key West — Situated on one of most western of the Florida Keys south- west of the mainland. Pensacola — Situated in the northwestern part of the State on Pensa- cola Bay, an arm of the Gulf of Mexico. Tampa — On western coast at head of Tampa Bay. Sept '94— First Grade. 1. The axis of the earth is the diameter on which it performs itst diurnal rotations. 2. North Frigid Zone (from Arctic Circle to North Pole), 2Si4° irt width. North Temperate Zone 43° in width. Torrid Zone 47° in widths South Temperate Zone 43° in width. South Frigid Zone (from Antarc- tic Circle to South Pole) 23i^° in width. 3. (a) England; Mediterranean and Red Seas. 4. Lake Michigan, Strait of Mackinac, Lake Huron, St. Clair River and Lake, Detroit River, Lake Erie, Erie Canal, Hudson River, New York Bay, Atlantic Ocean, Strait of Gibraltar, Mediterranean and Aegean Seas, Strait of Dardanelles, Sea of Marmora, the Bosphorus, Black Sea„ and Danube River. 5. (a) United States, Portugal, Spain, Italy, Turkish and Russiart Empires, Bokara, China, Korea and Japan. (b) California, Nevada, Utah, Colorado, Missouri, Illinois, Indiana^ Ohio, West Virginia, Pennsylvania and New Jersey. 6. (a) In Holland, (b) To redeem the land which is very low, front the sea. 7. Ivory, diamonds, gold, ostrich plumes, India rubber, hides, cotton^ wool, coffee and palm-oil. 77 8. Spain, Madrid; France, Paris; Italy, Rome; Austria-Hungary, Vienna; Turkey, Constantinople; Greece, Athens. 9. Europe and North America belong to the same realm of animal life, and hence resemble each other. Most of our domestic animals are natives to Europe though imported to America by the early settlers. Many fur-bearing animals are found in the northern part of both con- tinents, as are also the elk, of Europe and his American cousin the moose. The reindeer belongs to both Europe and America, the bear also is indigenous to both. Animals living in the highlands are the big- horn of America and the chamois and ibex of the Alpine region. 10. London — In England on Thames River. Paris — France on Seine. Berlin — Germany, on the Elbe. Vienna — ^Austria-Hungary, Danube River. St. Petersburg — Russia, on Gulf of Finland. Constantinople — Turkey, on the Bosphorus. Oct. 94. 1. A peninsular kingdom, bounded by Siberia and China on the north and west and projecting from the mainland of Asia in a southeasternly direction. It separates the Sea of Japan from the Yellow Sea. 2. (a) The group of islands known by that name constitutes the Japanese Empire, (b) Tokyo, (c) Population, 46,495,000. (d) Exports: rice, silk and tea. (e) The Japanese are the most intelligent and pro- gressive of Asiatic people. They possess good schools, railway and tel- egraph lines, and manufactories. 3. (a) The Chinese Empire is bounded on the north by the Russian Empire; east by Korea, Yellow Sea, East China Sea and Pacific Ocean; south by Indo-China, Hindustan and Himalaya Mountains; and on the "west by the Russian Empire, Hindoostan and the Thian Shan Moun- tains. (b) Hoang, Yangste and Si Rivers. (c) Yellow Sea, East and South China Seas — all arms of the Pacific Ocean. (d) Pekin, Tientsin. Canton, Shanghai, Hong Kong and Fuchan. (e) Tea and silk. 4. See (7) Sept. 1900. 5. "Western Hemisphere — Capes Horn and Blanco, South America. Eastern Hemisphere — ^Cape of Good Hope, Africa, and Cape Otway, Australia. 6. (a) Sues — Canal connecting Mediterranean and- Red Seas. (b) Bogota — City, capital of Colombia, South America. (c) Dneiper — River in Russia flowing into Black Sea. St. EUas — Mountain in Canada, second highest peak in North Amer- ica. (e) Blanco — Cape on west coast of Africa and also on southeast coast of South America. 7. (a) Nearest distance 48° or 3320 statute miles. (b) When noon Thursday at 137° east longitude, it lacks twelve min- utes of four o'clock P. M. Wednesday at 175° west longitude. 8. The cutting of the Panama Canal would afford a much shorter and hence cheaper water route between Atlantic ports of Europe and America and North and South America ports on the Pacific, and would facilitate commerce between the former and the Orient, Australia and the Islands of the Pacific. 9. The Mississippi rising in Lake Itasca in northern Minnesota flows southward to the Gulf of Mexico. It drains an area of 1,250,000 square miles. As it is navigable as far as St. Paul, it furnishes water transpor- vs tation for all the Central States to the Gulf, and thence to the Atlantic. By the Illinois and Michigan Canal it is connected also with Chicago and the Great Lakes. 10. Occasional elementary lessons given orally and laying the foun- dation for the formal study of geography, should be a part of the first three years of school work. After that the book should be taken up and the study pursued systematically. May '95. 1. Promontory — A high point of land on rock projecting into the sea beyond the coast line; a headland. Peninsula — A portion of land nearly surrounded by water. Inlet — A bay or recess in the shore of the sea, of a lake or large river. Sound — A narrow passage of water, or a strait between the main- land and an island. Strait — A narrow body of water joining two larger bodies of water. 2. Japan comprises a chain of islands lying east of Asia, having an area of 161,135 square miles. Much of its surface is ragged and vol- canoes abound. The rivers though short are useful. The people are Mongolians and number 46,495,000. They are noted for the weaving of silk and carving of ivory; possess large manufactories for the pro- duction of glass, paper, cotton, silk and iron, and export silk, rice and tea. 3. (a) See (1) Oct. '94. (b) The peninsula is traversed by moun- tains along its northeast coast, but. little is known of the interior, (c) The people,, numbering 9,160,000, resemble the Chinese in appearance, manners and customs, (d) Agriculture is the chief industry, and the principal products are rice, beans and wheat. Gold, iron, copper and coal are mined, but not extensively. 4. (a) Latitude is the distance north or south of the equator, meas- ured upon a meridian. Longitude is the distance either east or west from any given meridian and is measured on the parallels and the equator. (b) A degree of longitude is greater in Florida than in Michigan, be- cause parallels decrease in circumference as they approach the poles but every circle contains 360°, therefore the length of a degree varies with its distance from the equator. 5. (a) "The physical features of a country have much to do with moulding the character and shaping the history of its people. Moun- tains isolating neighboring communities and shutting out conquering races, foster the spirit of local patriotism and preserve freedom." (b) Mountain barriers are unfavorable to routes of trade, while "the sea, in- viting abroad, and rendering intercourse with distant countries easy, awakens the spirit of adventure and develops commercial enterprise." In like manner the industries of a country are determined largely by its physical features. Temperate climate and fertile soil favoring agricul- ture; convenient fuel supply and water-power, manufacturing; mineral deposits, mining, etc. 6. (a) Twenty -two. (b) Prussia, Bavaria, Wurtemburg and Badin. (c) The Germans are industrious and celebrated for their learning. ■Their soldiers are said to be the best disciplined in the world. (d) Farming, mining, and manufactures. The chief articles of man- ufacture are cloth, iron and steel goods, beet sugar, liquors, glass and porcelain. (e) Compulsory system of education; all departments under super- vision of the State; best in Europe. 7. (a) Mexico — In shape, a rude triangle, is situated south of the United States, its eastern shores being washed by the Gulf of Mexico, 79 and its western by the Pacific Ocean. To the south eastward lies Cen- tral America, (b) Its shores afford no good harbors and along the Gulf coast, which is fringed with long sand-bars, the climate is exceedingly unhealthful. (c) With the exception of narrow coast plains, it is a lofty highland, narrow in the south but broad in the north where it merges into the Rocky Mountains. The population consists of Indians and Caucasians of Spanish descent. Mexico is a republic. 8. Cuba contains 45,884 square miles, and is about as large as Penn- sylvania; its surface is mainly lowland; its people are Caucasians of Spanish decent and negroes with a few Chinese. Tropical fruits, sug- ar, coffee and tobacco are the chief productions. Government is repub- lican in form. 10. Florida is divided by the Apalachicola and Suwanee Rivers into West, Middle and East Florida. (b) See Preface. Sept. '95. 1. (a) The equator is a great circle equally distant from the poles. (b) Meridian circles are great circles conceived to be drawn so as to pass through the poles. A meridian is half a meridian circle and terminates at the poles. Parallels are those imaginary circles drawn east and west around the earth parallel with the equator. Tropic of Cancer and Capricorn, those parallels 23i^° north and south of the equator respectively and marking the boundary between the tor- rid and temperate zones. Arctic and Antarctic Circles, those parallels lying 66i/^° north and south of the equator respectively and making the boundary between the frigid and temperate zones. 2. North and South Frigid Zones, boundaries, the Arctic and Ant- artic circles respectively, width from pole to circle 1625 5-12 miles each; North and South Temperate Zones, the former bounded on the north by the Arctic Circle and on the south by the Tropic of Cancer, the latter on the north by the Tropic of Capricorn and on the south by the Anartic Circle, width of each 2974 1 -6 miles each. Torrid Zone, bounded by the Tropics, width, 3250 5-6 miles. 3. In a country having sea coast and good harbors, fishing and com- merce naturally engage the attention of the people; in one having rich, fertile land, agriculture and stock-raising; while in a mountainous country, mining is a chief industry and if the streams furnish abund- ant waterpower manufacturing enterprises thrive. 4. See Second Grade (4), Sept. '94. 5. See (8), May '95. 6. See (8), Oct. '94. 7. The Missouri-Mississippi, the Colorado, Columbia and Rio Grande river systems. 8. (a, b). See 6 (a and b). May '95. (c) The German Empire is a federal State, composed of four king- doms, six grand duchies, five duchies, seven principalities, three free cities and the imperial domain of Alsace-Lorraine. These lands being united in a great corporation of public law under the hereditary presi- dency of the king of Prussia. The Bundesrath or upper house of the legislature is in form and theory a body of ambassadors. Residuary legatee of the constitution. Possesses, in addition to legislative functions, administrative function of oversight, also judicial functions. In this body states are unequally represented according to size. 80 The ReicJistag represents the whole German people. Representation on basis of one representative to every one hundred thousand inhabi- tants. This really the controlling body. Powers not enumerated but as wide as the activities of the Empire. June '96. 1. (a and b) See 4 (a), May '95. (c and d) See 1, Sept. '95. (e) The ecliptic is a great circle whose plane passes through the earth's orbit and the sun's centre. 2. Amazon — River of South America, rising in the Andes and emp- tying into the Atlantic Ocean. Vesuvius — Active volcano near Naples, Italy. Gu'ba — Island republic, one of the Greater Antilles, south of Florida. Nile — River in Africa, flowing northward through Egypt and empty- ing into the Mediterranean sea. Liverpool — Seaport on west coast of England. Gibraltar — Strait between Spain and Africa, and fortress belonging to Great Britain on the European side of the strait. Sahara — Great desert of northern Africa. Honolulu — City, the capital of the Hawaiian Islands. Yukon — River of Alaska flowing westward into Bering Sea. Venice — City in Italy at the head of the Adriatic Sea. 3. (a) Tropic of Cancer, (b) June 21st. 4. The streams of Florida belong either to the Atlantic or Gulf drain- age systems. The St. Johns River, belonging to the former, and the largest river wholly within the State, flows northward for 350 miles through the eastern part of the penisula and is navigable for more than 220 miles. The Suwanee, Caloosahatchee and the Apalachicola Rivers flowing into the Gulf, are also navigable. Jacksonville — Near the mouth of the St. Johns River; Key West on one of the Keys to the southwest of the mainland; Tampa, at the head of Tampa Bay; Pensacola, on Pensacola Bay and St. Augustine, on the Atlantic coast. Area of Florida — 58,680 square miles; population in 1900 — 528,542. 5. When this examination was given ('96), Cuba belonged to Spain but owing to Spanish misrule revolted and with the aid given by the United States, became an independent nation. 6. Alaska's comparatively mild climate is due to the Japan current. Labrador is ice-bound because of the Greenland current which chills its shores. 7. The largest cities of the world are London, England, on the Thames River; Paris, France, on the Seine River; New York, U. S. A., at mouth of Hudson River; Berlin, Germany, on the Elbe River; and Canton, China, a seaport on South China Sea. Five largest cities in the United States are New York, N. Y., at the mouth of the Hudson River; CM- cago, 111., on Lake Michigan; Philadelphia, Pa., on the Delaware River; St. Louis, Mo., on the Mississippi River; and Boston, Mass., on Massa- chusetts Bay. The longest rivers of the United States are the Columbia, rising in British Colombia, flowing southwestward and emptying into the Pacific Ocean; the Colorado, formed by the junction of the Green and the Grand in Utah, flowing southwest into the Gulf of California; the Missouri, rising in the Rocky Mountains of Montana, flowing south- east into the Mississippi; the Mississippi, rising in Lake Itasca, Minne- sota, and flowing south to the Gulf of Mexico; and the Ohio, rising in Ohio and flowing southwest and emptying into the Mississippi River. 8. Tea — China, Japan and India. Sugar — Brazil, Peru, Guiana, Cuba and other West -Indies, Mexico, 81 Germany, Austria-Hungary, Belgium, and Holland. Coffee — Brazil, Colombia, Venezuela, Asiatic Turkey, Congo State, Li- beria, Cuba and the East Indies. Cotton — Egypt, India, China, East Indies, Brazil, Guiana. Opium — India, Persia. Cinchona — Bolivia and Peru. Wool — Argentine Republic, Uruguay, Peru, South Africa, Australia,. Watches — Switzerland. Jute — ^India. Tin — Australia and Sumatra. Country. Great Britain Germany France Belgium Holland Denmark Spain Portugal Italy Turkey Greece Russia Austria-Hungary Switzerland Sweden Norway Roumania Bulgaria Servia Montenegro Capital. London Berlin Paris Brussels The Hague Copenhagen Madrid Lisbon Rome Constantinople Athens Sf. Petersburg Vienna Berne Stockholm Christiana Bukharest Sofia Belgrade Cretinje Form of Government. Constitutional Monarchy. Constitutional Monarchy. Republic Monarchy Monarchy Monarchy Monarchy Monarchy Monarchy Despotism Monarchy Despotism Monarchy Republic Monarchy Monarchy Monarchy Monarchy Monarchy Monarchy Sept. '96. 1. United States, Washington; Great Britain, London; Germany, Ber- lin; France, Paris; Russia, St. Petersburg; Austria-Hungary, Vienna; Sweden, Stockholm; Japan, Tokyo; China, Pekin; Mexico. Mexico. 2. (a. b) The tropics are those parallels lying respectively 23%° north and south of the equator. Their position is determined by the inclination of the earth's axis to the plane of its orbit 23i^° and marks the limits north and south of the equator beyond which the sun's rays are never vertical. (c) See 4 (a). May '95. (d, e) See (6) Sept. '94, Second Grade. 3. Cuba — See September '95 (5) and June '96 (5). 4. Pyrenees — Mountain range between France and Spain. Blanc — Mountain peak in the Alps. Danube — River flowing westward through Austria-Hungary into the Black Sea. Gibraltar — See 2, June '96. Selvas — ^Dense forests, wooding the valley of the Amazon River. Sardinia — Island in the Mediterranean Sea, west of Italy. Pekin — City, located in eastern part of China, and the capital of the Chinese Empire. Tanganyika — Lake in Central Africa, one of the sources of the Congo River. Olympia — City on Puget Sound, Capital of the State of Washington. Orinoco— River in South America, flowing through Venezuela into the Atlantic Ocean. 5. See Map of United States. 82 6. The Connecticut, Hudson, Delaware, Potomac and Savannah Riv- ers flow into the Atlantic Ocean. Florida, Alabama, Misssissippi, Louisiana and Texas border on the Gulf of Mexico. 7. Its general physical features — surface sloping gently to the north- west from the Cerennes, and drained by the Seine, the Loire and the Garonne rivers; the opposite 3lope being drained by the Rhone, com- parative size, about four-fifths that of Texas; in population, ranking second in Europe; people noted for intelligence, vivacity and thrift; their earnings and wealth surpassing any country on the mainland of Europe. Chief industries, agriculture and manufacturing— ranking second of European countries in the production of cloth, first in that of silks and velvets, and third in commerce. Wines, silks, velvets, woolens and fancy articles are the chief exports. Paris, the capital, is the third city 'in the world. 8. Gold — ^California. Cotton — Georgia. Wheat — Minnesota. ' , Tobacco — Virginia. Manufactured Articles — Connecticut. 9. Florida was discovered by Ponce de Leon in 1513; settled by Span- iards in 1565; became English territory in 1763 and passed again into Spanish hands in 1783. Finally it was ceded to the United States in 1819 and admitted to the Union in 1845. It has a comparatively low and smooth surface. Citrus fruits, vegetables grown in large quantities for northern mar- kets, lumber, turpentine, phosphate, kaolin and lime, are produced. See 4, June '96. 10. Exports — Cotton, meats, flour, iron and steel goods, lumber, pe- troleum and coal. Imports — Sugar, coffee, cloth, drugs and chemicals, raw fibres — flax, wool and silk, and raw India rubber. June 1897. 1. See 1, Sept. '95. 2. (a) Geography should be taught for the mental discipline that may be obtained from it; for the knowledge it contains; for its value in connection with commerce; because of basis it affords for the intel- ligent study of other subjects; for its refining influence. (b) That the perceptive faculties as well as the memory may be trained, use visible illustrations, as maps, globes, relief, forms, pictures, etc. Use the topical method — that is, each set of related subjects should be taught together. Connect Geography and other work, as History, when practicable. Unimportant facts and details should be avoided. 4. Section Chief Industries. New England Fishing, manufacturing, lumbering, quarrying and commerce. South Atlantic States Agriculture, mining, lumbering, manufacturing and commerce. North Central States Agriculture, grazing, mining, manufacturing and commerce. Rocky Mountains Mining, stock-raising, fruit-raising, fishing and manufacturing. Gulf States Agriculture, lumbering, commerce, cattle-rais- ing and manufacturing. Florida's area is .58,680 square miles; California's 158,360 square miles. Their population is 528,542 and 1,485,053 respectively. The cli- mate of the former is moist and warm, with summer rainy season, that 83 of the latter is warm and dry with wet season in the winter. Florida has a low, level surface, while that of California is diversified by chains of lofty mountains, intersected by fertile valleys. Both excel in the production of semi-tropical fruits. Florida's mineral wealth consists of deposits of phosphate, lime and koalin; California's in gold and silver. Early vegetable raising is an important industry of the former, the pro- duction of wheat of the latter. In wealth, California is far ahead, and San Francisco, its metropolis, numbers 342,000 population, against Jacksonville, Florida's chief city's 28,000. The water courses of the former are generally swift and short, those of Florida sluggish streams, and for the most part, unimportant. Florida abounds in game animals, birds, and fish. Alligators are numerous. In California are the griz- zly and black bear, elk, deer and mountain sheep; fish, as salmon and sturgeon abundant and about 350 species of birds. 6. Ivory — Kongo State. Carpets — Belgium and Persia. Silk — China, Japan, Switzerland, France, Spain and Italy. Sponges — Florida and Bahama Islands. Wheat — Canada, United States, Mexico and Russia. For other prod- ucts see 8, June, '96. 8. See 3, Sept. '96. 9. Africa lies between 28° N. and 35° S. latitude. South America between 13° N. and 56° S. latitude. Similar in outline. Africa has nearly twice the area and population. The latter are negroes and Cau- casians principally. In South Africa are many people of European ex- traction. South American people are largely Indians and Europeans of Spanish descent. Both continents produce cotton, cattle, hides, wool and grain. Productions peculiar to Africa are diamonds, indigo, ivory, palm-oil and ostrich plumes; those of South America are Peruvian bark, coffee, dye-woods, quicksilver, silver, copper and caoutchous. In general importance South America leads. 10. (a) Coffee from Brazil, sugar from the West Indies; ruh'ber from Brazil; tin plate from England; and cloth from England, Germany and France. (b) Meats — Illinois, Indiana, Ohio and Kansas; Cotton — Georgia, Ala- bama, Mississippi, Louisiana, Texas and the Carolinas; Petroleum — Pennsylvania, Ohio and West Virginia; Flour — Minnesota and Missouri; Copper — Montana and Northern Michigan. Sept. '97. 1. (a) An indefinite number. Because every circle drawn on the earth's surface north and south, passes through the poles and divides it into hemispheres. (b) One. Because the equator is the one circle drawn on the earth's surface from east to west which divides it into hemispheres. 2. Utah, Colorado, Nebraska, Iowa, Illinois, Indiana, Ohio^ Pennsyl- vania, New Jersey, New York, Connecticut, Massachusetts. 3. Nova Scotia — Fishing, mining. Prince Edward Island — Fishing. New Brunswick — Fishing, lumbering. Quebec — Fishing, lumbering and commerce. Ontario — Agriculture, chiefly fruit growing and dairying. • Manitoba — Agriculture, chiefly the production of wheat. British Columbia — Fishing, lumbering and mining. 4. Omaha — Shipping point for cattle and grain. Milwaukee — Manufacture of liquors and flour. Augusta (Ga.)— Cotton manufacture. Cleveland — Iron and steel manufactures, refining of oil. 84 Pittsburg — Manufacture of steel and iron goods. 5. The longest day is June 21st; the shortest December 21st. The vertical rays of the sun fall farthest north of the equator on the former date, and north of the Arctic Circle there is perpetual day; on the lat- ter date the sun's rays are vertical farthest south of the equator, and within the same limits there is darkness. 6. Pacific Ocean, South America; Atlantic Ocean, Africa, Indian 7. (a) Because the sun appears to rise in the east, and (b) the mo- tion of falling bodies — which dropped from a high tower, will strike outside the base on the east side of the tower, but inside of the base on the west side. 8 See 9 June '9G. 9. Between 20° and 23i^° N. latitude. See 8, May '95. June '98. 1. To define with mathematical precision the location of points on the earth's surface. 2. Springfield, 111.; Indianapolis; Columbus, O., and Philadelphia. 3. Number of islands in Philippine from 480 to 2,000; area, 114,400 square miles; population, 6,961,339. (b) 15^/2° N. latitude and 121° E. longtitude, approximately. 4. (a) Belts or divisions of the earth bounded by the tropics and Polar Circles. (b) See 2, Sept. '95. 6. Chinese Empire, British India, Russia, United States, and Ger- many. 7. Between 7,000 and 8,000 miles. Mediterranean Sea; Suez Canal; Red Sea; Indian Ocean; Strait of Malacca; China Sea. 8. Length of Cuba, 720 miles; breadth, 80 miles; population, 1,573,- 000; climate, tropical; soil, very fertile; exports, sugar, tobacco, mo- lasses, lumber and fruits; imports, wheat, flour, rice, petroleum and manufactured articles. 9. Mexico, south of the United States, between Pacific Ocean on the west and Gulf of Mexico on the east, comprises twenty-seven states, two territories and a federal district; area 767,000 square miles; and has a mixed Indian and Spanish population of 12,000,000 people. Ex- ports, silver, coffee and cattle; imports, cloth and hardware. 10. (a) See 4, Sept. '94, Second Grade, (b) Combined population, 39,000,000; (c) Brazil, Colombia, Argentina, Chile and Peru, (d) Por- tuguese and Spanish are spoken in all South American countries ex- cept the Guianas, where English, French and Dutch predominate in the colonies of those countries respectively. Sept. '08. 1. See 2, Sept. '95. 2. See 3, June '90. 3. See 4. Second Grade. Sept. '94. 4. Ohio River, Mississippi River, Gulf of Mexico, Strait of Florida, Atlantic Ocean, English Channel, Strait of Dover, North Sea, Skager Rock, Cottegat, Baltic Sea and Gulf of Finland. 5. See 4, June '97. 6. See 5, May. '95. 7. See 7. Oct. '94. 8. See 3, Sept. '97. 85 9. See Preface. 10. See Preface. June 1899. 1. (a) Bering Sea, Sea of Okhotsk, Japan Sea, Yellow Sea, Bast Chi- na Sea, South China Sea and the Gulf of Tartary. (b) Kamchatka and Korea. (c) Plateau of the Dekkan. It is composed of old outflows of lava like those of the Columbia plateaus. 2. Agriculture — In the eastern half and a narrow strip along the Pacific coast. Herding — In the Central States and westward over the Great Plains. fishing — On the northeast and northwest coasts. Lumbering — In New England, the Appalachian Highland, the South- eastern States, and those bordering the Great Lakes, and those on the Pacific Slope. Mining — Those sections occupied by the Appalachian highland, the Central States and the Rocky Mountain States. Manufacturing — In New England, the Middle States and Central States. Commerce — Northeastern quarter of the country. 3. Torrid and North Temperate Zones. (b) Twenty-seven, (c) The lowlands have a hot climate, the plateau is always temperate, and the mountain region is cool. There is a rainy season in the summer and a dry season in winter. Plants of both the North and South Ameri- can regions are found there, (d) Mines. 4. (a) See 4, (a, b) Sept. '94, Second Grade. (b) Lake Titicaca, situated in the plateau of Bolivia, and lying partly in that country and partly in the southeastern part of Peru. Its size is about half that of Lake Ontario. 5. (a) Both are triangular, (b) The western highland of South America is only a continuation of that of North America; but is higher, narrower and is much less broken. (c) The highest peaks of the Rocky Mountain highland are Mt. St. Elias. 18,010 feet and Mt. McKinley, 20,464 feet high, those of the An- des on Aconcagua 23,082 feet and Chimborazo 20,.517 feet in height. (d) The plateau regions of North America are of great extent, but not as high as those of South America. (e) The mountain ranges of North America are more irregular and the number exceeds that of South America but three of the latter are much longer, extending the entire length of the continent in an almost unbroken wall. The ranges of the eastern highland are more numerous ad more irregular in outline in South America. 6. (a) Capes Hatteras and Matapan respectively. (b) France bounded on the northwest by the English Channel, on the northeast by Belgium, on the east by Germany, Switzerland, the Alps and Italy; on the south by the Mediterranean Sea and the Pyren- ees Mountains; and on the west by the Bay of Biscay. Switzerland is bounded on the north by the German Empire, on the east by Austria-Hungary, on the south by the Alps Mountains, and on the west by the Alps and France. 7. (a) Belgium. (b) Because the Gulf Stream warms their shores, while the North American coast in the same latitude is chilled by the ice-bearing Green- land current. 8. The Nile rises in Lake Victoria in Equatorial Africa, flows north- ward, receiving tributaries, draining the Abyssinian Highland, and emp- ties into the Mediterranean Sea. The Niger rises in the Kong Mountains, flowing northeastward, then southeast, draining the Soudan and emptying into the Gulf of Guinea. The Kongo, ranking next to the Amazon in the volume of water dis- charged, and receiving more tributaries than any other African river; rises in a group of equatorial lakes, and flows north, then west, and southwest through the Kongo State into the Gulf of Guinea. The Orange River flows from east to west across the southern end of the continent, discharging its waters into the Atlantic Ocean. The Zambesi, the only important river of the Indian Slope, rises in Angola and flows eastward into the Mozambique Channel. It contains waterfalls rivaling those of Niagara in grandeur. Sept. '99. 1. Soil consist* of detritus mixed with decaying animal and vegeta- ble matter. Detritus consists of fragments of rock, detached by the action of heat, cold, wind and rain, many of which are in time reduced to powder. Vapor is the gaseous state of water. Dew — Condensed vapor, formed by vapor-laden air, being chilled on coming in contact with cold substances, as vegetation. Rain is the precipitation of a cloud, caused by the air about it be- coming chilled and hence capable of holding less moisture in suspension. 2. 1^ Physical Features 1^ Location. 2= Extent. 3^ Coast features. 4^ Surface. 1' Highlands. 2' Lowlands. 5^ Drainage. 6' Climate. T Vegetation and animals. 8^ Races. 2^ Political Features. V Countries and People. V Government. 2' Religion. 3' Industries. 4^ Products. 3. See text-book for subject matter under topics given above. 4. Gold and silver are usually found in veins in very old rocks or in volcanic rocks in the mountain regions. The United States, Alaska, Mex- ico, South America, the Eurasion Highland and Australia supply these metals. They are used for the coinage of money throughout the world. Iron is found, combined with other substances, forming ore, in almost every country, but those mines most worked are located near the great coal fields. It is the most useful of metals, and is used in the manufac- ture of machinery, as a foundation for tinware and in the form of steel, in the construction of buildings and bridges. Copper, used in electrical work, in the manufacture of hardware, and mixed with zinc to form brass. More than half the world's supply of copper comes from the United States and a large part from the Eurasian highland. Tin is used in the manufacture of hardware and is found chiefly in Sumatra and other islands of the East Indies, in parts of the Eurasian highland and in Australia. 5. Western Europe and Southeastern Asia. 6. Texas, Louisiana, Florida and Morocco, Algeria, Tripoli, Egypt,^ Arabia, Turkey in Asia, Persia, Afghanistan, India and China. 87 7. (a) Gautemala, Salvador, Honduras, Nicaragua and Costa Rica. (b) They comprise five independent republics and unsuccessful at- tempts have been made to join them in a federal union. Coffee, sugar, cocoa beans, and cabinet and dye woods are exported. (c) Lake Nicaragua. 8. England, Scotland, Wales and Ireland, the colonial possessions, Canada, Newfoundland, India, Australia and South Africa, and numer- ous islands in both the Atlantic and Pacific. 9. (a) A vessel might sail from San Fra:ncisco, around Cape Horn, thence across the Atlantic, through the Strait of Gibraltar, the Mediter- ranean and Adriatic Seas to Venice with flour, grain and sugar and re- turning bring a cargo of raw silk, olive oil and sulphur. (b) From Boston to Madras, a vessel might cross the Atlantic to the Strait of Gibraltar, ^passing through the Mediterranean Sea, the Suez Canal, the Red Sea, Gulf of Aden and Indian Ocean, thence by way of Ceylon to Madras, carrying cotton cloth and machinery, and returning with jute, rice, opium, tea and oil seeds. 10. (a) Escambia, Santa Rosa, Walton, Washington, Calhoun, Frank- lin, Wakulla, Jefferson, Taylor, LaFayette, Levy Citrus, Hernando, Pas- co, Hillsboro, Manatee, DeSoto, Lee and Monroe. (b) Nassau, Duvol, St. John, Volusia, Brevard and Dade. (c) Holmes. Jackson, Liberty, Gadsden, Leon, Madison, Hamilton, Su- wanee, Columbia, Baker, Clay, Bradford, Alachua, Putnam, Marion, Sumter, Lake, Orange, Osceola and Polk. June 1900. 1. See 1. Sept. 1900. 2. See 2, Sept. 1900. 3. See 9, June 1896. 4. The New England State form an irregular quadrilateral; the Southern States approach a trapezoid in shape. The former have a com- bined area of less than one one-fourth that of Texas alone. In the northern part we find extensive forests, but though the river valleys are fertile, the surface is for the most part rugged, unproductive and covered with glacial boulders. The winters are long, cold and bleak, the summers short and temperate. Manufacturing is the chief indus- try. The surface of the Southern States is much more even, being flat for a hundred miles or more from thci coast, then occurs the Piedmont re- gion in the east and the gently rolling plains in the west, the only rug- ged portion being near the Appalachian and Ozark ridges. The great Industry of this section is agriculture and the climate is warm, moist and equable, most of the year. 5. See 4, Sept. '99. 6. Sell-as are the equatorial forests of the Amazon valley. (c) Llanos are the grassy plains of the Orinoco valley and are treeless except for palms and mosses along the streams and on the low hills. (c) Pampas are the southern plains of South America. They are cov- ered with coarse grass suitable for pasturage. (d) The three lowlands of South America. 7. See 10, Sept. 1900. 8. (a) Through Tampa Bay, Gulf of Mexico, Caribbean Sea, Atlantic Ocean, around South America to the Strait of Magellan, thence through the Pacific Ocean via San Francisco to Honolulu. (b) Down St. Johns River across the Atlantic Ocean through the Strait of Gibraltar, the Mediterranean Sea, Suez Canal, Red Sea, Gulf of Aden, Indian Ocean, Strait of Malacca, South China Sea, Balabac Strait and Sulu Sea to Iloilo. 88 (c) From Kissimmee pass through Lake Tohopekaliga, a canal, Lake Kissimmee, Kissimmee River, Lake Okeechobee, drainage canal, Caloo- sahatchee River, and Gulf of Mexico to Key West. 9. (a) See 8, Sept. '94, Second Grade. (b) Jacksonville, Pensacola, Key West, Tampa, St. Augustine, Lake City. (c) Six most important rivers: St. Johns, Suwanee, Caloosahatchee, Appalachicola, St. Mary's and Indian. 10. See (10) Sept. '99. Sept. 1900. 1. Dunes, long ridges of sand and fine rocky material, brought to- gether by the winds. Caiiyons are valleys unusually deep and narrow, their sides having been deepened by their swift flowing streams much faster than they have been widened by weathering. A Delta is a triangular tract of land formed by the deposit of sedi- ment at the mouth of a river, and by impeding its outflow, dividing it into several channels, through which it discharges its waters. A Bayou is a swampy place or sluggish stream formed during low water along the lower outside edge of a flood plain. A glacier is a sheet of slowly moving ice found' where the climate is so cold that more snow falls during the year than can be melted. 2. (a) The Rocky Mountain system extending from Alaska to the Isthmus of Panama, and the Appalachian system extending from the Laurentian plateau in a southwestwardly direction to the Gulf slope. (b) The Andes, extending from Trinidad to Cape Horn; the Brazilian Mountains, extending from the narrow coast plain on the northeast to the great central lowland, and the ranges of the highland of Guiana, lo- cated in the northern part of the grand division. 3. See 9, June '96. 4. See 5, Sept. '94, First Grade. 5. See 7, Sept. .'94, First Grade. 6. See 3, Oct. '94. 7. On the north are the Arctic Ocean, with the following arms and channels : Melville Sound, Baflin Bay, Fox Channel, Hudson Bay, Hud- son Strait and Davis Strait; on the east the Atlantic Ocean with the Gulf of St. Lawrence, Bay of Fundy, and Chesapeake Bay as indenta- tions; on the southeast, the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea, and on the southwest and west is the Pacific Ocean, with the Gulf of Cali- fornia, Puget Sound. Bering Sea and Bering Strait; the last two separating the grand di- vision from Asia. Inland waters are the Great Lakes : Superior, Michigan, Huron, Erie and Ontario, between Canada and the United States; Lake Winnipeg in the Province of Manitoba, and the Great Bear, Great Slave and Atha- basca Lakes in the Arctic basin. 8. Such a canal would enable large ocean steamers to cross from the Atlantic to the Pacific. At present it is necessary for them to sail thousands of miles out of their course around Cape Horn, or discharge their cargoes at the Isthmus of Panama to be taken up by other vessels on the other side of, the Isthmus, hence it would be a great saving of ■time and expense. 9. See 3, June '99. 10. The Philippines extend from .5i4° to about 18° N. latitude, and the 120th meridian, E. long., passes through Luzon, the largest island. The climate is purely tropical, most of the population are of Malay 89 descent, and the chief productions are sugar-cane, coffee, rice, Manila hemp and tobacco. June 1901. 1. (a) Sand hars are formed when a swift stream enters a more level region, and the current is so checKed that it can no longer carry so much solid material. Part of it is therefore deposited, forming .sand banks or bars. (b) Deltas. See 1 (c), Sept. 1900. (c) Glaciers. See 1 (e), Sept. 1900. (d) Petroleum deposits are formed by the decay of animal and vege- table matter, deeply buried beneath sediment, and gradually changed into rock oil. (e) Coal beds are formed from the accumulation of decayed vegetable matter at the bottom of immense swamps, ages ago. After their forma- tion they were depressed below the sea and covered by layers of sedi- ment which in time hardened to rock, while the vegetable matter became coal. 2. (a) Kangaroo, Casswary, Emu, Koala, echidma and duckbill, (b) An ancient land connection between Australia and Euracia, which afterward ceased to exist, the forms of life now found in the former corresponding to the fossils of forms existing ages ago in the latter. 3. (a) Savagery, barbarism and civilization. (b) Savages — many African tribes; barbarians — numerous tribes in the Philippines; and civilized— Americans and Europeans. 4. Christianity — The nations of North and South America and those of Europe with the exception of the Turks. Jewish religion is the faith of the Jews who are found in all civil- ized countries. Mohammedanism prevails in Turkey, Egypt, Arabia and Persia. Brahmiiiism in India. Buddhism in Indo-China, China, Korea and Japan. Confucianism — China. 7. (a) States — Pennsylvania, Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Kentucky, Mis- souri, Tennessee, Arkansas, Mississippi, Lrouisiana. (b) Important Cities — Alleghany, Pittsburg, Wheeling, Cincinnati, Lou- isville, Memphis, Vicksburg, Natchez, Baton Rouge and New Orleans. (c) Indiistries — Iron and coal mining, the refining of petroleum, iron and steel manufacture, and that of agricultural machinery, plate glass, railroad cars, flour, liquors and clothing, sheep-raising, dairying and to- bacco raising, the production of corn, hemp, sorghum, stock-raising, meat packing, tanning, cotton, gro*wing, the manufacture of cotton-seed- oil, lumbering, fruit-raising, the growing of sugar-cane and rice and the refining of sugar. 8. See 4, Sept. 94, Second Grade. 9. Philippines— (a) See 10 (a), Sept. 1900. (b) 7,000,000. (c) Ma- nila, (d) The surface is broken by volcanic mountains, and is drained by many streams. The land area is over 114,000 square miles and the number of islands variously estimated at from 480 to 2,000. (e) Colo- nial possession of the United States. Hawaiian Islands — (a) They lie between 18° and 23° N. latitude and between 155^° and 160i4° W. longtitude. (b) 154,001. (c) Honolulu, (d) They consist of a series of volcanoes, most of which are extinct. The surface is broken by valleys and streams and the islands are partly surrounded by reefs, (e) Agriculture. 10. (a) Florida has been formed by the uplifting of the sea bottom, 90 by the work of coral polyps, and the deposit of sand and sediment by the waves. (b) The surface is comparatively even. The shore of the mainland is protected by long lines of sand bars and barrier beaches. The coral reefs along the shores are still building up and will eventually be con- nected with the mainland thus extending the surface of the land far- ther into the sea. (c) See 4 (a), June '96. Sept. 1901. 1. (a) See 2, June '98. (b) See 4 (b), Sept. 1900. 2. (a) Westward. Because the trade winds blow constantly from the east, thus urging the equatorial waters in a westward direction. (b) "Western coasts. Because warmed by the currents from the equator. 3. (a) Lakes Superior, Michigan, Huron, Erie, Ontario, Winnipeg: and Athabasca. (b) The action of glaciers. 4. (a) Wheat, one-third as much, (b) Cotton, and (c) Corn, each four times as much; (d) Beef, one- third, and (e) Coal, one-half a& much as the rest of the world. 5. (a) Northern boundaries, Michigan and Lake Erie; eastern, Penn- sylvania, West Virginia and the Ohio River; southern, West Virginia^ Kentucky and the Ohio River; western, Indiana. (b) Maumee River. (c) Columbus, centrally located on the Scioto River, (d) Toledo, Sandusky and Cleveland, (e) Cincinnati, Dayton and Springfield. G. (a) Ecuador, Colombia, Brazil, Bolivia and Chili, (b) Lima, (c) The raising of cotton and sugar-cane, herding of llamos, alpacas and goats, the mining of silver, and the gathering of cinchona, and rubber. (d) The desert coast, and the inland forests are almost uninhabita- ble. Farming is carried on by irrigation on the western slopes of the mountains. 7. The Eurasian Highland extends continuously northeast and south- west from Bering Strait to the shores of the Mediterranean Sea. Here it is broken through by the outlet from the Black Sea, but extends through Southern Europe as a narrower highland to the Spanish Penin- sula. In Central Asia it is nearly 3,000 miles wide, consisting of a broken succession of mountain ranges with broad desert plateaus be- tween, some of which are three miles high. The mountains are the highest in the world. 9. (a) ValuaMe woods are yellow pine, cedar, live oak, cypress, satin- wood and magnolia. (b) Minerals are phosphate rock, lime and Kaolin. (c) Products of the sea are food, fishes, oysters, sponges, sea turtles ard coral. June 1902. 1. (a) See 2, Sept. '94, Second Grade. (b) The inclination of the earth's axis 23%° to the plane of its orbit causing the sun's rays to fall 23^° short of the regions about either pole during part of the year, and fixing the northern and southern limits of the sun's perpendicular rays at 23^° on other side of the equator. 2. See 4, Sept. '94, First Grade. 3. See 2, June, 1900. 4. See 9, June '96. 5. (a) Because the unsuitability of this section for agriculture 91 forced the people to take up other occupations and manufacturing, which necessitated the gathering of the population into cities and towns, became the chief pursuit. (b) See 3, Sept. '94, First Grade. 6. (a) See 2, June '99. (b) The United States ranks first in each. 7. That part of western highland region known as the Great Basin, because the clouds, formed by evaporation from the Pacific Ocean in traveling eastward are robbed of their moisture by the Sierra Nevada Mountains on the western side of the Basin; and those from the east lose what moisture they contain on the eastern slopes of the Rockies. 8. Cotton Section — Georgia and Mississippi; Grain — Minnesota and Iowa; Manufacturing — Massachusetts and Pennsylvania; Counties in orange section — Manatee and DeSoto; Marion and Citrus. 9. (a) At the Isthmus of Panama and Cape Parina, the most west> ern point of the grand division. , (b) In northern Africa and Southern Asia. 10. See 9, Sept. '96. Sept. 1902. 1. Erosion is the wearing away of the solid materials which form the bed of a stream and is caused by the solvent power of water and by its mechanical force when in motion. The effects of erosion are the deep- ening and widening of the valleys of streams as shown in the Falls of Niagara, anie the Canon of the Colorado, and the products are deposited as sand bars which obstruct the channel of streams, or as deltas, if the currents at their mouth are not strong enough to carry away the sedi- ment brought down and discharged there. 2. Variation in the length of day and night is due to the inclination of the earth's axis 231^° to the plane of its orbit which causes the ap- parent movement of the sun northward in the summer, producing in the northern hemisphere an increased circle of illumination and therefore longer days, while in winter the same movement exists in the south- ern hemisphere, increasing there the circle of Illumination and hence the length of the day and decreasing our circle of light, thus producing shorter days. 3. North American region — opossum, raccoon; South American re- gion, ant-eater, llama; Eurasian, wild boar, camels; African, hippopota- mus, giraffe; Oriental — elephant, rhinoceros; Australia — kangaroo, duck- bill. 4. The Continental Plateau, stretches from Cape Horn, its most southern point, northwestward, South and North America forming its western arm, and sweeps around the North Pole, in its eastern arm forming solid land masses extending past the equator (with Australa- sia as an offshoot to the southward) to the Cape of Good Hope, the Southeastern extremity of its eastern arm. Its widest part is eastern Asia, its narrowest the Isthmus of Panama. 5. (a) In the northeastern part, (b) Northeastern, (c) Southeast- ern, (d) Because most of the European immigrants land on our north- east coast, moving inland to seek new homes, the northeastern quarter of the country is not only most decidedly settled but has the largest foreign population. Few immigrants land in the southeastern quarter, hence most of the people are American born. 6. (a) Cotton and corn, four times as much; coal, one-half as much; in extent and variety of manufactures, more than twice that of any other two countries; railroad mileage, nearly as much as all of the rest of the world. 7. (a) Tokyo, (b) Yokohama, (c) Agriculture, (d) See 2 (b), May '95. • 92 (e) California and Japan have nearly the same area but the latter supports a population more than thirty-one times as great. 8. Co7-k — Spain. Sponge — Florida. Tin — Sumatra. Sugar — ^West Indies. Quicksilver — Spain and Pacific section of the United States. Silver — 'Nevada and California. Diamonds — South Africa. Coffee — Brazil. Hemp — Kentucky and the Philippines. Copper — Northern Michigan and Montana. 9. (a and c) See 9 (b and a), Sept. 1901. (b) Corn, cotton and tobacco in the northern part; sugar cane, vege- tables for northern markets and citrus fruits form the chief agricultu- ral products of Florida. 10. (a) See 10 (a), Sept. '99. COMPOSITION. Sept. '94. 1. To make thoughts stand out with definiteness in their logical rela- tion, thereby representing to reader the divisions that writer wishes to make in his subject. 2. (a) Heading, salutation, body of the letter, conclusion, superscrip- tion. (b) The several parts of heading should be separated by commas and period placed after date. The Salutation should be followed by com- ma; likewise every line in the conclusion except the last which requires period. 3. Making a properly co-ordinated arrangement of important facts which are to be included in the theme. 4. (a) Metaphor, simile, metonymy, synecdoche, hyperbole, (b) Life is an isthmus between two eternities. Like a shattered column, lay the king. Gray hairs should be respected. Give us this day our daily bread. The tumult reaches the stars. 5. (a) Should be ranked as the most important form. Allays self- consciousness in writing. (b) Should be taught as soon as pupil has learned to write. Oct. 1894. 1. (a) The period should be used to mark the close of every com- plete sentence which is neither interrogative nor exclamatory. Every abbreviation should be followed by a period. In letter-writing, period should follow date and signature, (b) Double quotation points are used to enclose direct quotation; sin- gle points, to enclose a quotation within a quotation. 2. (a) Capitalization is an auxiliary to enable the writer to distin- guish or emphasize terms especially prominent or significant — in short, a mechanical device to guide in construction and meaning. (b) (1) Begin with a capital letter, first word of every sentence, proper names and adjectives, and first word of every line of poetry. 3. Choose words that are national as opposed to provincial, current as opposed to the obsolete, and only those sanctioned by good usage. 93 4. A modifier should be so placed as to leave no doubt as to word modified — that is, should be placed as near to it as possible. 5. As regards language, the requisites are : Accuracy in the use of words; simplicity of words; conciseness; purity. As regards construction, the requisites are : Unity, clearness and strength. Sept. 1895. See Sept. 1894 (duplicate). June 1896. 1. Composition is the art of expressing thought by means of lan- guage. 2. (a) Style is the special manner in which thought is expressed, (b) Accuracy in the use of words, simplicity of words, purity of words, and conciseness or brevity of language. 3. Redundancy is a needless use of words. Tautology is a direct repetition of the thought. "Every man has duties to perform." The consequences of such corruption are deplorable. 4. The comma (,) is used to separate grammatically independent elements from the rest of the sentence; to separate parenthetical or intermediate elements from the context; to separate appositional ele- ments from the context; to mark the omission of words; where the separation is not sufficiently complete for semicolon; wherever it pre- vents ambiguity. 5. (a) The period (.) is put at the end of every declarative or im- perative sentence; after abbreviations, headings and sub-headings. (b) The interrogation point (?) is put after complete questions; af- ter elliptical questions having a common dependence. (c) The exclamation point. (!) is put after exclamatory sentences; after interjections; within curves to denote irony. (d) The colon ( :) is placed between the great divisions of a sen- tence when subdivisions require the semicolon; before an enumeration of particulars formally introduced, given, or separated by semicolons; after promissory words, phrases and propositions. The semi-colon ( ; ) is put between the large divisions of a sentence when minor divisions require to be marked by commas; between serial clauses and phrases having a common dependence. (e) The dash ( — ) is used to indicate a break in the transition; to enclose a parenthesis; for rhetorical effect. (f) Curves are used to enclose independent elements breaking unity of context. (g) Brackets () are used when words not the author's are inserted to explain the meaning or supply an omission. (d) Double quotation marks (" ") are used to enclose a direct ques- tion. Single marks (' ') to enclose a quotation within a quotation. Sept. 1896. 1. Spelling, capitalization and punctuation, use of words, construc- tion of sentences, paragraphing, thought. 2. Begin with capitals: every sentence; every line of poetry; every direct quotation; proper names and proper adjectives. The pronoun "I" and interjection "O" should always be capitals. .S. See 4. June '96. 4. See 4, Sept. '95. 5. As the outline consists of the few absolutely necessary topics ex- pressed as concisely as possible and arranged in proper order, it enables 94 one to maintain unity of thought, arrange material in a logical way, and give the important topics their proper proportion. ^ (b) Clearness, force and attractiveness. June 1897. 1. By short daily practice in composition pupil is made to feel that writing is very much like talking, and that what he talks about is a fit matter to write about. This method extends the pupil's writing vo- cabulary and renders written expression easy and natural. Where long and less frequent composition work is required, expression becomes a conscious artitlcial task, irksome to contemplate, and the completed product is leathery in texture. Expression becomes a distasteful and foreign occupation. 2. See 4, 5 and 2, June '96. 3. (a) The object of the paragraph is to indicate to the reader where the consideration of any chief thought begins and where it ends. By the use of this device, thoughts are made to stand out with definiteness in their logical relation. Incidentally pleases reader's eye, and rests his brain. (b) Each paragraph should have reference to the subject, and as re- gards relation to other paragraphs, there should be such coherence and logical sequence that the reader will be conducted clearly and logically from beginning to end of them. In short, paragraphs should be pro- gressive in meaning and sound. (c) All sentences should have reference directly to the paragraph. Each sentence should naturally grow out of its predecessor. 4. Simile is a comparison of objects based on resemblance; as. Pleas- ant words are like oil poured upon the waters. Metaphor is an implied comparison, an abridged simile; as. Candor is a delicate flower. Metonymy is a figure in which one object is described by the name of another to which it is related; as, Strike for your altars and fires. Synecdoche is a figure in which a name is given to an object that sug- gests more or less than we intend; as, All America was aroused by the contest. Vision represents past events or imaginary objects and scenes as if actually present to the senses; as, Csesar crosses the Rubicon and enters Italy. Epigram is that form of expression in which there seems to be a contradiction between the real and the apparent meaning; as. Language is the art of concealing thought. Personification is that figure in which the attributes of living beings are ascribed to things inanimate; as, "Truth crushed to earth shall rise again." Climax is a figure in which the strength of the thought increases to the close of the sentence or paragraph, as, "In form and moving, how express and admirable! in action, how like an angel! in apprehension how like a god!" Irony is a figure employed to express the opposite of the idea enter- tained; as, "For Brutus is an honorable man! So are they all, all hon- orable men." Hyperbole is a figure in which the object is either exaggerated or disparaged; as, The trembling Tiber dived beneath his bed. 5. (a) Observation, conversation, reading, imagination, and reflec- tion. (b) See 5, Sept. '96. 95 Sept. 1897. 1. (a) Letter-writing. (b) Heading, address, salutation, body of letter, complimentary close, subscription and superscription. 2. See text for forms. 3. Direct quotations are frequently used to give vividness and force; also to prevent ambiguity. A direct quotation should be enclosed by quotation marks; as, He said, "I vi^ill be there." When the quotation is indirect, no marks are needed; as, He said, he would be there. In divided quotations — that is, when other words occur between the iQuoted parts — only the quoted words are enclosed by the marks; as, ■'There is but one way," said the orator, "to ensure success." Rules for paragraphing : See 10, June '98. 4. Diction treats of the selection and right use of words. The most important qualities are purity, propriety and precision. Diction is pure when only such v/ords are used as are sanctioned by the best speakers and writers of the present day. Propriety of diction has reference to the use of words in their proper sense. Precision is that property of diction which requires the exact use of words to express the idea intended. Elegance of diction can be acquired : (a) By extending one's vocabularly and thereby gaining power over words. ' (b) By carefully observing the fitness of a given word to express idea intended. (c) In short, by a careful study of best writers. .5. There should be daily exercise in some form of composition work as oral exercises, sentence-making, reproduction work and written reci- tations. June 1898. 1. (a) Written recitations minister largely to ease and facility of expression, by enlarging pupils' vocabulary and giving practical drill in the use of language. His power to express clearly and correctly what he knows is increased and appreciation of this power enhanced. (b) Yes, for two ends are subserved — testing knowledge and giving drill in expression. 2. (a) Conversation exercises; writing sentences from board and dictation; writing sentences expressing facts observed; copying exer- cises; writing descriptions of pictures, familiar objects, and actions; writing stories which pupil has learned to tell. (b) Early after the first lesson in reading. 3. (a) By means of conversation lessons, the child beginning with phrases and sentences, gradually learns expression with combination of hoth. Thus language is used unconsciously as a medium by means of which thought is expressed. (b) Copying exercises familiarize the pupil with the written form of language. (c) This exercise trains the imagination and inspires child to observe closely and tell his thoughts in his own fashion. (d) By committing choice extracts, pupil's vocabularly is extended and refined. 4. 1-4. Should be taught from beginning of school work. Reached mainly througli reading exercises and sentence making in connection with them. 96 (5) In connection with language work and reading lessons. Not earlier than 3d or 4th reader. 5. The first word of a sentence, a line of poetry, a direct quotation, phrases or clauses separately numbered or paragraphed, proper names, proper adjectives, appellations of the Deity, things personified, most ab- breviations, titles of office, honor or respect when applied to a particular person. 6. (a) See 5, Sept. '95. (b) See 4, June '96. 7. (a) In general composition, avoid the use of foreign words, new words, obsolete words, provincialisms and technical terms. (b) Avoid confounding words derived from same root. (c) Use words in their accepted sense. (d) Use words in their proper sense. (e) Avoid the use of general for special terms. (f) Distinguish between the different degrees of intensity expressed by words. (g) Distinguish between words having respectively active or passive meaning. (h) Distinguish between negative and privative words. (ij Reject all unnecessary words, (j) Distinguish between auxiliaries. 8. (a) A sentence should be so constructed that it can have but one meaning. (b) Unity should be maintained — that is, a sentence should be the development of one idea. (c) There should be such a use and arrangement of words as to make a forcible impression on the mind of the reader or hearer. (d) A sentence should be so constructed as to produce a pleasing effect upon the ear. (e) Solecisms should be avoided. 9. See 4, Sept. '94. 10. (,aj See o, June '97. Make an analysis of the topic to be discussed. Make each point in the analysis the subject of a distinct paragraph. Preserve the unity of the paragraph. Make the paragraphs progressive in meaning and sound. Connect the sentences of a paragraph so as to show their relation. Sept. '98. 1. (a) Main object is to develop power of expression and enable one to represent to others whatever thought or feeling he may have in his mind. (b) Correlation; practical application. 2. (1) Not less than 20 minutes. (2) See 1, June, 1897. 3. (1) By stimulating thought. Impression before expression. Then too, an important principle to be observed is "Talking before writing." (2) Impression and thought. 4. (1) See 5, June '97. (2) Maximum of practical work, minimum of theory and set prin- ciples. Thought-awakening exercises should be given for all fruitful training must begin with the thought and end with its expression. 5. (1) See 3, June '96. (2) A quotation within another quotation should be enclosed by single quotation marks; as, Says Whittier, "I was told that a foreigner had 07 applied for lodging; 'What if my son were in a strange land ' my mother said to herself." (3) (a) Personification, (b) Synecdoche, (c) Metaphor, (d) Sim- ile, (ej Hyperbole. (4) Clearness, energy and elegance. 6. See 5. June '97. June 1899. 1. Composition is the art of expressing thought by means of language. A sentence is the expression of a single complete thought. A paragraph is a group or combination of related sentences, treating of one topic and forming one step in the development of a theme. The development of a whole subject constitutes discourse, written or spoken, in one of its manifold forms. Diction: See IV, Sept. '97. 2. Elements — I had often received an invitation from my friend Sir Roger de Coverly to pass away a month with him in the country. I last week accompanied him thither. I am settled with him some time at his country house. I intend there to form several of my ensuing speculations. Combined — Having often received an invitation from my friend, Sir Roger de Coverly, to pass away a month with him in the country, I last week accompanied him thither, and am settled with him for some time at his country house, where I intend to form several of my ensuing spec- ulations. Synthesis is the process of combining separate statements into a sin- gle sentence. 3. A simple sentence may be converted into a complex sentence by changing some word, or phrase, into a clause. A complex sentence may be converted into a compound sentence by changing a clause into an independent member. The process by which these changes are made is called expansion; as, Simple — No one doubts the roundness of the earth. Complex — No one doubts that the earth is round. Compound — The earth is round and no one doubts it. Contraction consists in reducing compound sentences to complex and to simple sentences by converting one of the independent members of the compound sentence into a clause and in converting the clause of the complex sentence into a phrase or word; as. Compound — Egypt is a fertile country and is watered by the river Nile, which annually inundates it. 3. Complex — Egypt is a fertile country, which is watered by the river Nile, and which is annually inundated by it. Simple — Egypt is a fertile country watered by the river Nile, and annually inundated by it. By comhination in this connection is meant the bringing together of detached statements into wey-constructed sentences and into short compositions. See Ans. 2. 4. (a) See V, Sept. '96. Violations : Impropriety, the use of pompous expressions and unus- ual words, redundancy, tautology, circumlocution, the use of barbarisms. See II June '96. By circumlocution is meant a roundabout, diffuse way of expressing a thought. 5. (a) See 9, June '98. (b) Unity, coherence and emphasis. 98 ' Sept. 'U'J. 1. The Sentence. 4. See 4, Oct. '94, 4 and 5, June '96. Adjectives that represent the most important qualities are placed nearest the noun. When the signitication does not determine the place of the adjectives, put the shortest first and the longest nearest the noun. Act/verTys and adverbial pTirases should be placed as near as possible to the words which they modify. 5. (a) With no small difficulty, after much fatigue, through deep roads and bad weather, we came, at last, to our journey's end. (b) The first two are periodic. (c) In "3," complex sentence is periodic. (d) Periodic. Tendency of young pupils is to use loose sentences al- most exclusively; hence little variety and force. 6. Unity is that property in a sentence which keeps all its parts in connection with the principal thought, and logically subordinate thereto. Clearness requires that the parts of a sentence — words, phrases and clauses — should be so arranged as to leave no possibility of doubt as to the writer's meaning. Strength is that property of style which causes a sentence to pro- duce a forcible and vivid impression. The essential principles of these three qualities of style apply to the paragraph and theme as well as to the sentence. 7. (a) We had no lack of entertainment during the time which wsef spent in the city, which seems very gay and attractive. {Loose arrange- ment of relative clauses.) We had no lack of entertainment during the time which we spent in the gay and attractive city. (b) James told John that he would never abandon his friends. {Pronouns used aniMguously.) James said to John, "I will never abandon my friends." (c) Silence reigned and not a sound was heard. {Tautology). Not a sound was heard, 8. In order to maintain unity of thought in a paragraph, it is requi- site that the sentences comprising it shall relate, each and all. to one definite division of the subject which they illustrate and explain. In order that a paragraph shall possess the quality of continuity, it is requisite that the sentences be so stated and arranged as to carry the line of thought naturally and suggestively from one to the other. In order that a paragraph shall possess the quality of variety, it is requisite that the constituent sentences shall differ both in length and in structure. June 1900. 1. (a) See 1, June '96. So much of the subject as writer intends to develop, whether implied or formally stated, is technically known as the theme. An essay is a composition on any subject — usually short, but may be extended to many pages. 2. A simple sentence is a single statement and contains but one subject and one predicate; as. The eye is the organ of sight. A compound sentence is one that consists of two or more simple sen- tences connected together; as. Light has spread and bayonets think. A complex sentence is one composed of a principal clause and one or more dependent clauses; as. As I drew near the camp, I heard a loud shout. 3. (a) Style is the manner of expressing thought by the selection and combination of words. 99 (b) See 2, June '96. ■ (c) The arrangement and connection of words in a sentence. (d) Unity, coherence and emphasis. 4. See 4, June '97. 5. (a) A period is a sentence in which the complete sense is suspended until the close. A loose sentence is one complete in meaning at one or more points before its close. (b) See 5, Sept. '99. Sept. 1900. 1. By synthesis of compound sentences is meant the process of com- bining separate statements into one compound sentence. See 2, June '99. 2. (1) By variation of the arrangement or structure of the sentence; as, Wide is the gate and broad is the way that leadeth to destruction. How wonderful is sleep! (2) By variation of phraseology; as, There is as much beauty in the earth as there is gi-andeur in the heavens — eq.uivalent to, There is no less beauty in the earth than grandeur in the heavens. 3. - (a) Accuracy in the use of words, simplicity of words, concise- ness, or brevity of language and purity of words. (b) See 3, June '96, and 4, June '97. Circumlocution — Pope professed to have learned poetry from Dry- den whom, whenever an opportunity presented itself, he praised through the whole period of his existence with a liberality which never varied. (c) See 6, Sept. '99. Unity — The subject should be changed as little as possible in the course of the sentence. Ideas that have but little connection should be expressed in separate sentences and not crowded into one. Long parenthesis in the middle of a sentence should be avoided. Clearness— Words, phrases and clauses that are closely' related should be placed as near to each other as possible, that their mutual relation may clearly appear. • The subject should be repeated when its omission would cause ambi- guity or obscurity. A preposition should be repeated after an intervening conjunction, especially if a verb and an object also intervene. Strength — Most important words should occupy most prominent places. Avoid excessive use of adjectives, improper repetition of a word, and recurrence of unpleasing similarity of sound. 4. See 5, June 1900. (b) See 5, Sept. '99. 5. The pen is mightier than the sword — Metonymy. Trade, like a restive hor^e, is not easily managed — Simile. The face of the deep is frozen over. — Personification. Death knocks alike at the palace and the cottage. — Personification. Am I a soldier of the cross? — Interrogation and metonymy. June 1901. 1, See 5, June '96. 2. (a) Personification and apostrophe. (b) Simile. (c) Metonymy. (d) Metonymy. 100 (e) Synecdoche. 3. See 3, Sept. 1900. Accuracy is that quality of language which consists in using the- "right word in the right place." Conciseness consists in using the smallest number of words for the complete expression of a thought. Purity requires that the words we employ shall be good, reputable English. (See 3, Oct. '94). 4. See 3, Sept. 1900. Sept. 1901. 4. See 4, June '97. In English verse, a foot consisting of an unaccented syllable followed by an accented one. Term sometimes applied to a verse composed of iambic feet. Ex. — "Thy gen|ius calls|thee not|to pur|chase fame." Meter is poetical measure depending on number and accent of sylla- bles. See 4, June '96. Nov. 1901. 2. See 2, Sept. '90. 3. See 3, June 1901. 4. See 2, June 1902. 5. See 10, June '98. June 1902. 1. See 2 and 3, Sept. '96. 2. See 4, June '97. 5. See 6, Sept. '99. Sept. 1902. 3. Adjective clause : He that steals my purse steals trash. Adverbial clause : While the band played, the soldiers rested. Substantive : What a day loill bring forth is uncertain. 5. See 6, Sept. '99. PHYSIOLOGY. Sept. '94 — Second Grade. 1. (a) Gives form to the body, supports the various organs in their- positions, protects the vital organs, and its bones serve as levers in producing motion. (b) No such term occurs either in physiology or zoology. Probably the question refers to "upper extremity." If so, there are in the shoulder the clavicle in front and the scapula behind; in the arm the humerus; in the forearm, the radius and ulna; in the wrist eight carpal bones; and in the hand five metacarpal bones and fourteen phalanges. 2. (a) Organic matter (Gelatin and blood vessels) 33.30 Inorganic or earthy matter — Phosphate of lime ° 51.04 Carbonate of Lime 11.30 Fluoride of Calcium 2.00 Phosphate of Magnesia 1.16 Soda and Common Salt 1.20 100.00' (b) A watery fluid, turning to a gristly substance within a fortnight, oozes out of the fractured ends, bone-matter is then slowly deposited and in five or six weeks complete union takes place. 101 3. (a) With the exception of five single ones, the muscles are ar- -ranged in pairs, each with its antagonist, so that they expand and con- tract alternately. (b) They are covered with strong, inelastic membranes, called fasciae. (c) Contractibility. 4. Mouth, Pharynx, Oesophagus, Stomach, Small Intestine, Large In- testine. 5. If the blood be bright red and spurting in jets, it comes from an .artery and a compress or bandage should be placed between the wound and heart; but if it be dark and flowing in a steady stream it is from a vein and the compress must be placed on the vein on the side of the wound away froTn the heart. - 6. (a) It throws off its load of carbonic acid gathered in the sys- temic capillaries, and takes a new supply o£ oxygen trom the air cells of the lungs. The color is changed irom dark purple to scarlet. (b) Because elements which have just been rejected by the body, are taken back, instead of the invigorating oxygen, and the whole system becomes obstructed by refuse matter injurious to health. 7. (a) Because it excretes, in perspiration and exhalation, waste mat- ter, and in proper action tends to purify the blood. (b) It protects and supports the soft parts of the body, is the organ of touch, and is one of the chief excretory organs. 8. The brain is an egg-shaped body, weighing about fifty ounces, and composed principally or a white substance, whose surface is cov ered by a layer of gray matter dipping down into its fissures. 9-10. It is masticated and mixed with the saliva; swallowed, acted upon by the gastric juice in the stomach, and by the other intestinal juices in the small intestine. When it is absorbed by the lacteals and further prepared for entrance into the blood, after which it is con- veyed through the lymphatics and the thoracic duct to the veins and so taken up by the circulation, (b) It furnishes heat to the body. Sept. '91r— First Grade. 1. Physiology is the science of the functions of organized bodies. Anatomy is the science of the structure of organic bodies. Hygiene — is the science of health. Ossification is the process by which cartilage turns to bone. Assimilatio,n is the process by which digested food becomes flesh and bone. 2. The femur or thigh-bone has almost a globular head at its uppei extremity, which is fitted into a very deep socket in the innominatum or hip-bone. The socket is called the acetabulum; also the cotyloid cavity. 3. (a) The stretching of the nerves supplying the muscles brought into play during violent exercise. (b) The effect is soothing and if an exudate has been formed within the muscle, bathing and rubbing will tend to hasten absorption, thua lessening pressure on nerves, and hence decreasing pain. 4. (a) The brain, (b) The bones, (c) The blood. 5. (a) Gastric Circulation: From the left auricle, the blood is forced past the bicuspid valve into the left ventricle, thence through the semi- lunar valve into the great aorta; from here it passes through the arter- ies, capillaries and veins, returning through the venal canal to the right auricle. (b) Lesser Circiilations. The blood is now venous or impure blood and going through the tri-cuspid valve, it empties into the, right ventri- cle. Thence it passes through the semilunar valve into the pulmonary 102 artery, thence to the capillaries of the lungs, whence puritied it returns through the pulmonary veins to the left auricle. 6. The lungs, kidneys, liver and skin. The chief function of the lungs as excretory organs is the removal of carbonic acid from the blood; that of the kidneys is the removal of nitroganous waste from the blood. The function of liver is not well understood, but its secretion^ the bile, is thought to be an excrementive substance, containing carbon and hydrogen. The skin excretes watery vapor, carbonic acid, urea and common salt. 7. (a) The nervous system includes the I) rain, the spinal cord and the nerves, and is composed of two kinds of matter, the white and the gray. The former consists of minute glistening white fibres, the latter- of gray cells of pulp-like consistency. These are generators of nerve force while the white fibres are its conductors. (b) Psychology is the science of mind, but to understand the mind we must know the gi'oss and microscopical structure of the brain and nerve tissue without which mind is impossible. 8. No. 9. (a) The apparently stimulating action of alcohol on the heart is due to the paralysis of the nerves governing the capillaries which check the flow of blood. Hence the organ is "over-worked" and long- continued use causes a "degeneration of the muscular fiber." (b) The delicate linings of the stomach become inflamed, and fre- uently ulcers form, sometimes terminating in cancer of the stomach. (c) Vascular enlargement of the capillaries results and their walls become inelastic and brittle. (d) The brain absorbs more alcohol than any other organ. Inflam- mation and hardening of the brain substance result from its use. 10. (a) See 6 (b), Second Grade, Sept. '94. (b) Not enough saliva is mixed with food; those pieces not masticated resist the action of the digestive fluids; the food is washed down with drinks that dilute the gastric juice, and thus hinder its work; and lastly, we do not realize the quantity eaten until the stomach becomes over-loaded. (c) Tobacco inflames the tissues of the stomach, lungs and heart; thins and vitiates the blood; produces cancerous affections of the throat; chronic indigestion; palpitation of the heart; uncertainty in the control of the voluntary muscles; deadens the nerves of special sense; and in the young, arrests the development of both mind and body. October 1894. 1. (a) See 6 (a), Sept. '94, Second Grade. (b) In the capillaries, the blood gives up the oxygen carried by its cells, and the materials for the renovation of the tissues, and gathers up waste products to be carried to some excretory organ. On account of this exchange, the color of the blood is changed from bright red to dark purple. 2. (a) An organ whose functions are secretive, elaborative and ex- cretive. (d) The liver, a large reddish-brown gland situated in the abdominal cavity immediately beneath the diaphragm, at the right of and overly- ing a portion of the stomach, is the largest gland of the body and weighs from three to four pounds. The pancreas, a long, tongue shaped gland of yellowish color, is sit- uated behind the stomach. The spleen, a gland whose ofiice is not known, is situated on the left side of the spine. 3. Saliva, a thin, watery frothy fluid, slightly alkaline, secreted by 103 tne mucoufc membrane of the mouth and by the salivary glands. Its action on the starch contained in food, changes it to grape-sugar. The gastric juice, a thin, colorless, acid fluid secreted by the glands of the stomach. Its active principle is pepsin, which converts nitroge- nous principles into soluble substances called peptones, capable of be- ing absorbed througii the coats of the stomach and intestines. Tiie bile, a viscid fluid of dariv golden color extremely bitter and slightly allialine to the taste. It is secreted by the liver, and its action, though not understood, is necessary to life. Tlie pancreatic juice, a viscid, alkaline fluid, slightly milky in appear- ance and possessing the power of changing starch to sugar. It is se- creted bj' the pancreas. 4. See lU (b), Sept. '94, First Grade. 5. (a) The crossing of nerves. (,bj In the medulla oblongata and the spinal cord, also the optic nerves in the cranium. (j. See Sept. '94, Second Grade. 7. (a) The limb should be bound with handkerchiefs to a strip of board, or even to umbrellas or walking sticks, as temporary splints, and if patient lias to be carried some distance care should be taken to prevent injury to the fleshy parts by the ends of the fractured bone. (b,l In a fracture there is crepitus and mobility of parts, whereas in a sprain these symptoms are absent, and early swelling with general pain in joint is presenc. In case of severe sprain bandage joint tightly, and pour iee-vi^ater over sprain. 8. (a) Excretory, (bj See 6 (bj, Sept. '94, First Grade. 9. That bright pupils are more fond of out-door games than dull ones is by no means an established fact. 10. Because the brains of children becoming easily fatigued, require frequent relaxation, and their muscles demand relief through exercise from the tension of a sitting posture. Permanent mental and physical injury may. be done young children by prolonged periods of study and insulficient exercise. May. 1895. 1. They form a single row of Ave bones in the palm of each hand. 2. See 7 (b). Second Grade, Sept. '94. . 3. The skeleton contains at maturity 206 bones— classified according to form as long, short, flat and irregular. A transverse section of bone shows first an investing membrane called the Periosteum, a compact outer layer of bone tissue, an inner layer more porous, and a central canal containing a fatty substance called "marrow." For composition of bones see 2 (a), Second Grade, Sept. '94. 4. By means of the Haversian Canals, the entrances to which from the surfaces of bones and the medullary cavities are called Nutrient Foramina. 5. The Jieart, which is a hollow, pear-shaped muscular organ about the size of a man's fist, and weighs from ten to twelve ounces; the arteries, which are strong elastic tubes through which the blood passes from the ventricles to all parts of the body; the veins, tubes througli which the blood returns to the heart after being forced out through the arteries and the capillaries, miscroscopic tubes joining the termini of the arteries to the commencement of minute veins. 6. (a) The larynx, trachea and the lungs. (b) Respiration consists of the two processes, inspiration and expi- ration. When we inhale a full breath, the diaphragm descends, press- ing the abdominal walls outward; the size of the chest being thus en- larged the lungs expand to occupy the extra space and the air from 104 without, through the foi'ce of gravity, rushes in, and fills every cell. In expiration we draw in the walls of the abdomen and raise the dia- phragm, thus diminishing the size of the chest and forcing the air out- ward. 7. (a) The alimentary canal, consisting of the following divisions : mouth, pharynx, oesophagus, stomach, small intestine and large intes- tine; and the accessory glands; viz., the salivary glands, those of the stomach which secrete the gastric juice, the liver and the pancreas. (b) See 3. Oct. '94. 8. Milk, eggs, cheese, flesh and the gluten in wheat. 9. A cold climate requires much carbonaceous or fatty food, for the production of heat and force, but in tropical regions, a low unstimu- lating diet consisting principally of fruits and vegetables, should be adopted. 10. (a) The blood becomes thin and watery, and alcohol, if present in sufficient q.uantities, because of its affinity for water, absorbs the moisture from the blood corpuscles, causing them to shrink up, and lose their ability to carry oxygen. (b) The nerves become partially paralyzed, thus lessening general sensibility and producing disordered motion, which, beginning with un- steadiness of the nerves, frequently ends in true paralysis. (c) See 9 (d). First Grade, Sept. '94. (d) Tobacco, opium and cocaine. Tobacco, see 10 (.c), Sept. '94, First Grade. Opium poisoning causes the body to become emaciated, produces ner- vous derangement and destroys the intellect. The use of cocaine causes derangement of the vital centers and in- duces a gloomy sort of inania. Sept. 1895. 1. See 1, Sept. '94, First Grade. 2. See 2, Oct. '94. 3. See 3 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade. 4. See 10 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade. 5. (a) See 7, June '98. (c) Lymph is merely the plasma of the blood, containing a few white corpuscles. (d) The lacteals are the lymphatic vessels of the intestines and carry chyle through the process of digestion. (e) The pulse- is the throbbing of an artery, caused by the spurting of the blood set in motion by the contraction of the heart. 6. S.ee 6, May 1895. 7. (a) See 7, May, '95. (b) Food is first broken by mastication into small particles to enable the digestive fluids of the mouth and stomach to act upon it. During this process it is mixed with saliva which moistens it and changes starch, an insoluble substance, into grape sugar, a soluble one, after which it is forced to the back of the mouth by the cheeks and tongue, and passes through the pharynx into the oesophagus by the contraction of the muscles of the throat and thence to the stomach. Here it is con- verted into a semi-liquid state by the peristaltic motion of the stomach and is thoroughly mixed with the gastric juice which converts its ni- trogenous elements intol soluble Isubstancqs called peptones. In this state it is called chyme. Chyme passes from the stomach through the pyloric valve to the duodenum, where it is mingled with the bile and pancreatic juice which convert it into a milky emulsion called chyle. With the exception of some of the fats which undergo further changes in the lacteals, the food is now ready for absorption by the capillaries which deposit where needed for the repair of the body. 105 8. It connects the middle ear through the pharynx with the external "■ear, and thus equalizes the pressure on the inner and outer, sides of the tympanum, preventing injury to this membrane and securing accuracy in its vibrations. 9. (a) High mental power. (b) A vertical section through each hemisphere of the cerebellum ex- hibits a tree-like structure, the trunk being composed of white nerve matter and the branches of gray. This is called the "Arbor Vitae" or tree of life. 10. (a) See 9 (d), First Grade, Sept. '94. (b) See 10 (a), May, '95. (c) See 10 (b), May, '95. (d) See 9 (a), First Grade, Sept. '94. (e) See 9 (b), First Grade, Sept. '94. Also 10 (c), First Grade, Sept. '94. June '96. 1. See 1, Sept. '94, First Grade. 2. (a) See 1 (a), Sept. '94, Second Grade. (b) The muscles give form and symmetry to the body and produce its varied movements. 3. The shoulder — clavicle and scapula; the arm — humerus; the fore- arm — ulna and radius; the hand — eight wrist or carpal bones, five me- ta-carpal bones, and fourteen phalanges. 4. See 7, Sept. '95. i 5. See 5, May '95. 6. See 6, May '95. 7. The cerebrum and cerebellum — The former is the center of intel- ligence and thought, the latter controls the voluntary muscles. 8. The eyes should never be used to read by a dim light, and the light should always come from one side, and never in front. They should never be strained by reading fine print, and should not be used Ijeyond the point of fatigue. 9. (a) See 7 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. (b) Classified as to function, nerves are either motory or sensory; as to origin, either cranial or spinal. (c) Motory nerves are those that convey impressions from the nerve centers outward. 10. (a) Take care to eat slowly, and at regular hours; to masticate food thoroughly and to avoid drinking while the mouth contains food; to abstain from drinking very cold and very hot beverages, also from the use of alcoholic stimulants and highly seasoned dishes; to cultivate cheerfulnesss at table and to vary the diet to suit the season of the year. (b) See 9 and 10 (c), Sept. '94, First Grade, also 10, May '95. (c) The greatest importance because human happiness depends upon •obedience to a few simple laws of health. Their study therefore is bind- ing upon all who would promote their own happiness or that of others. (d) From, 70 to 72 degrees. (e) To make the schoolroom a model in these respects. Sept. 1896. 1. See 1, Sept. '94, Second Grade. 2. (a) A body of contractile tissue, constituting a motor organ and liaving a distinct office, (b) A collection of five hundred distinct muscles which in discharging their respective functions, produce the different movements of the body. (c) The biceps and triceps, in the front and back of arm respectively; 106 the pronator and supinator are located in the forearm and turns the palm of the hand down and up respectively; the deltoid, upper part of arm and shoulder, raises the arm from the side; the sternocleido-mastoid, at the side of the neck, bends the head forward and from side to side; the sartorius, longest muscle in the body, an'?t the adductors, in the leg; the gastrochnemius, largely constituting the calf of the leg, is used in walk- ing; and the soleus also in the leg, is used in walking and preventing the body from falling forward when erect. 3. See 6, May '95. See 6 (b), Sept. '94, Second Grade. 4. See 6, Sept. '94, First Grade. 5. See 7, Sept. '95. 6. The flow of the gastric juice is seriously retarded, and the diges- tive fluids, so diluted that they fail to perform their respective offices. 7. (a) Alcohol coagulates and precipitates the pepsin of the gastric juice and therefore greatly hinders, or stops, digestion. Its moderate use causes inflammation of the lining membranes of the stomach, and frequently ulcerous patches make their appearance. (b) See 9 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. ((5) See 9 (d), Sept. '94, First Grade, (d) See 10 (c), Sept. '95. 8. Vegetables, because they are not as stimulating a diet as meats, and because nitrogenous or strength-producing foods are needed, rather than carbonaceous or heat-producing foods (to which class belong meats) are required. 9. (a) No, because mental or physical work interferes with the pro- cess of digestion, (b) When angry or worried the digestive process is seriously hin- dered. For evils of rapid eating see 10 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade. 10. (a) See 10 (c), Sept. '94, First Grade. (b) Chewing is more injurious than smoking, because more of the poison is taken directly into the system. June 1897. 1. (a) See 1, Sept. '94, Second Grade. 2. Lachrymal-glands — located in the bony wall of the eye's orbit. Sehaceous — Glands of the skin near the roots of the hair. Salivary — Glands opening into the mouth. Perspiratory — Minute glands beneath the skin in all parts of the body^ Lymphatic — Small, round glands in the lymphatic vessels, which are- found interlaced with the blood capillaries, in nearly every part of the body. 3. (a) See 7, Sept. '94, Second Grade. (b) It should be kept clean by frequent bathing. The use of cosmet- ics should be avoided. 4. See 7. Sept. '95. 5. (a) See 10 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade, (b) See 6, Sept. '96. 6. The function of the liver is the secretion of bile by means of the bile capillaries which extend among the hepatic cells comprising the gland. From these, the bile is conveyed through the cystic duct to the gall bladder or through the hepatic duct directly to the common bile duct which discharges the bile into the duodenum when digestion Is In progress. 7. (a) Only proper exercise can impart strength and tone to the or- 107 gani of the body. An unusued muscle or organ soon becomes unable to perform its natural functions. (bj Directly after a meal and after long abstinence from food. (C) To permit the organs to repair the tissues destroyed by their use. (d) Because in childhood nature requires more time for the process of building up and repair. (e) Eye-lids, eye-lashes, lubricating oilj gland and teax or lachrymal glands. 8. It consists of the brain and spinal cord, the nerves and ganglia, and the organs; of special sense. 9. (a) Yes. (b) See 9 (d), Sept. '94, First Grade. (.c) See 9 (b), Sept. '94. First Grade. (d) "Fatty degeneration" takes place and the tissues become so modi- fied that frequently "'Bright's Disease" ensues, (e) See 10 (a). May '95. 10. (a) Nicotine. (b) It retards the development of both mind and body. (c) See 6 (b), Sept. '94, Second Grade, (dj See 0, June '98. (e) By opening windows from top and bottom, and if possible, having an open fire-place. Sept. 1897. 1. (a) See 1 (.a), Sept.' '94, Second Grade. (,bj A transverse section of the spinal cord shows three membranes, the dura mater, arachnoid membrance, and the pia mater, enclosing a mass of white nerve substance, which contains a core of gray matter ar- ranged in two crescent-shaped bodies. It is the center of nerve force for thirty-one pairs of nerves, having in it their origin. (c) See 2 (a), Sept. '94, Second Grade, (d; 206. (e) The sternum, clavicle, scapula, humerus, ulna, radius, the innom- inata, femur, tibia, and fibula. 2. (a) Voluntary and involuntary. (b) Voluntary muscles, or those under control of the will, are com- posed of fine fibers made up of minute Mlaments, each of which is com- posed of a row of small cells. These are bound together by connective tissue, by this arrangement added strength being gained. Involuntary muscles perform their respective functions without our volition; e. g., the heart, and are arranged in layers. (c) Tendons are used to attach the muscles to the bones at the joints, and are composed of glistening white fibres, strong and flexible, but inelastic. (d) The Tendon of Achilles, forming the common attachment to the heel of the gastrochnemius, and soleus muscles. (e) See 7, June '97. 3. (a) The skin is composed of two distinct layers. The outer one, or cuticle, is composed of layers of small, flat cells, soft and moist within, and becoming dry, horny scales on the surface. The inner layer or cutis is a close net-work of fibrous tissue through which nerves and blood-vessels ramify. (b) It protects and supports the soft part of the body, is the organ of touch, is one of the chief excretory organs, lends beauty and symmetry to the body and by means of its appendages, the hair, teeth and nails, respectively protects against heat and cold, acts as an organ of digestion, and adds to the mechanical perfection of the hand. (c) In order to keep the body free from the accumulations of excre- 108 mentious substances and dust, which obstruct the pores of the skin. The best time is on rising from bed, and a cool bath is more invigorating. (d) To protect the body from heat, cold and sudden draughts. (e) Clothing, if too tight, hinders the circulation; if too heavy, it pre- vents the ready escape of perspiration; if unclean, it contaminates the body, and invites disease; if wet, it induces cold, and if cheaply dyed, there is danger from poisonous substances being absorbed through the pores of the skin. 4. See 7, Sept. '95. 5. (a) Physiologically a food is a substance which contains either elements of which the body is composed, or fuel for maintaining its tem- perature, and must be capable of digestion. (b) Nitrogenous, or albuminoid, and non-nitrogenous, or carbonaceous. (c) The former are classified as proteids and albuminoids, the latter as hydrocarbons and carbohydrates. (d) The proteids are obtained from lean meat; the white of eggs; Ca- sein from milk and cheese; and gluten from plants; the albuminoids from the fibrous tissue of animals. Hydrocarbons are obtained from animal fats and vegetable oils, as from tallow and suet, butter and lard, and carbohydrates, chiefly from plants; e. g., starch, sugar and gums. (e) Water and the chlorides, phosphates, and sulphates of the bases, sodium, potassium, magnesium and calcium. Lime, for bone, phosphorus for the brain, iron for the blood, and the alkalies to aid in digestion. 6. Albuminoids : fish, eggs, milk, wheat bread, apples, onions. Car'bonaceous : butter, sweet potatoes, peas, mustard. 7. (a) See 9 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. (b) They produce congestion, inflammation and ulceration. Fatty de- generation is a common result. (c) See 9 (d), June '97. (d) See 9 (d), Sept. '94, First Grade. (e) See 10 (b). May '95. 8. (a) Yes. (b) Because they engender an appetite for stronger bev- erages. (c) See 9 and 10, Sept. '94, First Grade, and 10, May '95. (d) See 10 (d). May '95. 9. Intense heat and fatigue. Symptoms, state of unconsciousness and hot, dry skin. The sufferer should have clothing loosened and should be carried at once where cold water can be dashed on his head and chest, until consciousness is restored. 10. Improperly cooked food causes indigestion, and as the body is in- sufiiciently nourished therewith, other functional disorders and general weakness may ensue. A morbid craving for stimulants, as a result, of- ten leads to the use of alcoholics and narcotics. Right cooking renders food more palatable and serves as an aid to digestion. June '98, 1. The spinal column, consisting of twenty-four bones, or vertebrae; the ribs, twenty-four long, slender, curved bones forming the walls of the thorax; the sternum, a flat bone, situated in the medial line in front of the thorax; the os hyoides, a u-shaped bone at the base of the tongue; the innominata, two large, irregular bones which with the sacrum form the pelvic basin; the sacrum, a wedge-shaped bone situated at the base of the spinal column between the innominata and the coccyx, a small curved prolongation of the sacrum. 109 2. These bones are so flexible on account of their cartilaginous state,, that the weight of the dangling feet will bend the thigh bones over the edge of the seat and produce deformity. 3. (a) See 2 (b), Sept. '97, (b) Their use — To give form and symmetry to the body, and produce its varied movements. 4. A perspiratory gland is a minute tube coiled into a globular mass and discharging the perspiration which it secretes from the blood, through a spirally-coiled duct upon the surface of the skin. 5. See 6, ay '95. 6. Rebreathing air in crowded rooms, owing to the presence of car- bolic acid, causes drowsiness and headache, which besides impairing the health, unfits pupils for mental activity. In addition to this children come, frequently, from sick-rooms bringing with them the germs of dis- ease, or may themselves, even, have poisoned organs, or bear traces of: illness, making their breath and exhalations poisonous. The best ventilation is secured by having a strong entering current of pure warm air from a hot-air furnace. In Florida, however, there are few days when ventilation may not be provided simply by opening the windows at the top and bottom, on the sheltered side tit the building to avoid injurious draughts of air. 7. The heart is a hollow, pear-shaped, muscular organ, about the size of a man's fist, composed of several layers of stiratfed fibres. Its walls vary in thickness from one-twelfth to one-half inch, and inclose two entirely distinct cavities, each of which is separated into two connecting chambers, an auricle and a ventricle. The contraction of a chamber of the heart is called a systole, and its expansion, a diastole. 8. (a) It is first accelerated but ultimately becomes feebler. (b) See 9 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. (c) See 10 (a). May '95 (d) Congestion of the lungs and pneumonia are frequently caused by their use. 9. See 7, Sept. '95. 10. (a) See 7, Sept. '96. (b) Nearly all the diseases springing from indulgence in alcoholic beverages are liable to become hereditary, and the appetite itself trans- mitted through at least three or four generations. Sept. '98. 1. (a) Osseous, muscular, articulatory, digestive, absorptive, circula- tory, respiratory, excretory, and nervous systems. (b) Sclerous or bone tissue, connective, cartilaginous, muscular, adi- pose or fatty, and nervous tissue. 2. One occipital, two parietal, two temporal, one frontal, one sphe- noid and one ethmoid in the cranium, two molar, two superior maxil- lary, one inferior maxillary, two lachrymal, two nasal, one vomer, two turbinated and two palate in the face, and one molens, one incus and one stopes in each ear. 3. (a) Nitrogenous or albuminoid, carbonaceous and mineral. (b) Eggs, wheat bread and lean meat; butter, sugar, and Irish pota- toes; and salt, iron and water, respectively. 4. See 7 (b). May '95. 6. A vertical section shows a solid portion composed mainly of ivory or dentine, which is covered in the body of the tooth with a thin layer of enamel, and in the root by cement; and a cavity containing a soft sensitive substance called dental pulp. 7. Transfusion — The process by which blood from a healthy animal 110 is infused into tlie veins of another animal or human being for the purpose of restoring strength and saving life. Trepanning or trephinning is the perforation of the skull and remov- ing a portion of the bone to relieve pressure or irritation of the brain. Scalp is shaved and washed ahtiseptically, patient anesthized and the trephine turned gradually but firmly until button of bone is detached. Grafting is the process of cutting strips of epidermis and laying same on raw surface.* Peristalsis is the vermicular shortening and narrowing of the intes- tine resulting in propelling its contents downward. 8. See 7 (a) Sept. '94, First Grade. Sensory — Those nerves which carry impressions from the various parts of the body to the nervous centers. Vaso-motor — Those nerves that supply the walls of the blood vessels. Sympathetic nerves are those branching from a central, double chain of ganglia and distributed throughout all the thoracic, abdominal and pelvic viscera. Cranial — One of twelve pairs of nerves springing from the lower part of the brain and the medulla oblongata. 9. Lacunae — ^Small, irregularly-shaped cavities between the Lamellae found in compact osseous tissue. Fasciae — Strong, inelastic membranes, investing the muscles and bind- in their fasciculi firmly together. Cochlea — ^A spinal canal, somewhat resembling the common snail shell, which extends from the vestibule of the inner ear into the sub- stance of the temporal bone. Meninges — The membranes enveloping the brain and spinal cord. Masseter — A short thick muscle, situated below the ear at the angle of the lower jaw, and used in chewing. 10. The larynx is a small triangular cartilaginous box, placed just behind the tongue, and at the top of the wind-pipe. The opening into it from the throat is called the glottis, and the cover the epiglottis. The vocal cords are elastic membranes on each side of the glottis and projecting from the sides of the larynx across the opening. Other organs of speech, which need no description, are the lips, teeth, tongue and palate. June 1899. 1. (a) To make good the loss caused by the constant elimination of waste matter from the body. (b) Albuminoid or nitrogenous foods containing, as their name indi- cates, nitrogen as one of their chief constituents; e. g., the white of eggs and gluten of wheat; carhonaceous, those containing much carbon, viz., the sugars and fats; and mineral foods, such as salt, iron and wa- ter. (c) Because both nitrogen and carbon are necessary to the growth and repair of the body, and no one food contains both elements in the proper proportion to support life. 2. Mastication, insalivation, chymefication and chylification. For de- scription, see 3, Oct. '94, and 7, Sept. '95. 3. Roast beef and mutton, the most nutritious of meats, require three and three and a quarter hours respectively; potatoes and bread, two and one-half; eggs and milk about two. The last mentioned food can sus- tain life for a longer time than any other article of diet as it contains all the essential elements of food. Roast pork requires five and a quar- ter hours for digestion and contains much carbon. Oysters are very nourishing, as is also cheese. 4. (a) See 10 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade. . 5. (a) See 7, Sept. '96. Ill (b) It consists in a change in the fibre of an oi-gan, its place bein^ taken by a deposit of unhealthy fat. 6. See 7 (a), Sept. '94. 7. The sense of taste is located in the papillae of the tongue and palate. They absorb the liquid to be tasted and convey it to the nerves. It was intended to guide in the selection of food. 8. It consists of the external, middle and internal ear. The external ear consists of the auricle, an irregularly folded sheet of cartilage attached to the side of the head for the purpose of collecting vibrations of sound; and the auditory canal, an irregular, cylindrical tube, about an inch and a quarter long, which conveys the waves of sound to the middle ear, which is an irregular cavity about the size of a small cherry, separated from the auditory canal by the membrane of the tympanum or ear drum. It is filled with air and traversed by a chaia of little bones — the malleus^ incus, and stopes. The internal ear consists of the vestibule, or anti-chamber; the semi- circular canals, these channels, about one-twentieth of an inch in diam- eter, arching out into the bone, separately from the vestibule, and re- turning to it after completing the greater parts of circles; and the cochlea, a spiral canal somewhat resembling a snail shell and extending from the vestibule into the substance of the temporal bone. (f) Use warm water to wash the ear, and never remove accumulated wax with a hard instrument. 9. The essential parts of the eye are the eye-hall and the optic nerve. The former consists of three coats, the outer or sclerotic coat, a tough, opaque, fibrous membrane covering the back and sides of the eyeball, known as the "white of the eye"; the clioroid, a black lining to absorb superfluous light; and the retina, a delicate membrane formed by the expansion of the optic nerve. The front part of the sclerotic coat is a transparent window, the cor- nea, between which and the crystalline lens, which brings the rays of light to a focus, is a refracting medium called the aqueous humor. The concave space between the crystalline lens and the retina is oc- cupied by a transparent jelly-like substance, called the vitreus humor. (b) Far-sightedness results from the globe of the eye being flattened so that the rays of light strike the retina before they are brought to a focus and is remedied by convex glasses; near-sightedness, from an elon- gation of the eyeball, so that rays of light are brought to a focus he- fore they reach the crystalline lens, and is remedied by concave glasses. 10. (a) Carbonic acid, carbonic oxide, and ammonia gases; carbon or soot and nicotine. (b) See 10 (c), Sept. '94, First Grade. Sept. 1899. 1. (a) In front of the knee-joint; (b) in the forearm, on the side next the thumb. (c) The Tickets is a disease of the bones in which there is lack of mineral matter, and a consequent crookedness and deformity of the bod- ily frame. (d) St. Vitus' dance is a chronic, involuntary contraction or twitching of those muscles usually controlled by the will, especially those of the face and extremities. (e) A transparent, yellowish, lubricating fluid resembling the white of an egg, secreted by the synorial membrane surrounding the joints. 2. (a) The organs of circulation, digestion and respiration. (b) Fibrils — Minute filaments made up of small cells arranged in a row which, bound firmly together by connective tissue, compose the muscular fibres. 112 (c) Muscular sense — That faculty by which we determine by pressure- and resistance the weight and texture of substances, and maintain the equipoise of the body. (d) Mucous membrane — The delicate, sensitive membrane, having the- same structure as the skin, with which every part of the body is lined. (e) Because a chicken uses the muscles of its breast but little, while a pigeon is almost constantly on the wing. 3. (a) See 3 (a), Sept. '97. (b) See G. Sept. '9S. (c) Because the pigment cells beneath the skin have been destroyed, (d, e) They should be carefully brushed after each meal and particles- of food removed by soft, wood toothpicks. 4. (,a) Trachea — A rigid cylindrical tube, somewhat less than an inch, in diameter and four and a half inches in length, extending from the larynx down into the thorax where it divides into the bronchial tubes. It is composed of elastic fibres and cartilaginous rings and is lined by a mucous membrane. (b) See 10, Sept. '98. (c) Cilia — Minute filaments found along the air passages, whose con- stant motion serves to fan the air in the lungs and to produce an out- ward current which is useful in catching fine particles drawn inward by the breath. (d) Pleura — The double covering investing the lungs, one layer being, attached to the lungs and the other to the walls of the chest. (e) Air contains oxygen, an element so vital that it must be supplied. the body every moment or we die. 5. (a) Plasma — The nearly colorless, transparent fluid in which. fioat the corpuscles of the blood, composed of serum and albuminous, substances called fibrin factors or fibrin. (b) See 7 (a), Sept. '98. (c) See 7, June, '98. (d) See 5 (e), Sept. '95. (e) See 5 (bj, Sept. '94, First Grade. 7. See 7 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. 8. Touch — This sense is located in the papillae, minute conical projec- tions of the cutis, spread over the whole body. Each of these contains its tiny nervelets that receive impressions and transmit them to the brain. Taste— See 7, June '99. Hearing — See 8, une '99. Sight— See 9, June "99. Smell — This sense is located in the nose, whose walls are formed of plates of bone and cartilage and its cavity divided into two large, irreg- ular chambers called nostrils, over whose inner surface are distributed the branches of the olfactory nerves. 9. (a) See 7 (a), Sept. '96. (b) It becomes inflamed, and sometimes unsightly blotches make their appearance. (c) See 8 (a), June '98. (d) See 10 (b), ay '95. (e) It is hardened because of absorption of its moisture thereby. 10. See 10 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade. June 1900. 1. (a) Fibula — The small, outside bone of the leg. Scapula — the thin,, flat triangular bone fitted to the top and back of the chest and called the "shoulder blade." Ulna — A slender bone on the inner side of the forearm, which articu-- lates with the humerus at the elbow. 113 (b) A stooping position, as in the case of students who bend forward to their books instead of lifting them nearer their eyes; also writing at high desk which necessitates raising one shoulder higher than the other to write. (c) When a ligament is strained, twisted or torn from its attachment, a sprain is produced. 2. See 2, Sept. '98. 3. See 7, Sept. '95. 4. (a) See 3 (a), Sept. '97. (b) Complexion is due to a pigment or coloring matter of varying hue, contained in the freshly formed cells on the lower side of the cuti- cle. 5. For description of the ear see 8, June '99. When waves of air, caused by the striking of one body against an- other, strike the membrane of the tympanum, it vibrates and sends the motion along the chain of bones in the middle ear to the labyrinth where they produce impression on the end organs of the auditory nerve, which conveys them to the brain and produces in the mind the idea of sound. 6. See 6, June '98. 7. For description of the eye, 9, June '99. Rays of light from an object enter the eye and are focussed by the refracting media on the re- tina, producing impressions on the optic nerve which are conveyed to the brain, giving the perception of light. 8. See 5, Sept. '94, First Grade. 9. Because fats supply the body with the heat required by that frigid climate, while the acid of fruits and vegetables is cooling, hence appro- priate food for a warm climate. 10. See 9 and 1 0(c), Sept. '94, First Grade, also 10, May '95. Sept. 1900. 1. See 1, June, 1900. 2. See 2. Oct. '94. 3. See 3 (a, b and c), Sept. '97. 4. See 6, Oct. '94. 5. See 10 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade, and 4, June '99. 6. See 6. June '98. 7. See 6, June '98. 7. See 9, Sept. '97. 8. See 9, June '99. 9. See 7, Sept. '97. 10. See 8, Sept. '97. June, 1901. 1. (a) See 1 (b), June '99. , (b) See 4. June '96. 2. (a) See 6, June '97. (b) The secretion of the gastric juice. (c) Its function is not understood but probably has to do with the production and renovation of blood corpuscles. (d) The secretion of saliva. 3. See 10, Sept. '95. 4. (a) Asphyxia — Suffocation or "oxygen starvation." (b) Pleurisy — An inflammation of the pleura. (c) Plasma — See 4 (a), Sept. '99. (d) Transfusion — See 7 (a), Sept. '98. (e) Serum — The clear, yellow liquid which constitutes the perma- nently fluid portion of the plasma. 114 5. (a) The pulmonary arteries. (b) The pulmonary veins. G. Certain diseases are communicated from infected person to unin- fected one, by living organisms called microbes, which gain access to the body of infected person by air^ food, or drink, and which growing and multiplying in body they invade, produce changes characteristic of the peculiar disease. 7. The veins contain valves whose use is to prevent the blood from flowing backward. S. By increasing the flow of blood to those muscles used, exercise builds them up, and they become larger, darker colored, hard and more compact. 9. By the action of oxygen within us, the heat of the body is main- tained. "Wherever repairs are needed there the blood corpuscles carry oxygen which tears down worn out tissues and consumes them, replac- ing them with fresh material. This process sets free the latent heat which is distributed by the circulation of the blood and regulated by means of the pores of the skin, and the mucous membrane of the air- passages. , 10. (a) See 5 (b), Sept. '97. (b) Carbonaceous foods containing starch are first changed by the saliva into grape sugar, and further changed by pancreative, an active principle of the pancreatic juice; the fats are taken up by the lacteals and prepared for assimilation. Nitrogenous foods are acted upon by the gastric juice, and converted into substances called peptones. They are further changed by the ac- tion of trypsin, a principle contained in the pancreatic juice. Sept. 1901. 1. (a) See 2 (b), Sept. '94, Second Grade. (b) The broken limb must be properly "set" and held in place by splints to prevent a rupture of the partially mended break by any sud- den jar. 2. (a) Food containing lime, (b) Curvature of the spine. 3. (a) See 2 (b), Sept. '97. (b) See 2 (c), Sept. '97. 4. (a) The muscles become pale, soft, and flabby, and general weak ness results. (b) See 8, June, 1901. (c) Often the muscles are strained or ruptured and blood-vessels burst. 5. See 6, ay. '95. 6. (a) See 9 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade, (b) See 10 (c), Sept. '95. 7. (a, b, d) See 8, Sept. '94, Second Grade. ' - (c, e) See 7, June '96. 8. See 5, June, 1900. 9. (11) Loosen the clothing about the neck and che^st, and turn the patient on his face; open the mouth, draw out the tongue, and cleanse the nostrils, so as to clear the air-passages. (2) Place the patient on his back, grasp his arms firmly above the el- bows, and pull them gently upward until they meet over the head in order to draw air into the lungs. Then bring the arms back to the side to expel the air. This process should be repeated about fifteen times per minute. Excite the nostrils with snuff or smelling salts. After respiration has been established, wrap the patient in dry, warm 115 clothes, and rub the limbs energetically toward the heart, applying mus- tard plasters to the chest and hot water bottles to the limbs and feet. 10. (a) See 6, June, 1901. (b) Because, the mosquito transmits the germs of the malarial and yellow fevers to the human family, and by destroying the mosquito we may lessen the number of people attacked by these diseases. , Nov. 1901. 1. See 3, May '95. 2. See 6, June '90. 3. See 4, June 1900. 4. See 2. June 1901. 5. See 9, May '95. 6. See 7, Sept. '97. 8. See 3, Sept. '98. 9. See 10, Sept. '99. 10. See 8, Sept. '98. June 1902. 1. Hinge-joints, those that admit of motion in two directions only, as in the elbow and knee. Ball-and-socJcet joints, which are formed by the x-eception of a globu- lar head into a cup-like cavity, as in the shoulder and hip. Gliding joints, formed by the opposition of plane surfaces and admit- ting a gliding movement, as in the wrist and ankle, and joints in which the bones are joined by cartilage, and which admit of slight movement in all directions, as between the vertebrae. 2. Tendon— See 2 (c), Sept. '97, Ligament — A strong band of fibrous tissue used to bind together the ends of bones in articulations. Tissues — The simple organic structures composing the organs of the human body. Membrane — A thin skin or tissue, as the mucous membrane. 3. (a) Through the capillaries. (b) By passing through the right chambers of the heart and perform- ing the "lesser circulation," then passing through the left chambers of the heart to the great aorta. 4. See 3, Oct. '94. 5. See 5, June, 1900. 6. See 7 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade, 7 and 9, June '96. 7. (a) If an artery- has been cut bind a ligature firmly above the wound; if the wound is bleeding freely, but no artery has been cut, the first thing to be done is to wash it with water at an ordinary tempera- ture, to every pint of water adding two and a half teaspoonsful of car- bolic acid, and two tablespoonfuls of glycerine to prevent irritation of the wound by the acid. If neither of these articles are convenient sub- stitute four tablespoonfuls of borax in the water. Wash the wound, close it and apply a compress of a folded square of cotton or linen, wet- ting it in the solution used for washing the wound and bandaging it down firmly. (b) Give mustard and warm water or syrup of ipecac. Follow with flour and water, and cream or sweet oil. (c) Loosen the clothing, place the head of the patient as low or lower than the feet, bathing the head with cold water and applying camphor, hartshorn or smelling salts to the nostrils. 8. That of an engine without a governor, since the nerves controlling the action of the heart and regulating the passage of the blood through 116 the capillary system become paralyzed, and the blood speeds through the body with increased force. (b) Physical languor ensues the apparently stimulating effects of in- dulgence in alcoholics, the heart flags, and the brain and muscles feel exhausted. 9. (a) The best preventive of typhoid and similar fevers lies in being careful that drinking water contains no fever germs. (b) See 6, June 1901, and 10, Sept. 1901. 10. (a, b, c) See 1, (a, b, c), Sept. '94, First Grade. (d) Respiration — Breathing. For description see 6, May, '95. (e) Digestion — The process by which food is made fit for assimilation by the tissues of the body. (f) Cell tissues — Masses of protoplasm containing muscles. (g) Sensory nerve — See 8 (b), Sept. '98. . See 7, Sept. '94, and 6 (b), Sept. '95. 7. Neither plants nor animals could exist without the other, since all the oxygen so necessary to animal life would soon be replaced in the atmosphere by carbonic acid, a poisonous gas, incapable of supporting life, were it not that ihis gas is appropriated by all forms of plant life, undergoing a change which again sets the oxygen free, to be used once more by the animal world. 8. (a) That time when the earth's position relative to the sun pro- duces everywhere on the globe days and nights of equal length. (b) Two. (c) March 21st and Sept. 22nd. Because its rays reach both poles at the same time. 9. Slightly to the southwa,rd at noon, because the sun is north of the equator in its journey toward the Tropic of Cancer. 10. (a) Because the atmosphere is cooler on a mountain and precipi- tation is due to the cooling of warm currents of air ascending from the heated lowlands, where the atmosphere can retain more moisture than when cooled. (b) See 8, May. '95. Sept. '96. 1. (a) Norway and Sweden, (b) From last days of May to end of July, (c) Always seen north of observer on account of earth's position. 2. (a) Yes. (b) Because at Jacksonville, which is the nearer of the two to the equator, a pendulum whose vibrations are of any given length, is shorter than one at Upermairk (in Greenland), having equal vibra- tionf. This difference being due to the difference in the force of gravity at the two places. 3. All of South America, north of the southern limit of Brazil, in the region of the south east trades, would receive southwest winds. These would be robbed of their moisture on the western slopes of the Andes, making the valleys of the Amazon and Orinoco Rivers barren wastes. Below 38 degrees the eastern slopes would be well watered by the pre- vailing winds, and forests would occupy the present area of the pampas. The eastern coast would be colder than at present because a cold current from the Antarctic would take the place of the equatorial current, and the western coast wou^ld be warmed by a current from tropical waters. 4. See 9 (d). and 10, Sept. '95. 5. See 7, Sept. '99. 6. See 5 (b), June '97. 7. The Caucasian race inhabits southwestern Asia, northern Africa, nearly all of Europe and America, together with large portions of Aus- tralia and South Africa. Mongolia — Nearly all of Asia, portions of northern Europe, Turkey and Greenland chiefly. Negro — Chiefly Africa. 8. No. Because its natural course is toward the north pole, hence it would not seek a channel to the westward. 9. See Geography questions 1 (c), Sept. 1900. 10. Yes. By protecting the forests, on mountains and other slopes. June '97. 1. Chemistry, physics, botany, zoology, geology and astronomy. 2. See 8, Sept. '94, examples, Hawaiian Islands and British Islands respectively. 3. Winds are caused by the unequal distribution of heat and vapor in the atmosphere, producing in heated regions, constant ascending cur- rents. The lower air from the surrounding cooler regions blows in to take their place, and a constant circulation is set up. 122 Tides— See 6, Sept. '95. Ocean currents are caused chiefly by the difference of density of their water produced by the differences in the temperature of the equatorial •and polar regions. Other causes are the winds and differences of den- sity and level brought about by evaporation. The cold polar waters be- ing denser, sink, which causes an influx of the surface waters from the ■equatorial regions and effects a constant interchange of waters between the equator and polar circles. 4. See 4, Sept. '95. 5. Volcanoes are supposed to be outlets of the pressure created by the highly heated conditions of the earth's interior. Earthquakes may be the forces thus created seeking vent, or the result of the increasing forces produced by contraction of the earth's crust. Earthquakes are most frequent in mountainous and volcanic regions because subterranean pressure undergoes rapid changes, this being espe- -cially true of the Pacific side of the continental plateau, which is bor- dered by the highest and youngest mountains. 6. Fossiliferous rocks show that the first forms of animal life were of the most rudimentary type. Through the lapse of ages covering thous- ands or even millions of years, these forms were gradually replaced by succeeding higher forms until the earth arrived at that stage of devel- opment which made it a suitable dwelling place for the highest of organ- ized beings — man. 7. Erosion — See Geography questions, 1, Sept. 1902. Fossil— See 9 (b), Sept. '95. Delta — See Geography questions 1 (c), Sept. 1900. Canyon — See Geography questions 1 (b), Sept. 1900. Monsoon — See 9 (d), Sept. '95. 8. (a) See 5, May. '95. (b) See 4, May '95. 9. Snow is the moisture that falls from the clouds, frozen In flakes and condensed at any temperature below 32 degrees Fahr. Hail stones are pellets of ice falling in showers, occasioned by great differences in the temperature of higher and lower strata of air. Dew — See Geography questions 1 (d), Sept. '99. Frost — Vapor precipitated in a solid form, when the dew-point of the air is below 32 deg. Fahr. Rain is the moisture of the atmosphere precipitated from the clouds in liquid form at any temperature above 32 deg. Fahr. 10. (a) See Geography questions 1 (e), June, 1901. (b) Coal-oil is one of the compounds resulting from the slow decom- position of various animal and vegetable matters, found in the strata of various rocks. It is obtained by boring and rises from the large reser- voir in which it is contained, as a constant spring. Sept. 1897. 1. See 1 (a), June '96. 2. (a) The rotation of the earth on its axis from west to east every twenty-four hours causes alternations of light and darkness, called day and night, as each hemisphere is turned toward or away from the sun. (b) The changes of seasons are caused by inclination of the earth's axis to the plane of its orbit 23^° together with the earth's annual revo- lution in its orbit around the sun. 3. (a) Mercator's projection represents the earth on a map in whicli all the parallels and meridians are straight lines. (b) In an equatorial projection of the entire earth, the equator passes through the middle of each hemisphere and a meridian circle forms the borders. 123 (c) In a polar projection the poles occupy the centres of each hemis- ;rphere, the eauator forming the border. (d) In a conical projection the earth's surface is represented as if drawn on the frustum of a cone and afterward unrolled, and is suitable ■only for representing portions of the earth's surface not hemispheres. 4. See 2 (a), Sept. '94. 5. (a) An atoll is a coral reef encircling a lagoon or body of water entirely free from islands. (b) That that region of the earth is subsiding. 6. See 7, Sept. '94, and 6 (b), Sept. '95. 7. The fall of the mercury in the barometer with an increase of ele- vation until at By^ miles it stands only half as high as the sea level. (b) See 3 (a), June '97. 8 (a) North American faunna is characterized by a large number of iierbiverous, auatic and fur-bearing animals. Ex., the moose, reindeer, bison, grizzly bear, beaver, mocking bird, blue jay, and rattle snake. (b) South American by its numerous forms of insect life, reptiles, aquatic birds, and parrots and among mammals by the ant-eater, sloth, taper and prehensile-tailed monkey. (c) Australian as being the home of the marsupials, e. g., the kanga- roo, and of peculiar birds such as the emu, cassowary and apterix. (d) Greenland contains many fur-bearing animals, the polar bear, the reindeer and the musk-ox; numerous waterfowl and sea animals as the walrus and whale. (e) Ciiba — The alligator, manatee, iguana or lizard and turtle are in- digenous while most of the domestic animals have been imported from .Europe as on the continent. 9. (a) Horizontal distribution of life is influenced by the latitude of .a region; vertical distribution by its altitude, while heat, moisture and vegetation form the true basis for each. (b) Abundant rainfall, regularly distributed throughout the year. 10. (a) Area of Alaska, 577,390 square miles, (b) Allentian and Pri- bilof Islands, (c) Spruce and yellow cedar, (d) Sea otter, maten, black bear, silver fox, fur-seal and among fishes the salmon and cod. (e) The Yukon River rises in the Rocky Mountains of British Columbia, flowing northward until it crosses the Alaska boundary when its course turns westward. It has few tributaries and flows into Bering Sea. June 1898. 1. (a) Mathematical Geography treats of the earth in its relation to the solar system; Political Geography in its relations to its countries, their people and governments; and Physical Geography in its relation to nature and the natural laws by which it is governed. (b) See 1. June 1897. 2. (a) An oblate spheroid, flattened at the poles, (b) Polar diam- eter — 7,899.7 miles; mean, 7,917.5 miles; equatorial, 7,926.5 miles, (c) Surface 197,000,000 square miles, volume 260,000,000,000,000 cubic miles; (d) The sun is 1,300,000 times the size of the earth, (e) The sun. 3. (a) An agonic line is an imaginary line passing through those -places where the magnetic needle points to the true north. (b) Isogonic lines are those connecting places having the same decli- nation or variation of the needle. (c) Isoclinal lines are lines connecting places having the same incli- nation or dip of the magnetic needle. (d) Magnetic storras are unusual variations in the earth's magnetism and usually correspond with outbursts of solar activity as manifested by the occurrence of new spots. 124 (e) Mercator's projection — See 3 (a), Sept. '97. 4. (a) Relief is the elevation of the earth above the mean level of the sea. (b) Less than six miles or 1-65 of the earth's radius. (c) See Geography questions 1, Sept. 1902. (d) If the mountains were worn down and the valleys filled up by the materials from them obliterating all elevations and depressions, the sea would surround the globe in an uninterrupted expanse. (e) See 8 (a), Sept. '94. 5. (a) The coral polyp is a minute organism consisting of a kind of double sac having an opening in the centre, and surrounded by filaments possessing a wave-like motion, thus establishing currents which set in toward the "mouth" and supply it with sea-water from which it sepa- rates mineral ingredients for the formation of its "skeleton." These skeletons are not separate since the polyp propagates its species by a budding process. The growth of this coral mass is upward and the surface reached, the waves throw up broken fragments above the level of the sea, soil is formed, and vegetation appears, planted by seeds borne by wind and wave. (b) See 5, Sept. '97. 6. (a) Seismology is the science of earthquakes. (b) See 5 (b), June '97. (c) When earthquakes occur beneath the sea. a series of sea waves may be caused which become fifty to two hundred feet in height, as they approach the shore and cause great destruction of life and property. 7. (a) Waves; cause, friction of the wind, the motion being commu- nicated in all directions, by a series of undulations; heiglit. of storm waves, thirty to fifty feet; velocity, thirty-seven to eighty miles an hour; depth of disturbance of ordinary waves not over half a mile. (b) Tides— See 7, Sept. '94. Solar tide — One produced by the attraction of the sun; lunar, one by the moon, The tide is a tidal wave, in the form of a perpendicular wall of water, so steep and swift that the crest falls forward into the trough. It is seen only in a few estuaries, as in the Bay of Fundy, its formation being due to the peculiar shape, depth and situation of the shore and channel. The maelstrom in the Lopoden Islands is caused by the complete di- vision of the tidal wave by the peculiar shore line, thus forming two currents which meet again, giving rise to a whirlpool. 8. (a) See 7, Sept. '98. and 4, June '96. (b) See S (a), June '97. (c) See 8 (b, c, and d), Oct. '94. 9. (a) See Geography questions, 1 (e), Sept. '99. Vapor is diffused through the air where, as it is only about three- fifths as heavy as air, it remains in suspension. (b) The "dew point" is the point of saturation, or that state of the atmosphere when it contains as much vapor as it is capable of holding. Precipitation takes the form or either hail, dew, rain, snow or frost. See 9, June '97, for conditions under which each takes place. 10. (a) Flora comprises all plant life. The flora of a country is ef- fected by the distribution of moisture, heat and light. (b) Fauna includes all animal life. For animals found in the several life regions see 8. Sept. '97, and Geography question .3, Sept. 1902. Sept. 1898. 1. See 1 (a), June '96. 125 2. (a) 1. Appearance of approaching objects, as of a ship, whose top masts appear first, then the sails and finally the hull. (2) Circular shape of the horizon. (3) Circular shape of the earth's shadow as cast on the moon during an eclipse. (4) Measurement of an arc of a meridian, which has resulted in an accurate calculation of its shape. (5) Shape of the great circle of illumination, (b) See 2 (b), Sept. "J7. 3. (a) See 2 (a), Sept. '94. (b) See 5, June '97. 4. The winds, which carry sand from the deserts and distribute it over fertile plains, or pile it up as dunes and sandhills along the seashore, the action of running water causing a decrease in the mean heights of the continents and an increase in their breadth, by transporting material in solution from the highlands and depositing it as sediment near the mouth of streams; the action of ocean waves, changing the outlines of coasts; the moisture of the atmosphere, which soaks into porous rocks, freezes and rends the rock to fragments, which are transported by stream's or winds; the agency of man, mainly in the destruction of for- ests over extended areas; and the contraction of a cooling crust result- ing in earthquakes, volcanoes and gradual uplifts and subsidences, are all bringing about extensive changes in the crust of the earth. 5. (a) See 2 (c), Sept. '94. (b) Iceland; Yellowstone National Park; Wyoming; and New Zea- land. (c) By causing the rainfall in a river basin to be drained rapidly away instead of soaking quietly iato the ground, thus causing an over- flow from the main channel. G. (a) See (b), Sept. '95. (b) In the South Pacific Ocean. 7. (a) Climate is the condition of the atmosphere as regards heat, cold and moisture. (b) See 4, June '96, and 4 May, '95. 8. (a) See 3 (a), June '97. (b) Cyclones are most severe in the neighborhood of islands and along the shores of continents; are most powerful near their origin; the wind rotates invariably from right to left in the northern hemisphere and from left to right in the southern; its fury decreasing as the cyclone advances. 9. See 10 (a), June '9cS. The flora of the tropical zone — Palms, bananas, spices, aromatic plants and tree-like grasses are most characteristic. Sub-tropical zones — Trees with thick, shining leaves such as laurels, magnolias and myrtles are peculiar forms. Warm temperate zones — Evergreen trees, shrubs, and the vine are most characteristic. Cold temperate zone — Forests of deciduous trees are its characteristic feature. Suh-Arctic zone — Grassy meadows and forests of evergreen, coniferous trees, such as the pine, spruce, hemlock, cedar and fur abound. Polar ^.one — The absence of trees and abundance of mosses and lich- ens mark this zone. 10. (a) North temperate zone, (b) Warm temperate and sub- tropi- cal zones. {c\ 40 deg. F. on the north and 75 deg. F. on the south, (d) See 3, May '95. (e) Zone of variable winds. June 1899. 1. See 1 (a). June '96. 2. See 2 (a), Sept. '98. 12G 3. (a) See 2 (a), Sept. '94. (b) Proofs of the earth's original fluidity are: its spherical shape; the^ fact that the rocks which were first formed give evidence of having, been greatly heated; and the fact that the general climate of the earth during the geological past was much warmer than at present. 4. (a) Facts regarding earthquakes — The origin of the shock is prob- ably never deeper than thirty miles, and often much less; the area of disturbance depends upon depth of origin as well as upon energy of the shock; the shape of origiyi is generally that of a line; the direction of the motion at the surface is nearly upward over the origin, and more inclined as the distance from the origin increases; and the shape of the area of disturbance depends upon the nature of the materials through which the wave is moving. (b) Motions of earthquakes are either wavelike, upward or rotary, (c) Their velocity varies according to the intensity of shock and nature of materials through which it is transmitted, (d) Causes, see 5 (1) June '97. (e) They occur more frequently in winter than in summer, at night than during the day; and during the new and full moon, when the attractive forces of the sun and moon act in harmony, (e) They are most common in volcanic regions and mountainous countries. 5. Formation of atolls and barrier reefs; a blank area of several mil- lion square miles in the middle of cordal regions; submerged forests in deltas. 6. (1) The continents have, in general, high borders and a low inte- rior. (2) The highest border lies near the deepest ocean. (o) The greatest prolongation of a continent is always that of its predominant mountain chain. (4) The prevailing trends of the mountain masses are- the same as those of the coast lines and are, in general, either northeast or northwest. 7. The size of the river basin; the amount of rainfall; the climate of the basin, and its physical features; i. e., whether wooded or open; and the nature of the bed or channel; i. e., whether leaky or not, deter- mine the quantity of water discharged by a river. 8. See 4. June '96. 9. Forests— See 9 (b), Sept. '97. Prairies are found in regions of occasional drought, as in the temper- ate zones, where the rainfall is insufficient to support forests. They are covered with tall grass. steppes are extended areas covered with grass during the wet season, but nearly destitute of vegetation the rest of the year, in regions where the rainfall is periodical. Deserts are due entirely to the absence of rain and moisture. 10. See 6 (b), Sept. '95 and 6 (b), Sept. '98. Sept. 1899. 1. (a) See 2 (b^. Sept. '97. (b) June 21st on the Arctic Circle. At the horizon, south. 2. See 4, Sept. '98. 3. (a) Volcanoes eject mainly, melted rock or lava, ashes or cinders, and vapors or gases, (b) See 5 fa), June '97. (c) They occur (1) along the shores of the Pacific from Cape Horn on the east to the Antarctic continent on the west; (2) in the islands of the Pacific; (8) in the vi- cinity of seas that divide the northern and southern continents; (4) in the islands of the northern and central part of the Atlantic Ocean and (5) in the western and central parts of the Indian Ocean, (d) With few exceptions they are found near the shore of continents or on islands. 127 occur most frequently in mountainous regions, and lie along lines ttiat are comparatively straight. 4. (a) Springs, according to the large or small size of their reservoirs, are either constant or temporary — according to the shape of the reservoir if provided with a siphon-like outlet they are periodical; and according to depth below the surface of the earth, they are divided Into cold and. thermal or hot springs, (b) See 9, May '95. 5. (a) See 3 (a), June '97. (b) Constant winds maintain the same direction throughout the year; periodical winds, for regular periods, blow alternately in opposite direc- tions, and variable winds blow in any direction. 6. (a) Actual humidity of the air, is the amount of vapor actually present in a given volume; relative humidity expresses the relation be- tween the amount present and that required to saturate the air at the given temperature. (b) Rain is caused by the cooling of large masses of air below the temperature of its dew-point and occurs on its undergoing (1) a change of latitude bringing it from a warm to a cold region; a change of alti- tude, as when ascending currents reach the cold upper regions, or on the mingling of masses of cold and warm air. 7. In the eastern continent, the Desert of Mongolia, prevented from receiving rain by the Himalaya Mountains, the Persian Desert due to the high mountain borders which rob the clouds of their moisture be- fore they cross the plateau, and the Sahara, whose winds having pre- viously crossed Asia, arrive dry and vaporless. In the western conti- nent the Great Interior Plateau of North America, is deprived of rain- fall by the mountain borders on both east and west, and in South Amer- ica the Desert of Atacama on the western slope of the Andes, is rain- less because these mountains condense the moisture of the trades on their eastern slopes. 8. (a) See 3 (c), June '97. ^ (b) The earth's rotation, the position of land masses, the winds, and differences of density and level caused by evaporation. 9. (a) For glacier see 4 (b), Sept. '95. Icebergs are floating moun- tains of ice, broken off by the action of the waves, from glaciers extend- ing into the sea. (b) Lateral moraines are accumulations of dirt and stone along the sides of glaciers, medial moraines are those formed at the junction by the meeting edges of glaciers flowing into a common valley, and termi- nal moraines are those accumulations deposited at the end of a glacier, and extend in a wide curve across the valley. 10. The sameness of anatomical structure, similarity of earlier- myths and legends, close resemblance of language of widely separated. races, and the gradual modification of types presented by different races, all point to the probable unity of the human race. June 1900. 1. See 1 (a), June '96. 2. (a) The sidereal year is the time required for the earth to make a complete revolution or oG5 days 6 hours 9 minutes 9.6 seconds. (b) The tropical year is the time from one vernal equinox to the next and is approximately 365 1-4 days. (c) The latter. 3. (a) Laplace's nebular hypothesis assumes that the solar system originally consisted of nebulous matter scattered throughout space and. that this matter began to accumulate about a center and acquired a rot- 128 ary motion whose rapidity increased as the mass cooled. Through the centrifugal force, ring-like portions were thrown off, which collected in spherical masses and formed the planets. In a similar manner, the sa- tellites became detached from the planets, (b) See 2 (b), Sept. '97. 4. Yo^cono— See 2 (b), Sept. '97. Tufa is rock formed by the hardening of volcanic mud. Soffataras occur in volcanic regions and are places where sulphur va- pors escape and from incrustation. Earthquakes — See 5 (b), June '97. Dyke are masses of melted rock which have been forced up from the interior of the earth through fissures in the rocks and often project con- siderably above the general surface. 5. Archaean Time is that time in which appeared the simplest forms of life. Paleozoic Time included the time during which forms of life bore only slight resemblance to those now existing. Mesozoic Time included the time during which the plants and animals began to resemble those now living. Cenozoic Time is the most recent division of geological time. 6. (a) See Geography questions 1 (e), June, 1901. (b) See 5, June '98. T. See 7, Sept. '98 and 4, June '96. 8. (a) Tides are the periodical rising and falling of the water caused by the attraction of the sun and moon. (b) Because of its proximity to the earth. 9^ (a) See 3 (b), June '98. (b) See 3 (c), June '98. (c) Isoclinal lines are lines connecting places having the same incli- nation or dip of the needle while isothermal lines connect places having the same mean temperature. The two correspond in a remarkable de- gree. 10. The temperate fauna include the animals most useful to man. Representative carnivora are, lyon, hyena, wolf, jackal, dog, fox, .rac- coon, bear, seal and walrus. The principal herbivora are the wild boar and hog, the horse, ass, ox, goat, sheep and chamois, the moose, elk, rein- deer, stag, buffalo, camel and llama. Sept. 1900. 1. See 1 (a), June '96. 2. See 2, Sept. '95. 3. (a) See 2 (a), Sept. '94. (b) See 5, June '97. 4. See 4, Sept. '98. 5. See 3 (a), June '97, and 5 (b), Sept. '99. 6. See 4, June 1899, and 4 (b), June '97. 7. See 7, June '99. 8. See 8, Sept. '97. 9. See 9, June '99. 9. See 9, June '99. 10. See 10, Sept. '98. June 1901. 1. (a) Stars are self-luminous heavenly bodies; planets are heavenly bodies which move around the" sun and shine by reflecting its light. (b) See 1, Sept. 1901. 2. Rotation, which is the movement of the earth from west to east, on an imaginary diameter called its axis, taking place once In twenty-four 128 hours; and revolution, the orbital motion of the earth around the sun, once a year. For effects of each movement, see 2, Sept. '97. 3. See 5, June '97. 4. See 5, June '98. 5. See 9, May '95, and 4 (b), Sept. '99. 6. See 7, Sept. '98 and 4, June, '96. 7. (a) Warm moist air which becomes easily chilled below the point of saturation and clear, still nights are favorable to the formation of heavy dews. (bj See (a), June '96. 8. See 9 (b), Sept. '978. 9. See 10 (b), June '98. 10. (a) Phosphate, kaolin and lime, (b) Cotton, sugar-cane, corn, tobacco, Tice, early vegetables, such as tomatoes, cabbage, cucumbers, let- tuce and Irish potatoes, which are grown for northern markets, and fruits as oranges, lemons and pine-apples of commercial importance to Florida. (c) Yellow pine, water-oak, cedar, red bay, hickory, live oak, cypress, satin-wood, and magnolia trees furnish valuable woods, and palmetto pro- duces a useful fibre. Sept. 3, 1901. 1. The sun, eight planets and their satellites, between two and three hundred smaller bodies called planetoids, together with numerous com- ets and meteors comprise the Solar System. The planets are Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune, and all have two movements — rotation on their axes from west to eastj and revolution, an orbital motion around the sun. 2. See 2 (a), June '01, and 2, Sept. '97. 3. See 3 (c), Sept. '99. 4. (a) See 5, June '98. (b) Coral islands can be formed only in tropical waters whose depth is little over 100 feet, and which are pro- tected from cold ocean-currents, from contact with fresh river waters, muddy bottoms^ and remote from volcanoes whose action kills the coral polyp. 5. Erosion or the wearing away of the land; transportation, the car- rying in solution or by the force of its current, eroded material and de- posit, by which this material is left at different parts of its course or at its mouth, forming sand-bars or deltas. 6. (a) See Geography questions 1 (b), Sept. 1900. (b) Salt marshes are grass lands along the coast, subject to overflow by salt water. 7. See 6, Sept. '95. 8. (a) See 9 (c), June 1900. (b) The isotherm of 30 deg. crosses the 60th parallel on the western coast of Alaska, where the warm Aleutian Current causes it to curve upward until its course is modified by cold winds of the interior, caus- ing it to dip downward until in the vicinity of Hudson Bay it touches the 52nd parallel. The cold Greenland current keeps it in nearly this latitude as it crosses Labrador, after which the temperature is modified by the Atlantic and as Europe is approached by the Gulf Stream and it veers far to the northward, reaching its limit north of the Scandinavian peninsula, at about 75 deg. N. latitude. It then falls, crossing the Arctic circle above Archangel and reaching its southern limit just north of China (at about 49 deg. N. lat), this deflection being caused by the great mass of the Eurasian continent. As it reaches the Pacific it swerves again to the north until off Alaska it reaches 60 deg. 9. (a) See 5 (b), Sept. '99. (b) See 9 (d), Sept. '95. The monsoon regions are the Indian Ocean, the Gulf of Guinea and the Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean Sea. , 129 10. (a) The Caucasian race is charactei'ized by a round or oval head, symmetrical features, vertical teeth, round or oval face and arched fore- head, the Mongolian by a broad head, angular face, high cheek bones, and small, obliquely set eyes; the Negro by narrow and elongated head, projecting jaws and thick lips. (bj See S (b), Sept. 't)7. Nov. 1901. 1. See 1, June 1901. 2. See 2, May '95. 3. See 4, May '95. 4. See 6 (b), Sept. '99. 5. See 8, June 1900. 6. See 5, June '99. 7. See 5, Sept. '97. 8. See 9, Sept. '97. 9. See 8, Sept. 1901. 10. (a) See 1, June '98. (b) See 1, June '97. June, 1902. 1. See 2 (b), Sept. '97. 2. (a) The atmosphere serves to retain and modify the heat of the sun; it absorbs and distributes moisture, and supplies animals with oxy- gen and plants with carbonic acid. (b) See 9 (c), June 1900. (c) Cirrus clouds are fleecy masses of condensed vapor suspended high in the atmosphere. Cumulus clouds consist of rounded masses of con- densed vapor, found in the lower regions of the atmosphere. Nimhus or storm clouds are any clouds from which rain falls and may be formed by a collection of the various other forms of cloud. Stratus or layer clouds form in long, horizontal sheets or bands. They form close to the earth and may fall to the surface and become a fog. 3. (a) Winds Avhich blow in a counter direction to that of the trades, in the zones of prevailing westerly winds north and south of 30 deg. from the equator in the northern and southern hemispheres respectively. (b) See 8 (b), Oct. '94. (c) See 9 (d), Sept. '95. (d) Tvi^ilight is caused by the reflection of light from the upper re- gions of the atmosphere after the sun has disappeared below the hori- zon. (e) Thunder is the crackle of the lightning sparks, the sound being prolonged by being' reflected or echoed from the surface of clouds, the earth, and masses of air of unequal density. 4. (a) The oceans, in order of their size, are the Pacific, Atlantic, Indian, Arctic and Antarctic. The Pacific Ocean is the deepest, the At- lantic next, then the Indian, the Antarctic and Arctic. (b) Broad and extensive rises in the bed of the ocean. 5. (a) See 10, Sept. '94. See 7, Sept. '94. 6. For mountains of North and South America, See 21, June 1900 (Geography questions). The predominant mountain system of Europe extends from the Straits of Gibraltar, along the northern shores of the Mediterranean to Asia Minor. The Alps form its highest point. The secondary mountain systems of Europe comprise the ranges of the Scan- dinavian peninsula, the Ural Mountains separating Europe from Asia, on the west, and the Caucasus Mountains on the south. In Asia, the mountains really form one vast system extending in the line of the northeast trend from the Arctic to the Indian Ocean. The Himalaya, the highest mountains in the world, lie north of Hindoostan. 130 North of them are the Kuenlum Mountains, with the Karaliorum between them. The principal mountain system of Africa extends the entire length of the eastern shore from the Mediterranean sea to the Cape of Good Hope. Other mountains are the Kong along the northern shores of the Gulf of Guinea and the Atlas in the extreme north. The predominant system of Australia lies in the east, the Australian Alps forming the highest point. 7. (a) See 5 (b), June '97. (b) See 3 (c), Sept. '99. (c) Martinique. 8. See 7, June '90. 9. See 9 (a), Sept. '94. 10. Extensive and fertile land areas in a temperate climate favor the development of civilization. In Europe, Western and Central Asia and North America except in the northern and southern extremities. Sept. 1902. 1. (a) A great circle is one formed on the earth's surface by a plane passing through the centre and dividing it into hemispheres. (b) Meridian — See Geography questions 1 (c), June '96. (c) Tropics — See Geography questions 2 (a), Sept. '96. (d) Mercator's Projection — See 3 (a), Sept. '97. (e) By parallelism of the earth's axis is meant that since the axis points always to the north star, it is always parallel to any former posi- tion. 2. See 2, Sept. '94. 3. See 4, Sept. '98. 4. (a) See 5 (a). Set. '94. ''b) The short, steep slope on the ocean side of the mountain systems and the long, gentle slope facing the interior; the metamorphosis of the strata on the steep slope; the situation of mountain systems on the bor- der of the continents, and the slaty cleavage of the rocks of many moun- tains. 6. (a) See 3 (c), June '97. (b) The rotation of the earth from west to east causes the polar wa- ters to reach the equatorial regions with an eastward motion less than that with which they started, and they cross the ocean from east to west. On their reaching the western borders of the oceans, the conti- nents divide them into north and south branches and they move toward the poles. They now move faster than that portion of the earth from whence they start and are deflected to the northeastward and southeast- ward respectively. 7. See 5, May '95. 8. See 9 (5), June '99. 9. LeConte's theory is that once the southern coast line of Florida was much farther north than the present, one which was then a coral reef. Upon this reef, coral islands formed and the channel between them and the, shore gradually filled up and formed the Everglades. Meanwhile another reef formed which became in time the present keys. 10. See 3, May '95. CIVIL GOVERNMENT. Sept. '94. 1. To inspire patriotism, obedience to just authority and loyalty to civic duties — in short, to give us better citizens. 2. The law making power of a State is vested in the legislature, com- posed of two bodies, called respectively the Senate and the House of Representatives. 131 Bill must pass House in which It originated, pass other House, haye- approval and signature of chief executive or pass both Houses again over his veto. 3. Legislation is more conservative. Each branch acts as a check, upon the other. Prevents legislative department from encroaching on the executive and serves as a check upon hasty and inconsiderate legis- lation. 4. Must pass both Houses again by a two-third vote. 5. (a) Clerk — Clerk of circuit court, clerk of board of county com- missioners, recorder of deeds and all conveyances of lands, custodian of records, issues, processes on state judgments, disburses all moneys a pay to jurors, and witness in state cases, etc. Must give bond not less than. $1,000 nor more than $5,000. Must be a citizen of the county and not an attorney at law. (b) County Judge — Records wills, letters testamentary, and of admin- istration, issues commissions to administer oaths, requires bond from ad- ministrators, issues and keeps record of marriage licenses, has general jurisdiction in matters of wills and estates, appoints and has jurisdiction: of guardians of infants, requires accounts of executors, administrators, and guardians filed in his office, jurisdiction up to $500, also in forcible entry and unlawful detention of lands, attachments, garnishments, re- plevin, enforcement of liens, original jurisdiction in criminal cases, de- termines appeals on writs of error from justice of peace courts, probate matters, etc. Must be a citizen and give bond not less than $1,000 nor more than $5,000, to be determined by board of county commissioners. (c) Sheriff — Executes processes, preserves the peace, ex-officio timber agent, serves writs, must in person or by deputy attend every term of circuit, county and county criminal court of his county, keep an execu- tive docket, etc. Must be a citizen of county, not an attorney at law, and' give bond with two sureties. 6. Must secure teacher's certificate in accordance with the law. and. contract with county board. 7. Must labor faithfully for advancement of pupils in their studies, deportment and morals, strive to cultivate in them good habits, protect school property, maintain discipline, and in all things, conform to the- regulations of the department. 8. See 9. June '99. 9. Legislative, executive and judicial. (a) County Commissioners. (b) Sheriff, constables, deputy sheriffs. (c) Justices of peace and county judge. 10. (a) Must submit final report, and records to county superintend- ent. (b) Must report annually to State Superintendent of Public Instruction. (c) The county school board, having entire control of county school fund, apportions same among schools according to their judgment. (d) County board of public instruction. Application to this body. (e) The vacancy would be filled by the Governor, as are all other va- cancies under the Constitution of the State. Oct. 1894. 1. See 3 (a). Sept '94. Chosen for different periods in order to make more gradual the change- in the composition of the legislature. The representation in the Senate was made equal as a concession to- the spirit of sovereignty in the State. 2. All powers not granted to the general government, nor prohibited by it to the States. 132 3. (a) A law relating to the punishment of acts committed before the law was passed. (b) An act of a legislative body inflicting the penalty of death without a regular trial. (c) An official document requiring an accused person who has been imprisoned awaiting trial to be brought before a judge to inquire whether he may be legally held. (d) "No bill of attainder or ex post facto law shall be passed." (e) "The privilege of the writ of habeas corpus shall not be suspended unless when in cases of rebellion or invasion, the public safety may re- quire it." "The right of the people to^keep and bear arms shall not be infringed." 4. (a) See 3 (b), Sept. '94. (b) To protect legislative department against abuse of power on the part of executive. Balance would be destroyed. (5) All bills providing for taxation must originate in the House of Representatives because the members of this branch are elected by the direct vote of the people, and hence are supposed to represent the peo- ple's views. G. Nominated by President, subject to confirmation of Senate. Ten- ui'e of office is for life, unless impeached. 7. Chosen by qualified electors of State; number six; term^ six years. 8. Seven grades, viz : Third grade, second grade, first grade, primary, special. State and life certificates. For requirements and conditions, see "An Act to Provide for the Certification of Teachers, and to Prescribe Requirements for the Various Grades of Certificates," in school laws passed this year — 1903. 9. Each county is required to assess and collect annually for the sup- port of public free schools therein a tax of not less than three mills nor more than five mills on the dollar on all taxable property in the same. County school fund consists, in addition to above provision, of the pro- portion of the interest of the State School Fund and of the one mill State tax apportioned to the county; all capitation taxes collected within the county; and shall be disbursed solely for maintenance and support of public free schools. 10. All State School Funds are distributed from State Treasurer's of- fice. Apportioned among the several counties of the State in proportion to the average attendance upon schools in the said counties respectively. May 1895. 1. (a) Any citizen born in the United States, thirty-five years of age, and fourteen years a resident is eligible. (b) No person shall be a senator who shall not have attained to the age of thirty years, and been nine years a citizen of the United States, and who shall not, when elected, be an inhabitant of that State for which he shall be chosen. (c) Must have attained to age of twenty-five years, been a citizen of United States seven years, and an inhabitant of that State in which he shall be chosen. 2. (a) Two-thirds, or nine. (b) Must be ratified by the legislatures of three-fourths of the States •or by convention in three-fourths thereof. (c) Yes. 3. (a) The Senate would elect from the two candidates receiving the highest number of votes for Vice-President. (b) Yes. In 1836 Senate chose Richard M. Johnson, of Kentucky, by a vote of 33 to It', over Francis Granger of New York. Only instance. 4. (a) Treason against United States consists only in levying war against them, adhering to their enemies, giving them aid and comfort. 133 (b.) Punishable by death. 5. See 4, Sept. '99. 6. (a) See Constitution, Art. I., Sec. 9. (b) See Constitution, Art. I, Sec. 10. 7. Governor's term of office is four years; salary $3,500 per annum. Each of the following, four years and $2,500 per annum; State Comptrol- ler, Treasurer, Attorney-General, Superintendent of Public Instruction, Commissioner of Agriculture, three Railroad Commissioners; Supreme Court Justices, six years, $3,000 per annum; Circuit Judges, six years, $2,500 per annum. 8. Amendment proposed by either branch of legislature, agreed to by three-fifths of all members elected to each house, entered upon their re- spective journals, published in one nevi^spaper in each county three months previous to general election, at w^hich election amendment must be submitted to the electors of the State for approval or rejection. Ma- jority of electors voting upon amendment adopts. Each amendment voted on separately. (a) Granted privilege of a free market in the United States to those countries alone which were willing to reciprocate by granting in their markets exceptionally favorable rates of entry for American products. 9. (b) See 9, June, '99. 10. (a) See 10, Oct. '94. ] (b) 6 — 21. (c) If the holder proves to be unsuccessful, incompetent, or is proven guilty of gross immorality. (d) If question merely involves educational judgment appeal should be made to State Board of Education. If a question of law, redress secured in the courts. (e) See United States History, 1st Grade, June 1900, question 10. Sept. 1895. 1. See 1, Sept. 1894. 2. (a) "Government is defined as rule or control. In its political sense, it means the supreme authority of a State or other political community or the act by which the authority is applied." 2. (a) Without some sort of government, there would be continual warfare, no security to life, liberty or property; each one could look ta himself alone for safety; the weak would have no protection, for the strong would know no restraint. (c) See 5, June '99. 3. (a) "Every citizen has the right to be secure in his person, to De free from attack and annoyance; to go when and 'Adhere he may choose; to keep, enjoy and dispose of his property; and to provide in his own "way for the welfare of himself and of those dependent upon him. But for every right a citizen has a corresponding duty : It is his duty tO' obey the law, to aid in securing justice, to respect authority, to love his country, to study the interests of his country, to take part in elec- tions and vote for men and measures that will best promote the general welfare." (b) To secure and protect their rights. 4. (a) "The Constitution is a written instrument — the supreme law of the whole land. Neither the laws of the States nor of the United States must conflict with it. It is the basis of our government, and the model of State constitutions. Defines limits of national government, enumerates powers of each department, declares what public interests are within th« scope of the national government, reserves certain powers to> the States and provides that neither State nor nation shall enact certain specified laws." 134 (b) See History, 5, Sept. '97. 2 (c), Sept. '98, and 2^ June '99, First Grade. 5. Constituent functions : Protection of life, liberty and property, to- gether with all other functions that are necessary to the civic organization of society. Ministrant functions : Those other functions — such as regulation of la- bor, trade and industry, maintenance of thoroughfares, education posts, etc. — which are undertaken not by way of governing, but by way of ad- vancing the general interests of society. 6. Impeachment is a mode of trial of a public officer charged with wrongdoing. House must first pass bill of impeachment. The Senate then sits as a court to try the offender. If a President is on trial, the Chief Justice must preside over Senate. Two-thirds vote of Senate nec- essary to convict. See 5, June '97. 7. Divisions of power: Legislative, judicial and executive. Must be a qualified elector, must have been ten years a citizen and resident of Florida, next preceding time of his election. Commander-in-chief of military forces, transacts executive business, civil and military, may require information from executive officers relative to their respective departments, see that the laws are faithfully executed, power to fill vacated offices for unexpired term, can convene legislature in extraordinary session, send message to each session of legislature giving information as to condition of State and recommending measures for consideration, in case of disagreement as to time of adjournment between the two branches of legislature, may adjourn to such time as he thinks proper, may suspend collection of fines and forfeitures, grant reprieves, require opinion of Supreme Court Justices, may remove officers for cause, shall appoint commissioned officers of State militia, chairman of board of^ commissioners of State institutions, may approve or disapprove of any portion or the whole of a bill passed by the legislature, sign warrants for disbursement of State funds, member State Board of Education. 8. Secretary of State : Keeper of records of official acts of legislative and executive departments — must lay same before respective departments when requested — custodian of great seal, has charge of capitol building. State librarian, member of State Board of Education, issues letters pat- ent for corporations, etc. Attorney-General : Legal adviser of Governor and of each of the offi- cers of the executive department, reporter for Supreme Court decisions, member State Board of Education. Comptroller : Examines, audits, adjusts and settles the accounts of all officers of the State, issues warrants for State moneys. Treasurer : Receives and keeps all bonds, funds and other securities but disburses no funds except upon warrant signed by Comptroller and countersigned by Governor, member State Board of Education. Superintendent of Public Instruction : See 9, June '96. Commissioner of Agriculture : Has charge of public lands, matters re- lating to agriculture, bureau of immigration, etc. (The Governor, Justices of the Supreme Court, and Attorney-General constitute State Board of Pardons.) 9. See United States History, Second Grade, June, 1900. 0. (a) By convention; also by vote of electors. See 8, May '95. (b) Interest on State School Fund and all other means provided, in- cluding special tax for support and maintenance of public free schools, to be proportioned among counties in proportion to average attendance. Citizens of United States, twenty-one years old, having resided in Flor- ida one j-ear and county six months, can vote. I - 135 a June '96. 1. (a) See 4, Sept. '99. (b) By naturalization. See 9, Sept. 1898. 2. (a) By electors chosen by the people. See Amendments to Consti- tution, Art. XII, Clause 1. Term of office, 4 years. (b) By State legislature. Six years. (c) By direct vote of people. Term, 2 years. (d) By Presidential appointment. Senate confirms. Term, 4 years. (e) By Presidential appointment. Senate confirms. During good be- havior. 3. (a) See 4, Sept. 1895. (b) Constitution was framed by a convention of delegates from twelve of the thirteen original States, Rhode Island alone being unrepresented. (c) Was adopted by ratification of all the States. Ratification of two- thirds — or nine — was required for adoption. (d) See 2, May '95. 4. (a) See 3, Sept. 1900. (b) The legislative authority is vested in Congress, consisting of a Sen- ate or upper House, and a House of Representatives or lower House. The senators represent the States, the representatives, the people. One-third of Senate is elected every two yars. (c) See 7, June 1900. 5. See 1, May '95. Foreign born citizen might favor interests of his native country to the detriment of the United States. Might not be in absolute accord with our form of government. 6. See 8, Sept. '94. 7. See 4, May '95. Originally a freebooter. Term now applied to one who delays legisla- tion by dilatory motions or similar artifices. 8. (a) Territories are governed by the laws of Congress, by the com- mon law, and the laws passed by the territorial legislatures. (b) See 3, Sept. '99. (c) The office of governor becomes elective. Laws passed by legislature are no longer submitted to congress for approval. Is given representation in Congress on basis of population, instead of delegate or agent without the right to vote. Office of chief justice and associates becomes elective. People acquire a voice in election of President and affairs of the United States gov^x-nment. 9. Governor— See S, Sept. '96. Superintendent of Public Instruction : Has oversight, charge and man- agement of all matters pertaining to public schools. Apportions school moneys, decides upon appeals, prescribes regulations for management of his department, prepares questions for county examinations. County Superintendent of Public Instruction : Visits and examines each school, looks after school funds, holds examinations, and issues cer- tificates. Couiity Board : Employs teachers, disburses school funds, prescribes •course of study. School Trustee : Nominates teachers, apportions district funds, pre- pares itemized estimate showing money necessary to be raised to supple- ment county school funds. Supervisor : Supervises school and makes monthly reports to County Superintendent, supervises school property, reviews suspension of pupils and reports same to county superintendent. Public School Teacher: See 7, Sept. 1894. 136 10. (a) See 9, Sept. '96. (b) The proceeds of all lands that have been or may hereafter be •granted to the State by the United States for public school purposes. Donations to the State when the purpose is not specified. Proceeds of ■•escheated property. Twenty-five per cent, of the sales of public lands which are now or may hereafter be owned by the State. (c) The interest on the common school fund^ and the fund raised by the one mill tax authorized by the Constitution, are apportioned by the State among the several counties in proportion to the average attendance upon schools in said counties. (d) Bach county is required by Constitution to assess and collect an- nually for the support of public free schools therein a tax of not less than three mills nor more than five mills on the dollar on all taxable .property in the same. County fund consists, in addition to this tax, of county's proportion of the ii.ierest on common school fund and the one mill tax apportioned to ■the county; also all capitation taxes collected within the county. (ej See 10 (c), Sept. '94. Sept. 1896. 1. See 2 (a), Sept. '95. See 3, June, 1900. 2. (a) See 2, June '96. (b) The presiding officer of the House of Representatives is called the Speaker. He is a member of the House and is nominated for the speak- ership by a convention or caucus of the representatives who are of his political party. (c) Presiding officer of the Senate is called President of the Senate. ■Office is filled by Vice-President of the United States (for mode of elec- tion, see Amendments to Constitution Art. XII.) Senate also elects pres- ident pro tern. 3. (a) At present (1903), one member to 191,182 population. Apportionment based on census of 1900. (b) See 5, Oct. 1894. 4. See Constitution, Art. I, Section 8 and 9 respectively. 5. See Amendments to Constitution, Art. XII, Clause I. 6. See 6 (a), Sept. '95. The House of Representatives has the sole power of impeachment. Tried by Senate. Judgment cannot extend further than to removal from office, and disqualification to hoM and enjoy any office of honor, trust or jirofit under the United States. Party convicted shall nevertheless be liable and subject to indictment, trial, judgment and punishment accord- ing to law. The Vice-President presides in case a Senator is being tried. 7. See 5, Sept. 1900. 8. (a) In the legislature, consisting of Senate and House of Represen- tatives. (bj The supreme executive power is vested in the Governor. (c) Governor has veto power. (d) Not eligible for two successive terms. Is eligible, however, after lapse of one term. 9. The Governor, Secretary of State, Attorney-General, State Treasu- rer, and State Superintendent of Public Instruction constitute State Board of Education of which the Governor is President and the Super- intendent of Public Instruction Secretary. 10. See 8, Oct. '94. 137 June '97. 2. See 3, June 1900. 3. (a) The Electoral College. (b) The people. Five, at present (1903). (c) See 1, May 1895. 4. (a) See 1, May 1895. (b) A joint session is one in whi;ch members of both branches of Con- gress meet as one body. An executive session is one where, practically, the administrative body acts as a committee of the whole. Business is sometimes expedited by this method owing to the fact that it is then governed by different rules. (c) By the legislature of his State. (d) That election may be by direct vote of the people. Change may be secured by constitutional amendment. (e) See 4, Sept. 1900. If State legislature meets and elects before next session of Congress. 5. (a) See 6, Sept. 1895. (b) Charges affecting official conduct of civil officer of the United States are formulated and presented to Senate by House of Representatives. (Corresponds to indictment by grand jury.) The Senate then sits as a court of impeachment, hears the evidence, listens to the argument and then condemns or acquits. (See 6, Sept. '96.) 6. (a) A 'patent is a grant by a government to the author of a new and useful invention, the exclusive right of exploiting same a specified term of -years. b) A copyright is an exclusive privilege given to any citizen or resi- dent of the United States to print, publish and sell any book, map, chart, dramatic or musical composition of which he is the author or proprietor. (c) Felony is the highest of the principal classes into which crimes are divided by statute. (d) Piracy is depredation or willful and aggressive destruction of life or property by persons having no commission or authority from any es- tablished State. (e) See 7, June '96. (f) A person born in or belonging to another country who has not been naturalized, (g) An alien who has been re- ceived into the condition and invested with the rights and privileges of a natural citizen, (h) A document issued by competent civil authority granting one permissin to travel or authentieating his right to protection. . (i) Merchandise brought from one country into another, (j) See History 4, Oct. '94. 7. (a) A State is a member of the Union with all the rights and priv- ileges of self-government; a Territory is under the Union, subject at all times, and in all things, to regulation by the Government of the United States. (b) See 8, Sept. '95. 8. (a) Senate 32; Lower House, 68. (b) Regular sesion, 60 days; special, 20. Six dollars per diem; mil- eage, ten cents, to and from homes to seat of government. (c) See 2, Sept. '94. 9. See 3, October '94 and 7, June '96. Gerrymander : A term of reproach for those who change boundaries of districts for partisan purposes. 10. (a) County Boards of Public Instruction. (b) Same authority. Contract is necessary. (c) All qualified voters residing within the territory that pay a tax on real or personal property are entitled to vote in sub-district election. There are no school elections except for voting sub-district taxes and 138 electing trustees for the sub-district funds. The other school officers are elected in the regular election, (d) See 10, June 'UG. (f) No. (g) Between ages of six and twenty-one. (h) Pupils from other States, or from other counties. Teacher must turn over tuition to County Superintendent. Tuition fees to be reported hy latter to County Board. (i) Not less than five nor more than six hours exclusive of recesses. Twenty-days constitute a school month. Board has no right to demand greater number for a month's salary. (j) Monthly report must be filed with county superintendent. Salary is withheld until report is made. Likewise, if incomplete or incorrect, until report is made in full, or corrected. Sept. 1897. 1. See 2, Sept. 1895. 2. See 8, Sept. '99. 3. (a) In 1215, King John having incurred the hatred of his subjects, was met by his great lords in arms at Runnymede, on the Thames River, and compelled to sign a document which contained a summary of all the rights, privileges and immunities which were then reckoned as belonging to Englishmen. This document is known as Magna Gharta. (b) How taxes shall originate and in whom lies the right to levy them. 4. (a) By the supreme law of the United States is meant the Consti- tution. It is the fundamental law with which neither the laws of any State nor the laws of the United States must conflict — the basis of our system of government. (b) For legislative, see 4, June '96 and 4, Sept. 1900. The executive power of the national government is vested in the Pres- ident of the United States. : See 2, June '96, and 1, May, '95. For judicial department, see 7, Sept. 1899. The Supreme Court of the United States is the highest judicial tribunal in the country. Consists tof the Chief Justice and eight associate justices, nominated by the Presi- dent and confirmed by the Senate. Hold office for life unless impeached. 5. (a) See 10, Set. '99. (b) See 10, Sept. '99. (c) Convention system removes choice from the people and allows more "wire-working." If, however, members of convention are the proper men, they are better able to select a good man than are the people as a whole. (d) The national convention. 6. (a) A State is a community of free citizens living within a terri- tory with fixed limits, governed by laws based upon a constitution of their own adoption, and possessing all governmental powers not granted to the United States. (b) Legislative, executive and judicial. (c) See 7, June '97. (e) See 3, Sept. '99. 7. (a) See 1 (a), Oct. '94. (b) See 2, June '96. (c) See 1, May '95. (d) See 4, Sept. 1900. 8. Department of State, Treasury Department, War, Navy, Post-office, Interior, Justice, Agriculture, Commerce. 9. (a) To prevent bribery and intimidation. The two essential features of the system are : 139 First — An arrangement of polling, by which compulsory secrecy of vot- ing is secured, and intimidation or corruption of voters is prevented. Second — One or more official ballots, printed and distributed under au- thority, on which names of all candidates are found. 10. (a) Courts have never decided a case on this point, hence an open question. Term has been applied, however, not only to parents and guardians of school children, but to other resident tax payers, as well. (b) The county school board. (c) See 9, June '96. (d) County School Board. (e) Constitution provides that a special tax of one mill on the dollar of all taxable property in the State, in addition to the other means pro- vided, shall be levied and apportioned annually among the several coun- ties of the State in proportion to the annual attendance upon schools in said counties, for the support and maintenance of public free schools. Forms a part of State School Fund. June 1898. 1. (a) Virginia. (b) Sept. 1786. Annapolis. (c) Because only five States were represented. (d) May 14, 1787, at Philadelphia. (e) Some of the delegates delayed in arriving, hence delay in organi- zation. George Washington was elected President of convention. Session lasted four months. 2. (a) Nine. (b) Eleven. (c) First Wednesday in January, 1789. ) The right of enjoying privileges and immunities of citizens of the- several States. 5. (a) On the basis of population. Present ratio based on census ot 1900, one member to 194,182 population. (190«). (b) 386 (1903). (,c) Term of office two years. Salary, $5,000. (d) See 5, Oct. '94. 6. (a) If no person receives a majority of all the electoral votes, (b) See 4 (b), June 1902. 7. (a) "The Supreme Court of the U. S., the circuit courts of appeals,, circuit courts, district courts, the supreme court of District of Columbia,- the court of claims, a territorial court for each of the Territories, and. several commissioner's courts in each of the States." (1) All cases arising under laws passed by congress. (2) Those affecting ministers, consuls and other agents of the United States and foreign countries. (3) Suits arising on the high seas. (4) All suits to which the United States is a party. (5) Controversies between a State and the citizens of another State. (6) Cases between citizens of different States. (7) Suits betwen citizens of the same State claiming lands under grants- by different States. (8) Cases betwen a State or its citizens and a foreign State or its citi- zens. 8. Civil rights are chiefly those rights with which we are endowed by nature; as, the right to personal security, the right of personal liberty and the right of private property. By industrial rights is meant the right of each person to provide in his own way, providing it is legal and honest, for himself and those depend- ent upon him. Each member of society has rights as such, and these are- called social rights. They include rights of personal security and pro- tection. . 9. (a) Laws exist for the purpose of securing the rights of the peo- ple. ■ : ■ • i! 145 (b) Liberty is the enjoyment of rights. (c) Moral, common, civil, statute, international, criminal, parliamen- tary, martial, maritime, and commercial. 10. (a) Parties usualy grow out of questions of legislation and are formed to influence the passage of laws rather than their execution or their application by the courts. Parties serve as a check upon one another, as the party in power is responsible for the public policy of the country. (b) The towsnhip holds a convention and sends delegates to the county convention. The county convention sends delegates to the State conven- tion. The latter, as a body, selects four, representing the two United States Senators, and the members of the convention from each congres- sional district select two, representing the lower house of Congress. For each delegate, an alternate delegate is selected. June 1900. 1. See 1, Sept. '94. 2. The necessity of government should be conveyed to mind of child by illustrations from life in school and home. 3. Legislative, executive and judicial. "If the same officers could make the law, enforce the law, and explain the law, there would be no limit to their authority and therefore no se- curity to the people." An abuse of power would inevitably result. 4. (a) Members of the House of Representatives are chosen by direct vote of the people. Senators are elected by the legislature, (b) See 5, Oct. 1894. 5. (a) A tax is a portion of private property taken for public purposes. (b) The United States must pay its debts just as a corporation or in- dividual must. If by reason of war or other occurrence, money is re- quired beyond the contents of the treasury, of course it must be bor- rowed. This is accomplished by issuing bonds. (c) The government cannot lend money to individuals. 6. Letters granted by the government to private citizens in time of war, authorizing them, under certain conditions, to capture the enemy's ships. 7. A Mil is a formal writing presented to the legislature for enact- ment. Te become a law the concurrence of both Houses is necessary, and approval of President. Can be passed again, however, by a two-thirds vote. Bill is introduced by asking leave of body to bring measure before it. It is usual then to refer it to a committee for careful consideration. Committee reports it to the body. If important, discussed by members of the body. Passage in house where it originated. Transmission to other house for action. Passage. President's signature. 8. See 3, Oct. '94. It may be suspended in times of rebellion or invasion, for public safety. 9. Delegates representing the States or congressional districts as- sembled in convention and nominate by ballot. Generally the delegation from a State votes as the majority inclines, but not always. 10. See 12th Amendment to Constitution. Sept. 1900. 1. The Articles of Confederation proved unsatisfactory. The Confed- eration had the power of incurring debts, but no power of paying them, for each State was left independent in the matter of taxes; no power to 146 make general laws Dor regulating commerce. (See 7, Sept. '98.) After muctL discussion and planning, each State was requested to send dele- gates to a convention to revise Articles of Confederation. In place of mending the old Constitution, it was decided that a new Constitution should be formed, so faulty were found the Articles of Confederation. See 1, June '98, and 1, Sept. 1901. 2. (a) First Congress proposed twelve amendments, of which ten were adopted. (b) Two after that date to 1860. (c) Three adopted subsequent to 1860, relating to abolition of slavery and the establishment of negro suffrage. 3. (a) Legislative, executive and judicial. Sets forth purposes for which Constitution was adopted. During the period following Declaration of Independence, the union between the States was weak and unsatisfactory. Instead of justice and tranquility, the States were constantly quarreling. There was no power to provide for common defense. No provision could be made for the general welfare by the passage and enforcement of broad measures for the whole country. Under the Articles of Confederation, the true blessings of liberty had not been enjoyed. 4. (a, b) Congress, consisting of a Senate and a House of Represen- tatives. (c) See 2, June '96. (d) See 1, May '95. A vacancy in a State's representation in the lower house of Congress is filled by special election called by the Governor for that purpose. If vacancy in Senate occurs, when the legislature is not in session, it is filled by appointment by the Governor of the State until legislature meets again and fills vacancy by election. 5. (a) See 7, June 1900. (b) A bill becomes a law when it is signed by the President or is passed by a two-thirds vote of each house over his veto, or has been kept by him ten working days while Congress is in session. 6. See Constitution, Art. I., Sec. 9. 7. See Constitution, Art. I., Sec. 10. 8. Distribution of powers of government into three departments : Legislative power vested in two houses; same mode of making laws. Executive power vested in chief executive. Judicial systems analogous. 9. (a) See 4, June '99. (b) See 2, Sept. '94 and 8, June '99. 10. Public lands and taxation most usual sources. The young must be equipped for the duties and responsibilities of citizenship. June, 1901. 1. (a) See 1, Sept. 1900. (b) See 4, Sept. '97. 2. (a) See 1, May. '95. (b) See 4, June 1902. (3) See 1, Oct. '94; 1, May '95; 2, June '96, and 8, June '98. 4. (a) Required by the Constitution. (b) Every ten years. (c) Gives State an additional Representative. 5. Constitutional Convention or method, described in answer to question 8. May. '95. 6. See 9, Sept. '97. 7. (a) See 4, May '95. (b, c, d) See 3, Oct. '94 and 6, June 1900. 8. State legislatures possess only the law-making powers not given to 147 Congress. Laws passed by them must not be in conflict witli the United Stat'es Constitution. State Constitutions also impose certain limita- tions. 9. (a) State: State Board of Education, State Supt. of Public In- struction. County : County School Board, County Superintendent of Public In'- struction. District : Supervisors and Trustees, (b) See 9, June '96 and 10, Sept. 1902. 10. (a) The President, (b) The Governor. Sept. 1901. 1. In compliance with recommendations of Congress, delegates were chosen in the several States for the purpose of revising the Articles of Confederation. Convention numbering fifty-five members met in Phila- delphia, May 14, 1787. Every State represented except Rhode Island. Entirely new Constitution was prepared, was adopted and signed by all members present Sept. 17, 1787. First transmitted to Congress, then sent to the several legislatures and submitted to convention of delegates chosen in each State by the people thereof. By the end of July, 1788, all the States except Rhode Island and North Carolina had ratified. On Sept. 13, 1788, Congress set March 4, 1789, as the day when the new government should go into operation. 2. See Constitution, Art. I., Sections 8 and 9. 3. The Supreme Court has original jurisdiction in all cases affecting foreign ministers, consuls, and other agents of the United States and foreign countries, and cases in which a State is a party. Hears cases of appeal from the inferior Courts of the United States, involving chiefly questions of jurisdiction of inferior courts, constitu- tionality of laws, validity of treaties, and the sentences in criminal and prize causes. Appeals can be made from a State court only upon ground that the •decision of the latter is in conflict with the Constitution or laws of the United States. 4. See 2 and 5, June '96, also 2, Sept. '96. 5. (a) See 6 (b), June '97. (b) Book, periodical, map or chart, dramatic composition, musical •composition, engraving, cut or print. (c) Twenty-eight years. May be renewed. 6. See 2, Sept. '98. 7. See Constitution, Art. V. 8. Board of County Commissioners of each county in State, not oft- «ner than once in every two years upon application of one-fourth of the registered voters of any county, shall call for and provide for an election in the county in which application is made, to decide whether the sale of intoxicating liquors, wines or beer shall be prohibited therein, deter- mined by majority voting in said election, provided that intoxicating liquors shall not be sold in any election district in whch a majority vote ivas cast against same at said election. 9. Circuit Courts, Criminal Courts, County Courts, County Judges ■and Justices of the Peace. 10. Governor, W. S. Jennings; See'y of State, H. C. Crawford; Comp- troller, A. C. Croom; Attorney General, J. B. Whitfield; Treasurer, W. V- . Knott; Supt. of Public Instruction, W. N. Sheats; Com. of Agriculture, B. E. McLin. For duties, see 8, Sept. '95. JSTov. 1901. 1. See 1, Sept. '94. 148 2. See 2, Sept. '95. 3. See 4, Sept. '99. 4. See 1, Sept. '98. 5. See 2. June '96. 6. See 7, Sept. '99. 7. See 7, Sept. '90. 8. See 8, June 1901. 9. See 9, Sept. 1901 10. rune See 8, 1 1902. May '95. 1. See 6th Amendment. 2. By a class arrangement through which one third of Senate is; elected every two years. (See Constitution^ Art. I, Section III., Clause 2.) This is done in order that Senate may be a continuous body — that is, always organized, and when it meets, ready to proceed, at once, to busi- ness. 3. Customs, or duties, and excises. 4. (a) See 12th Amendment, Clause 1. (b) The Secretary of State, the Secretary of the Treasury, the Secre- tary of War, the Attorney-General, the Postmaster-General, the Secretary of the Navy, the Secretary of the Interior. (This law of succession was passed during Cleveland's administration. Secretary of Agriculture not then a cabinet officer. Department of Commerce recently established as cabinet office.) 5. The Speaker is the presiding officer. Elected by the members of the House of Representatives. He is a member of the House, and is nominated for Speakership by a convention, or caucus, of representatives. who are of his political party. 6. (a) See IV (a), May '95. (b) Schedule of duties on merchandise imported or exported. (c) Negation of chief executive on legislative measure. (d) Merchandise sent out of a country. (e) See 3(c), Oct. '94. 7. Each territory elects a delegate. Territorial delegates serve upon, committees, and have the right to debate, but not to vote. Their real duties are as agents of their respective Territories. 8. County commissioners' districts, county school boards' districts,. justice' of peace districts, towns' wards, school district. 9. Warrants signed by comptroller, countersigned by Governor, then, payment by Treasurer. 10. See United States History, 10, Second Grade, June '99. Sept. 1902. 1. (a) See Sixth and Seventh Amendments. Grany jury and trial jury, or petit jury. It is the duty of the former to investigate crime and to present charges, called indictment for trial by court. It is the duty of trial jury to hear testimony and argument, and then decide upon the truth of facts in dispute, and render a verdict. or decision in the suit, and in criminal cases, convict or acquit. 2. See 3 (a), June '98. 3. Electors are first chosen by the people. For further steps neces- sary, see 12th Amendment, Clause 1. 4. In its general signification, the word elector means voter. By presidential electors are meant those who are chosen to cast the vote of the State for President and Vice-President, according to provis- ions of Twelfth Amendment. 149 5. See Constitution, Art. I, Section VIII. 6. See Constitution, Art. I, Section X. 7. By a requisition — tliat is, a formal demand by Governor of State from which accused fled. See Constitution, Art. IV, Section II, Clause 2. 8. Expression put into Constitution because English Parliament had passed Mils of attainder. Such a bill was an act of Parliament — voted upon like any other bill — naming a person and declaring him guilty of treason or some other crime. If passed by a majority of the houses, per- son attainted was usually executed, his property confiscated and his fam- ily degraded and deprived of civil rights. 8. Treason: See VI, last exam. Letters of marque and reprisal. See 4, Sept. '98. Naturalization : The legal process by which a foreigner becomes enti- tled to the rights and privileges of a citizen of the United States. 9. Tax Collector — Collects taxes. Tax Assessor — Assesses taxes. Treasurer — ^Receives, keeps and pays out moneys. Supt. of Public Instruction — See 9, June '96, Registrar — Registers voters. For others see 5., Sept. '94. 10. State Board of Education : Management and oversight of school lands, management of educational funds of the State, decides upon ap- peals referred by State Superintendent, fills vacancies on county boards. State Superintendent of Education, County School Board, County School Superintendent, Trustees. For functions of last four, see 9, June '96. 150 ARITHMETIC . (Second Grade. 1. (a) 27 bu. X 640 = 17,280 bu. (b) Product is in bushels, hence 27 is the multiplicand. Multiplicand and product must be like num- bers. 2. (a) Divisor, (b) Dividend. 3. 99 X 909 = 89,991. 89991 + 9 == 90000, dividend. 4. 31570 = 7 X 5 X 11 X 2 X 41. Prime factors, 7, 5, 11, 2 and 41. 5. 2116 20 24 30 1 3| 1 8 10 12 15 1 4 8 10 4 5 2 2 10 1 5 5| 1 1 5 1 5 11111 L. C. M.— 2x3x4x2x5=240. 2373)6667(2 4746 1921)2373(1 1921 452)1921(4 1808 G. C. D. = 240h-113=2 7 113)452(4 452 Ans. 2 1 1 6. 4— + 5— = 10— 3 12 4 1 3 13 3 1— = 1— 7 14 14 1 13 17 10— -^ 1— = 5— 4 14 54 5 1 14 4— of — = 1— 9 3 27 17 14 1 5 ^- 1— z= 3— Ans, 54 27 2 7. ( 1260x3.49 )H-1.047=r4200 88.62 ^ .00211=42,000 4200 — 42000 = —37800. 8. 11 in. X 7 in. x 3 in. = 231 cu. in, 231 cu. in. = 1 gal. or 32 gills. 9. (a) V2 of %, 1/2 of 1/4, % of 14 and 14 of 14 = % Sec. = 240A 240x2.00=:$480; cost. (b) By same method, it is seen that he sold 5-16 of a section, leaving him 1-16 of a section (c) being composed of the W. 3^ of the N. W. 14 of the S. E. 1^ and the E. 14 of the N. E. % of the S. W. J4. (d) 40 (2.50+3.00+1.20+2.00+1/^ of 4.00) +14 of 5.00 = $528. $528, or proceeds of sale — $480 cost — $48 profit, besides land now owned or 10 per cent, of $480. 10. $1522.92 — $1301.64 = $221.28 int. Int. on $1301.64 at 5 per cent, for 1 yr. = 65.082. $221.28^65.082 = 3.4+ yrs. = 3 yrs. 4 mo. 24 da. . •. The time is 3 yrs. 4 mo. 25 da. Ans. Oct. '94. 1. $56000 — $64 = $55936. $55936^76 = $736, divisor. 2. Prime factors of 10010 are 2, 5, 7, 11 and 13. 3. G. C. D. of $630, $1134, $1386 is $126 Ans. Number A can buy=: 630-^126= 5 Number B can buy = 1134r^l26= 9 Number C can buy = 1386^126=11 4. L. C. M. of 36, 48, 80, 320 and 432 is 8640, no. bji. 5. $23 7 A 3 .3 1 7 3 69 151 5. — Continued 3 7 $lor— = — A 3 23 5 5 7 65— = 65— X — == 20A. Ans. 7 7 23 6. (1.26x34.9^.1047) — (88.62-^-.211) =420 — 420 = Ans. 7. 525 sq. 1. = 21-25 poles or rods. 9iM sq- ch. = 149|f poles or rods. 1^ rods + 9i rods-l-149 |f rods = 160 rods = lA Vs sq. mi. = 80 A. lA + 80A = 81A. Ans. 8. 48x1% cu. ft. = 60 cu. ft., con- tents of box. 4x5 = 20 sq ft. 60 ^ 20 = 3 ft. Ans. $110, cost of $90, cost of 9. 99 -^ 90 per cent, one. 99 -^ 110 per cent other. $110 + $90 = $200, cost of both. $99 -1- $99 = $198, selling price. $200 — $198 = $2, loss. $2.00 -^ $200 = 1 per cent. loss. Ans. 10. $500 1st principal. 20flst interest. (6 mo. 2 da.) 520f 220f 1st payment. $300 2d. prin. 10 2d. int. (5 mo.) $310 10 2d payment. $300 3d prin. 131 3d int. (6 mo. 20 da.) $300 4th prin. 5 46f 4th int. (2 mo. 22 da.) 13.331 3d int. $318.80 218.80 3d and 4th payments. $100.00 5th prin. .66f 5th int. (1 mo.) May '95. l..a) 29,000,095,045. (b) Twenty billion, two hundred million, ten thousand ten. (c) DCV. • (d) 1550. (e) Six hundred twenty-five, and six hundred twenty-five thous- andths. subtrahend + remain- = minued — remain- subtra- multi- 2. Minuend = der. Subtrahend der. Remainder = minued - hend. Multiplicand = product plier. Multiplier = product -^ multipli- cand. Product = multiplicand x multi- plier. Dividend = quotient x divisor. Divisor = dividend -f- quotient. Quotient = dividend -f- divisor. 3. G. C. D. of 360.288,648,720 is 72. Hence 72A. (a) 3604-28&f648+720 = 28, number of 72 farms (b) 4. 5 1 23 8 3 24 8 3 24 5 15 8 3 24 5 1 15 23 7 5 15 4025 24 24 24 8 36864 Ans. I00.66f Ans. . A can do 1-3 of work in 1 day. B can do 1-5 of work in 1 day. C can do 1-6 of work in 1 day. All can do 1-3 + 1-5 + 1-6 = 7-10 in 1 day. 7-10 of work can be done in 1 day. 1-10 of work can be done in 1-7 day. 10-10 of work can be done, in 10-7 = If days. Ans, 1.52 6. .000050^.0625 = thousanths. .0008, eight ten- 7. 320 rods = 1 mile. 1 rod =^ 1-320 of a mile. 1-10 rod = 1-3200 of a mile. 9-10 = 9-3200 of a mile. 9-3200 = .0028125, twenty-eight thous- and one hundred twenty-five ten-millionths. 8. 160 sq. rd. = 1 acre. 160 X 40 = 6400 sq. rods area. V6400'= 80 rods, side of square. 80 X 4 = 320 rods, perimeter of square. 320 rd. X .$21/2 = $800, cost of fenc- ing square. Breadth of rectangle, 40 rds. Length of rectangle, 160 rds. 4044(>l-160-fl60 = 400 rds, perimeter of rectangle. 400x$2i^ =^ $1000, cost of fencing rectangle . $1000 — $800 = $200. Ans. 9. See 9, Oct. '94, 2d or 3d grade. 10. cows horses. 6=5 1 = — as much as horse 6 8 horses -i- 12 cows would eat as much as 18 horses. 18 horses in 40 days eat 12 tons of hay. 1 horse in 40 days eats j| tons of hay. 1 horse in 1 days eats ^ tons 191/^ horses in 1 day eat ^ tons 19y2 horses in 65 days eat ^-^^ =2iys tons. Ans. of 110, 140, and 680 are 5 and hence product, 10, is G. C. D. 630 ^ 10 = 63. Ans. 3. i+i+i+85 = 1, or whole amount. If + 85 = 1 or fg Hence, |^ = $85. |f= $200, whole amt. $200 — (75% + $65i+$18f)=$40T\, remainder. $40tVh-|2jL = 20, number sheep bought. Ans. 4. 600.0025 + .056 = 600.0585. 600.0585 — 596.0585 = 4 4 X 6.034 = 24.136 24.136 -^ .6034 = 40. Ans. 2; 5. , 375 ^ .75 r .75 H- 375 = - 500 = .002. 500 X .002 = : 1 (one). Ans. 6 $1297.60 X 1 yr. .07 = $90, ,832, int. for $90,832 X 3 = 272.496, int. for 3 years. $272,496 — $3,027 = 269.469 int. for 3 years. — 12 da. 7. Int. on $1 at 7 per cent, for 5 years is $0.35. $33.25 -^ .35 = $95. Ans. 8. Amt. of $1 at 7 per cent, for 1 year is $1.07. $321 -^ $1.07 = $300, present worth 9. 70 : 300 :: 800 : ? 8 : 15 300x15x800 450000 = $6428 f 8x70 70 June '96. 1. |a) 20,000,019,019. (b) DCV. (c) 1.550. (d) Six hundred twenty-five, and six hundred and twenty-five thousandths. 2. 7x3x2x.5x3 = 630. L. C. M. The pnly common price factors 10. 100 per cent. = amt. rec'd for flour. 98 per cent. — net proceeds. 2 per cent. — commission on flour. 4^^-i; per ct. = commission on bacon. 6y»o per ct. = $150. 1 per ct. = $21.73H 100 per ct. = $2173.91, rec'd for flour. 98 per ct. — 4^"^ per ct. = 93iV per ct. invested in bacon. $2173.91 x .931 = $2023.91 +, cost of bacon. A.ns. •Sept. '96. 1. 100.1 -r- .013 = 7700, Ans. ■2. f of t=|, sold to B. I — |=jj, part still owned by A. iot|=3-\, sold to C. I — j^jT^j^^, part still owned by B. -l-vfj%=^\, sold to D. j\ — ij=i%, part still owned by C. .3. 20 cows = $15.50. 1 cow =: .771/^. * 8 cows = $6.20. A. 12 cows = $9.30. B. 4. .325 of a yr. = .325 of 12 mo. = 3.9 mo. .9' of a mo. = .9 of 30 da. = 27 da. Hence, 3 mo. 27 da. Ans. .5. 122° — 30' 82 — 25 153 June '97. 1. (17 X 16) + 15 = 287. Ans. The whole is divided into a differ- ent number of parts. 15)40° — 5', dif. in longitude. 2 hr. 40 min. 20 sec — , dif. in tiniie. .-. 19 min. 40 sec. past 10 A. M. in San Francisco. •6. 2484 ~ 1.08 = $2300, cost of 1st house. 2484 ^ .92 = $2700, cost of 2d house. $2300 + $2700 = $5000, cost of both. $2484 X 2 = $4968, selling price of both. $5000 — $84968 = $32, loss. $32 -^ $5000 = .0064 = 4-625 per cent. Ans. 7. 3 5 6 ; = — =1.20 = 120 per ct. 4 8 5 Ans. «. 1.33i X .15 = .20. •9. Int. on $1200 for 45 da. at 8 per cent. = $12, bank disc. $1200 — $12 = $1188, proceeds. Ans. 10. $1800 X .05 = $90.00, com. on farm. $1800 — $90 = $1710, net proceeds. $1710 -4- $1.03 = $1660.19+, invest- ed in oranges. 1 2 2 1 2 2 4 2' 1 2 2 1 2 2 4 2 8 2 3 17 3 8 18 ' 5 9 9 23 153 61 — + = 2 36 90 180 4. 6.0004 + 64.004 = 70.0044. 70.0044 — 69.0004 = 1.004. 1.004 X .04 = .04016. .04016 -^ .0020080 = 20 = XX. 5. 41/^)109 mi. 7 fur. 29 rds. 7 ft 3 in. 24 mi. 3 fur. 19 rds. 14 ft. 5^ in. 157° 77 50' — 35" W. — 15 W 15)80° — 50' — 20" 5 hr. 23 min. 21 1-3 sec — , dif- ference in time. 36 min. 38 2-3 sec. past 7 P. M. July 3. 7. $2.40 X 116 1 per ct. = $2.80, sell- ing price. $2.80 -^ .80 = $3.50 marked price. Ans. (8 ) 100 per cent. = selling price of wheat. 4 per cent. = commission on wheat. 100 per cent. — 4 per cent. = 96 per cent., proceeds from sale. 96 per cent, x 3 per cent. = .0288, commission on corn. $735 -i- .0688 = $10683.13 fi, selling price wheat. $10683. 13fi less 4 per cent, commis- sion = $10255.81. $102.55.81 -^ 1.03 = $9957.097, in- vested in corn. $9957.097 -^ .33 1-3 = 29871.291 bushels. Ans. 154 9-10. (a) Int. on $1 at 6 per ct. for 1 yr. 6 mos. is .09. .$9000 X .09 = $864.00, simple in- terest (b) $864 remains unpaid y^ yr. $864 .06 2)51.84 25.92 + $25.92 = $889.92, annual interest. (c) $881.28; J890.179. (d, e) $9600 H- 1.09 = $8807.34, net procGGds $9600 — 8807.34 = $792.6,6. true discount. Int. on $9600 for 1 yr. 6 mo. 3 da. at 6 per ct. = $868.80, bank dis. 1 1 11 — ' X 5 — = = — 8 2 16 2 7 37 3— + 4— rr: 7 — 9 24 72 11 541 99 — -^ = 16 72 1082 Sept. '97. 1. f of 4i bu. or y bu. = $5f. 1 bu, = $f I of f of 20 bu. or 6 bu. = $9. Ans. 2. (a) 3 2 1 4 3 2 8 2 8 5 2 3 4— -f- 3— = — 6 9 2 3 3 15 7 — + — = — or 1- — 8 2 8 8 7 7 1 4— + 1— = 6— Ans. 24 8 6 (b) 7 3 1 = — 1 8 4 8 2 5 1 _ + 4— = 5— 3 6 2 Ans. 3. 16 X .16 = 2.56 2.56 -^ .0016 = 1600, MDC. 4. (a) 10% ft. X 51 ft. X 614 ft. = 350 cu. ft. 4. (a) 101/2 ft. X 1 bu. = 11/4 cu ft. nearly. 350 -f- 114 = 280 bu. 280 bu. at $11/8 per bu. = $315. Ans. 4. (b) 1-20 of 350 cu. it.^VlVi cu. ft.. 171/2 ^2 = 8% cu. ft. = 15120 cu.- in. 15120 cu. in. -^ 231 cu. in. = 65 ff gal. 10 francs = $1.93. 65f| X $1-93 = $126.82ff. 5 66f per cent. = $200, cost. 100 per ct. = $300, list price. $300 X 116 f per ct. = $350, selling- price. $350 — $200 = $150. $150 ^ $200 = 75 per cent. gain. 6. See ex. 9, 2nd or 3d grade, Oct.,. 1894. 8)2 sq.mi. 120A. 8 sq.ch. 12p. 500 sq.l. 175 A. 1 sq.ch. IP 375 sq.L 8. (1.6)» = 4.096. V 4.09600000 = 2.0238. 9. (a) $360 -^ .06 = $6000 = 60 shares. $1101^ + .25 = $110%. $110% X 60 = $6645, invested, (b) $180 at 1 per ct. per mo. 6 mos. = 10.80. ($180x2) +10. 80 6645 = ^iih P®r ct. 155 10. 6 3 : 2 8 9 :: 41/4, : Ans. 4^ June '98. 22^ 5 hr. 10 min 15 77° — 30' 75 — 10 1. a) Six hundred five thousand six. (b) 800.008,008,800,080. (c) $55816.05. (d) 10,822. (e) M. 2. 4 + Jl X 3 — (5 + 28 -H- 4 + 24) -^ 6 = 31. Ans. 3. Prime factors are 2, 11, 13 and 17. 4. L. C. M. of 12, 15, 18 = 3x2x2x5x3 = 180. Ans. 2° — 20^ East. 8. 100 X IVi cu ft. = 125 cu. ft. con- tents of required box. 125 cu. ft. -V- 25 sq. ft. = 5 linear ft . Ans . 9. Int. on $1 at 6 per ct. for 3 mos. 3 da. is .0155, bank discount. $1.00 — .0155 = .9845, proceeds of $1. $354.42 H- .9845 = $360, face of note. 10. Int. on $1 at 6 per cent, for 3. yrs. 6 mos. is .21. $42 -^ 21 = $200, cash value. 15, A = 12, B = 18. C. 180 12 180 15 180 10 5 , 28 34 25 ' 30 L C. M. of 28 and 34 is 476. G. C. D. of 25 and 30 is 5. 476 1 = 95 — sec. 5 5 6. ( 1 3 6 4) 1 (3 + 2 of — + — ) ' ^ 4 — (2422) 5 Sept. '98. 1. 296 — 132 — = 82, remainder 296 — 82 = 214, subtrahend. 2. .7-4- .007 + 129 = 229, CCXXIX. 3. See ex. 2, 2nd or 3d Grade, June' 2, 1902. 4. 5x3x3x5x2x7x3x10=94500, L. 5x3 = G. O. D. 94500 -i- 15 = 6300. Ans. C. M. 5. 180 x IVi cu. ft. = 225 cu. ft. con- tents of bin. 225 cu. ft. -^ 25 sq. ft. = 9 linear ft. Ans. 6. 74° W 2 — 30' E. = ( 1 (5— ( 2 1 ) 1 2— + 6) -^ 4— 4 ) 5 = 37 4 7. Difference in time is 5 hr. 10 min. 1 17 4— = 2— 5 84 15)76° — 30' 5 hr. 6 min. Hence 10:21 P. M> 7. See 9, Oct. '94, 2d grade. 8 30 : 300 :: 15 30 6 3 60 8 6 12 12 8. — Continued 300x8x6x12x12x15 30x6x3x60x8 120 days 9. $1200x 8 =- $ 9600 for 1 mo. 900x10 = 9000 for 1 mo. 850x12 = 10200 for 1 mo. $28800 for 1 mo. $28800 gives $1296, gain. 1296 9 200 9 200 1 gives 28800 9600 gives 9600 x $432 A's share. 9000 gives 9000 x = $405 200 B's share. 156 4. 288 rd. yd. ft. 120 rd. 4 yd. 2 ft. 167 rd. yd. 2 ft. 6 in. Ans. 5. 436 rds. circumference. 436 -^ 3.1416 = diameter of circle. Diameter divided by 2 = radius. (Radius)^ x 3.1416 = area of cir- cle in sq. rods. Divide area of circle in sq. rods by 160, and result will be number of acres, viz.: 94.5457+. Ans. 6. 20 -per ct. of 85 per ct. = 17 per cent. 85 per ct. — 17 per ct. = 68 per ct. 68 per ct. = $3859. 100 per ct. = $5675. Ans. 7. Int on $1 at 6 per cent, for 63 days = .0105. $17.78 -^ .0105 = $1693.33. Ans. 8. See 8, Sept. '98, 2d or 3d grade. 9. 1200 bu. x 2150| cu. in. = 2580480 cu. in. 10200 gives 10200 x = $459 200 C's share. 10. 31/2 x 3.1416 X 30 = 329.868 sq. ft, surface one col. 329.868 X 12 = 3958.416 sq. ft. = 439.824 sq. yds. 439.824 X .193 = $84.886032. Ans. V2580480 = 137.16+ in. = 11 ft. 5.16 in. Ans. 10. 4 ft. X 4 ft. = 16 sq ft. 16 sq. ft. X 2f ft. = 42| cu. ft. 421 xl71 lbs. = 7296 lbs. Ans. June '99. 1. See 3, June '98, 2d or 3d grade. 2. 5 1 17 — + — or — = $1020. 8 12 24 60 24 Sept. '99. 1. 8 1 31 6— X 2— = — 9 4 2 5 31 1 3— + — = 19— 6 2 3 4 4 7 5*7 10 1 7 19 19 = 18—. 3 10 30 Ans. 24 — == 1440, A's money. Ans. 24 3. .00144 ~ .000012 = 120 or CXX. Ans. 2. .35 X .4 = .14, part sold C. .35 — .14 = .21, part left .21 X .500 = .105, B's loss. .105 = 1680 The whole, or 1, = $16,000. Ans. 3. 18 X li X 11 — 264 ft, one piece 5 X 264 = 1320 ft., five pieces. 1320 X my2 = $46.20. Ans. 4. 14 mi. = 80 rd. = 1320 ft. 1320 ft. X 60 ft. = 79 200 sq. ft. 79,200 X .22 = $17,424. 79,200 -^ 9 = 8,800 sq. yds. 8,800 sq. yds. x $3.10 = $27,280. $27,280 — $17,424 = $9,856, cheap- er. Ans. 5. 100 per ct. = bushels bought by measure. 10114 per ct. = bushels sold by weight. 1.0125 X 1.05 = 1.063125, selling price. $4910.976 H- 1.063125 = $4619.377+, cost. Ans. 6. 24.000 lbs at 6 cts. per lb. = $1440. $1440 X .05 = $72.00, commission on sales. $1440 — $72 = $1368, net proceeds. $1368 + $3000 = $4368. $4368 X .05 = $218.40, commission on investment. $72 + $218.40 = $290.40, total com. Ans. 7. 100 per ct. — 12i^ per ct. = 87% per ct. $2.00 -r- .871/^ = $2.28f retail 157 June 1900. 1. 1 3 2 1 1 2— + 7— X 3 2 H 4— 2 4 5 3 2 1 527 "2 20 14 179 — = 28 . Ans> 27 540 6 2. 1 yr., or — = $216. 6 — = $36. 6 lo mos or — = $180. price. ?2.28f — $2.00 = .28f gain. .28f H- $2.00 = 14 f per ct. gain. Ans. 8. $1.00 — .0155 = 9845. $150 -^ .9845 = $152.36. 9 6 X 3.1416 = c ire. of base. 1% + 6 X 3.1416 = area of base. 6 X li/4 X 6 X 3.1416 = 169.6464 cu. ft. or 293148.9792 cu. in. 293148.9792 -=- 231 = 1269.0432 gals, or 40.287+ bbls. 10. 135 + 135 + 60 + 60 = 390 rods, perimeter of rectangle. 390 X 1.35 = $526.50 cost of fenc- ing rectangle. 135 rd. X 60 rd. = 8100 sq. rds. 6 $180 — $175 = $5, two month's sup- plement. $5 -^ 2 =r $250, one month's sup- plement. $5 -=- 2 = $250, one month's supple- ment. $2.50 X 12 = $30, twelve month's supplement or value of suit. Ans. 3. .000012 —■ .012 = .001. 4. hr. min. sec. 12 6 52 40 5 7 20 15 V8100 = 90, one side of square. 90 X 4 ^ 360 rds, perimeter of sq. 360 X 1.35 = $486.00, cost of fenc- ing square. $526.50 — $486 = $40.50. Ans. 76° 50' west. Ans. 5. 27 in. = 21/i ft. 16 -=- 214 = 71 . Hence 8 strips required. i yd == f ft. ISf X 8 = 148i ft or 49 f yds. ' 49f X 1.85 = $91.76. Ans. 6. 16f per ct. of 54 per ct. = 9 per cent. 100 per ct. — 9 per ct. = 91 per ct. 385.84 -^ 91 per ct. = $424. 7. $3600 --- 125 per ct. = $2880, cost of first. 158 7 — Continue d 3G00 -4- 75 per ct. = 4800, cost of second. $7680 (cost) — $7200 (selling price) = $480 (loss) Ans. S. 3493.50 -=- 4.25 = 822, number bbls. bought. 3493.50 X .02% = $96.07125, com- mission. 3493.50 X .Oli/s = 39.301875, insur- ance. $96.07125 + $39.301875 + $268.25 = $403.623125, expenses. 403.62312 -H 822 = .491+, expenses per bbl. 4.25 + .491 = $4,741, total cost per bbl. 4.741 X .10 = .4741, gain per bbl. 4.71 + .4741 = 5. 21+, selling price per bbl. 9. Int. on $1.00 for 2 mo. 20 da. at 7 per cent is .015f Proceeds, .984| -^ .984| = $909.14. 10. 20 X 20 = 400 sq. ft., area of lower end. 10 X 10 == 100 sq. ft, area of upper end. 400 X 100 = 40,000, product of areas. V 40,000 = 200, square root of pro- duct. 400 + 100 + 200 = 700, sum of areas and sq. root of product. 1-3 of 20 = 6 2-3 = one-third of altitude. .-. 700 X 6 2-3 = 4666 2-3 cu. ft. Ans. Sept. 1900. 1 Twenty-five quadrillion, two hun- dred ten billion, forty million, five thousand, eight hundred sixty-one. (2) 100,001,001,001. (3) $1049.095. (4) 10879. (5) MMDCCCXCIX. 2. (1) Minuend, subtrahend, re- mainder. (2) 10 — 5 = 5. (3) Only like numbers can be sub- tracted. The sum of the sub- trahend and the remainder is equal to the minuend. (4) An abstract number is one used without reference to any par- ticular thing; as, 4. A concrete nwrmber is one used in connection with some thing; as, 4 books. (5) Multiplicand, multiplier, product. (6) 4 X 3 is read 4 multiplied by 3 whein 4 is the multiplicand, but it is read 4 times 3 when 4 is the multiplier. (7) (a) The multiplier must be re- garded a s an abstract number. (b) The multiplicand and product must be like numbers. (c) Either factor may be used as multiplier or multiplicand when both are abstract. (8) The number to be divided is called the dividend. The number by which we divide is called the divisor. The result obtained by division is called the quotient. The part of the dividend remain- ing when the division is not exact is called the remainder. (9) The dividend and divisor must be like numbers. The quotient must be an abstract number. The product of the divisor and quotient, plus the remainder, is equal to the dividend. (10) . 25-+5 = 5 = 25 — 5 — 5 — 5 — 5 = 5. "When we wish to record how many fives in twenty-five, if we re- call the fact that 5 fives are 25, the answer is found at once. Hence, division is con- verse of multiplication. III. (54 — 16) X 11 + 4 — 15 X 20 = 270. (1) 27 + 3 X 10 — 27 = 30. 270 -=- 30 = 9, Ans. (2) Multiplying the dividend or di- viding the divisor by any num- ber multiplies the quotient by that number. Dividing the dividend or multiply- ing the divisor by any num- ber, divides the quotient by that number. 159 JMultiplying or dividing both divi- dend and divisor by the same number does not change the quotient. (1) 5, 2, 2, 2, 7, 11. Ans 5 21 — of = 4 llf 525 228 175 76 3 175 559 1— + = 8 76 152 559 1 1525 152 3 456 1525 305 45G ' 114 5 4 1 1— 4 2.1 ( 1 ) 1 11 — + 3(— ) +— = — 3 ( 6 ) 12 12 12 11 1 or — = $1850 12 12 12 12 — = $22,200. 12 3. 9 -^ .09 = 8.91; .0009 x 8.91 = .008019; .008019 = 810 .0000099 Eight hundred ten. Ans. Ans V. .000012 -T- .012 = .001. 12 X .00012 = .00144. .00144 -f- .001 = 1.44, One, forty- four hundredths. 4. 120° 84 12' 26" 15 30 YI. 74= 3' 20 15)70= 23' 5 hr. 5 min. 32 sec. dif. in time. 12 P. M. 5 min. 32 sec. 5 hr. 5 min. 32 sec. 7 A. M., time at New York. VII. i^ pt. = 614 per ct. of 8 pts. or one gal. $500 X .O614 = $31.25. Ans. ■8. $6000 X 2 = $12000, selling price. $6000 -f- 120 = $5000, cost of first. $6000 -^ SO = $7500, cost of second. $7500 + $5000 = $12500, cost of both. $12500 — 12000 = $500, loss. $500 -^ $12500 = 4 per ct. loss. (9) See 8, Sept. 1901, 2d or 3d grade. 10. See 8, Sept. '98, 2d or 3d grade. June 1901. 1. L. C. M. of 42, 63, 49. 91, 70 -4- G. C. D. of 3038, 5394 and 8308 57330 21 = = 924— 62 31 15)35° 56' 56" dif. in longi- tude. 2 hrs. 23 mins 47^^! sees. dif. in time. Hence, 36 mins. 12 4-15 sees, past 9 A. M. 5. Let 100 per cent. := cost. 130 per ct. = marked price. 117 per ct. = selling price. 100 per cent. = $650, cost. 1 per cent. = $6.50. 117 per cent. = $760.50, selling price. 760.50 — $650 = $110.50, gain. $110.50 -^ $650 = 17 per ct. gain. 6. $460.75 in one yr. at 6 per ct. will earn 27.645. 95.00 2413 = 3 yrs. 27.645 5529 = 3 yrs. 5 mo. 7 da.-t- Ans. 7. Let 100 per ct. = cost of horse. f cost of carriage = % of 100 per cent. = 75 per cent. I or cost of carriage = 112% per cent. 125 per cent. -I- 112r/^ per ct. + 11% per ct. or 248% per ct. = $597. 100 per ct. = $240. cost of horse. 112^ per ct. = $270, cost of car- riage. 8. See 8, Sept. '99, 2d grade. 9. Length = 100 rods. Width 100 J 100 X 1001 160 8. 160 "3 10. 1 : 6% :: (7, ,13)= : X- = 380.43985 X = 18.178 rds . Ans, Sept. 1901. 1. |yd. : 5f yd. : : $3| : ! 5|X3f == $24. Ans. 4. 1 mi. = 5280 ft. 5 mi. = 26400 ft. 26400 -^ 9.00013 = 2933.29+. Ans. 5 y\ A or 160 sq. rd. = 116i\ sq. rd. j\ of 301/i sq. yd. = 11 sq. yd. .-. 8 A. = 116 sq. rd. 11 sq. yd. 6 cu. m. =: ft. sq. ft. 1 bu = 2150.42 1.244456+ cu. ft 100 bu. = 124.4456+ cu. 124.4456+ cu. ft. -f- 25 4497824+ ft. Ans. By approximate measurement (1 bu. = 114 cu. ft.), height re- quired = 5 ft. 7. 120 per ct. = $15.40. 100 per ct. = $12.83i , cost. $16.50 — $12.83 i = $3.66f gain. $3.66fH-$12.83i=28fper ct. Ans. Amt. of $1.00 at 5 per cent, for 1 yr. 6 mo. 18 da. is 1.0775. $12000 -+ $1.0775 = $1113.69, pres. worth. $12000 — $1113.69 = $886.31, true: disc. Int. on $12,000 at 5 per cent, for 1 year 6 mos. 21 da. is $935, bank: discount. $935 — $886.31 = $48.69. Ans. . 3' X .5236 = 14.1372 cu. in., voL of smaller ball. 12'' X .5236 = 904.7808 cu. in., vol. of larger ball. 904.7808 H- 14.1372 = 64. Ans. Vs 2. 1 sq. mi. = 640 acres. 5-16 of 640 A. = 200 acres. % of 200 A. = 150 A. 150 acres at $14.50 per acre = $2175. 50 acres at $15.75 per acre = $787 50 $2175 + $787.50 = $2962.50, selling price. $2962.50 — $2000 = $962.50. $962.50 -7- $2000 = 481/8 per ct. Ans. 3. 141^ yd. X IVs yd. = %i 2^1 sq. yd. -^1 yd. = 19|| yds. 10. 12 men ( 30 men 30 ft. 300 ft. 15 days ? days : 6 ft. : 8 ft. 12 hours 8 hours 3 ft. 6 ft. 4 deg. 7 deg. 210 days. Ans. Nov. 1901. 1. See 1, Sept. 1901, 2d grade. 2 See 2 June '99, 2d grade. 3. See 3, May. '94, 2d grade. 4. See 4, June '96, 2d grade. 5. See 5, June '01, 2d grade. 6. See 6, Sept. '99. , 2d grade. 7. See 7, June '99, 2d grade. 8. See 8, June '99, 2d grade. 9. See 9. Sept. ' 97, 2d grade. 10. See 10, June ! 1900. June J 1902. 1. 5.103791 — .289 = 4.814791. 4.814791 H- .1306 = divisor. 2. 31/2 21 5 = 5 — , sum of the two num- 74 44, hers. 493 110 111 45 11 221 9 1st number. 2 — Continued 493 111 17 110 45 990 ' 21 17 61 5 2 = 3 , other num- 44 990 132 ber Ans. 3. See 2, June 1900, 1st grade. 4. 45 ft. X 9 ft. X 1% ft. ^ 708% cu. ft., one longer wall. 708% cu. ft. X 2 = 141714 cu. ft., both longer walls. 37 ft. X 9 ft. X 1% ft. = 582% cu- ft., one shorter wall. 582% cu. ft. X 2 = 11651/2 cu. ft., both shorter walls. 141714 + II6514 = 2583 cu. ft., to- tal contents. 2583 X .32 = $826.56. Ans. 5 100 per ct. = amt. spent for but- ter and eggs. 133} per ct. = amt. spent for veg- etables. 1331 per ct. = 36.48. lOO' per ct. = 27.36. Hence $36.48 + $27.36 = $63.84. Ans. 6- $1 — .0125 = .9875 cost of $1 of draft. If payable at sight. .9875 — .0181 = 96941 , cost of $1 of time draft. $1750 X .9694i = $1696.48, cost of draft. Ans. 161 Sept. 1902. 1. 7. V202 — 16= = 12 ft. Ans. bu. pk. qt. pt. 8. 28 3 5 1 14 404 3 5 = 404|fbu. 404ff X .60 = $242.94 1 Ans. 9. If on 56 pounds $1.12 is lost, On 1 pound .02 is lost. 8 per ct. = .02. 100 per cent. ^ .25, cost per lb. Ans. 10. $72 yield $6. $6 -^ $72 = 8| per cent. 8i per ct. — 8 per ct = i per ct. Former, | per ct. Ans. 5 7 17 — 4- $11— = $16— 6 8 24 17 $16 24 11 3— 12 19 $6— 24 5 3 If $— = — yd. 16 8 1 3 $— = — yd. 16 40 16 48 1 — or $1 = — = 1— yd. 16 40 5 19 1 19 $6 — = 1— yds. X 6— 24 5 24 = 8— yds. 20 Ans. 2. 100.25 X .00018 = .0180450. .0180450 -;- .0002006 = 89, quotient; 1916 remainder. 89 expressed in Roman notation, LXXXIX. 3. 2150.4 cu. in. -^57% cu. in. =37i'^i qt. 375I qt. X .10 = $3.72i-'V selling price per bu. $3.72/t — .$1.60 = $2.12i\ gain per bu. $2 12,^ X 5 = $10.61 j?V total gain. Ans. hr. min. sec. 4. 3 1 33.8 15 45° 23' 27" 77° 2' 48" 45 23 27 122"^ m. 38 26' m. 20 15" "West. Ans. in. in. ? : 609. 609 X 38 20 1157.1 in. ft. = 96.425 Ans. 162 G. See 7, June 1900, 2d or 3d grade. 5. 7. $1400000 X .002 = $2800, annual payment. $12,500 -f- $2800 = 4 with 1300 as remainder. Hence, 5 jrrs. required. Last pay- ment = $1300. Ans. S. See 8, Sept. 1901, 2d or 3d grade. 9. See 3, Sept. 1902, 1st grade. 10. See 10, Sept. 1901, 2d or 3d grade. ARITHMETIC. (First Grade.) Sept. '94. 115 4 6 12 12 12 12 12 — of — = — 7 12 G .20. — = $1.20. G bu. 1.4 = $1.50 1 = .$1.07 f 7 = $7.50. Ans. Ans. 2 11 1 84 1— 3 + 1— + 15 2 . "5 15 84 15 = $537G. 1 15 = $G4. 25 15 = $1600, 1st heir. 26 = $1664, 2d heir. 15 33 — = $2112, 3d heir. 15 . 7000 gr. = 1 lb. Avoirdupois. 480 gr. = 1 oz. Apothecaries. 7000 -^ 480 = 14tV oz. 14y'% oz X .48 = $7.00, selling price. $7.00 — $5.00 = $2.00, gain. $2 -H $5 40 per cent. . See 9, Sept. 1900, 2d or 3d grade. . See 10, Sept. 1901, 2d or 3d grade. V 1906624 = 124 cu. ft, each di- mension. V(124)- + (124=) = V30752 = 175.36+ ft, length of line from lower corner to diagonally op- posite lower corner. (175.36+)= + (124)= = 30,752 + 15376 = 46128. V46128 = 214.77+ ft. Ans. 10. Lateral surface of a cone = pe- rimeter of base x l4 slant ht (a) 1 bu. = 2150.42 cu. in. 2150.42 -+- 1728 = 1.24 cu. ft 1.24 cu. ft. = 1 bu. 1 cu. ft. =: .8+ bu. Ans. (b) 1 bu. = 1.24+ cu. ft., hence ap- proximately 1% cu. ft. See (a) above. 4. 100 per ct. — 5 per ct. = 95 per ct. $9120 H- .95 = $9600, total funds to Oct. '94 be raised. V(40)-" + (9)^ = V1681 = 41, hy- potenuse, or slant height. 18 ft. X 3.1416 ^ 56.488 ft., circ, or perimeter of base. 56.5488 X 201/0 = 1159.2504 sq. ft., lateral surface. 1159.2504 X $.193 = $223.73+. Ans. $9600 — ($2x200) = $9200, proper- ty tax. $9200 -+ $2300000 = .004, rate. Ans. 17. -m-4i 91^ ^21 fX9f 186 325 Ans. 163 2. 375 -f- .75 = 500. .75 -^ 375 = .002. Sum, 500.002. Difference, 499.998. 3. 100 per ct. x 25 per ct. = 125 per cent. 12 per cent, of 125 per cent. = 15 per cent. 125 per ct. — 15 per cent. = 110 per ct., profit. Ans. 4 Compound int. on $1.00 at 6 per cent, for 1 yr. 4 mo. .0812. Amt., $1.0812. $2703 H- $10812 = $2500. Ans. 5 . $8000 used 4 mo. = 32000 for 1 mo. $2000 used 6 mo. = 12000 for 1 mo. 3/ . ... V30. 625000000 = 3.128+. Ans. 81° 47' 50" 71 7 45 )10° 41' 5" 42 min. in time. 401- sec, difference 44,000 for 1 mo. A's capital. $16000 used 3 mo. = 48,000 for 1 mo. $8000 used 5 mo. = 40,000 for 1 mo. 88000 for 1 mo B's capital. .$13,.500 used 7 mo. = 94.500 for one 10 mo., C's capital. 44000 + 88000 + 94500 = 226500, en- tire capital for 1 mo. A's share of gain is ^%^t%% or 4%^ of $12000 = $2331.12+ B's share of gain is AVtVo or i|f of $12000 = $4662.25+. tl, Jacksonville is farther west than Boston, hence 42 mins., 40 1 sees, earlier than 10 o'clock = 17 mins. 19 1 sees, past nine. . $5000 H- 120 per ct. = $4166 f cost of house. $4166| — $4000 = $166 1 , loss if sold at $4000. ^$4166|= 4 per ct. loss. Ans. C's share of gain is--9-^J>J>-^o_ of $12000 = $5006:62+. . 1 1 2 92 7 Bank discount of $250 for 10 mo. at 7 per ct. is $14.7294. Amt. of $1.00 for 10 mo. at 7 per cent. = 1.05-1 " $250 -^ 1.05f = 236.22+, present , worth. $250 — $236.22+ = $13.7S+, true discount. $14,729 — $13.78 = .949 difference. Ans. -, part left. 3 7 5 105 105 92 13 105 105 105 13 105 1 105 105 $21,000, original amt. 105 5 92 105 = $2600. = $200. May '95. 1. (a) L. C. M. of 4, 9, 16, 24, 36 sq. in. is 144 sq. in. 1 square yd. = 1296 sq. in. 1296 9 J"' (b) 144 H- 24 = 6 pieces 2. 625 X .003 = 1.875. 92 105 -•$18400 V 39. 0625 = 6.25. 1.875 -^ 6.25 = .3, three tenths. Difference in time = 4 hrs. 30 mins. 4 hr. 30 min. 15 of $21,000 = $18,400, amt. lost 07° 30' = difference in longi- tude. $21000 = 87 M per ct. (a) B is west from A. Ans. (b) 67^ x 50 = 3375 miles apart. 164 4. Vol. of cylinder =: area of base X alt. (Ij4 ft.)=' X 3.1416 sq. ft., area of (IVa ft)"' X 3.1416 X 12 = 84.8232 cu. ft., volume. 84.8232 cu. ft. x 1728 = 146574.4896 cu . in . 231 cu. in. — 1 gallon. 146574.4896 cu. in. -^ 231 cu. in. = 634.5216, number gals. Ans. 5. First find contents of bouse of given dimensions, but six ft. in height on each side; now as one side is eight ft. high, prism havng right triangle as base, still remains. Altitude of this triangle is two ft., and base ten ft. Area of a triangle = base x i/^ al- titude. Vol. of a prism = area of base x altitude. 10x6x12 = 720 cu. ft., contents of rectangular part. 10x1 = 10 sq. ft., area of triangle or base of prism. 10x12 = 120 cu. ft., contents of prism. 10. (30)2 _ (18) = 576. 720 + 120 1% = 672, capacity in bush- els. Ans. 6. 10 per cent, of $2 = .20, deduc- tion. $2.00 — .20 = $1.80, selling price. $1.80 -^ 120 per ct. = $1.50 cost. Ans. t. 1 oz. Av. = 4371^ gr 1 oz. Troy ^= 480 gr. 4371/2 175 1 oz. Av. = or of 1 oz. 480 192 Troy. i|f of $1 = .9114+, selling price per oz. Av. .9114f — .75 = .1614+, gain per oz. Av. Ans . 8. 10 : X :: (3)= : (8)^ 27x = 5120. X = 189i| lbs. Ans. 9 1 share yields $4. Vi per cent, of $100 age per share. $4 — .25 = $3.75, net income. $3.75 -^ .05 = $75, cost of one share. Ans. V570 = 24. 30 ft. — 24 ft. = 6 ft. Ans. Sept. '95. 1. (a) Prime factors, 17, 19, 23, 31. (b) 24, 48, 72, 144. (c) Half the sum of two numbers + their difference = greater. Half the sum of two numbers — half their difference = less. (d) DXXXVIII. 2. 876 + 94 X 16 = 2380. 72 X 19 ^ 9 = 152. 9 X 144 8 162. 152 + 162 — 175 = 139. 2380 — 139 = 2241. Ans. 3. (a) $47.73 -^ .0645 = 740, number shingles, (b) $90 -^ 7.50 = 12, number tons. 2000 X 12 50 = 480, number bales. 36 sq. 4. 8 yds. long, 18 in. wide ft. 20 X 16 = 320 sq. ft., ceiling. 16 X 10 X 2 = 320 sq. ft, 2 ends. 20 X 10 X 2 = 400 sq. ft., 2 sides. 1040 sq. ft., entire area. 1040 sq. ft. -=- .36 sq. ft. = 28f hence 29 rolls. 1040 sq. ft. -f- 100 sq. ft. = lOf number of squares. $.85 X 29 = $24.65, cost of paper. 10# X .371/4 =3 $3.90, cost of labor. $28.55, entire cost. Ans. 5. 97i/< per cent. + $1508 = amt. invested in flour + com. 97^ per cent. $1508 = 104 per cent., amt. invested in flour. .25, broker- Qiy^ per ct. + $1508 ( ) income. 104 ) X 100 — 93% per ct. + $1450 = 100 per ct. amt. in flour. 165 5 — Continued. 90 per ct. of (93% per ct. + $1450) = 84% + $1305, realized from sale of flour. jfoOf 90 per cent. = .027 per ct., com, for selling. .90 — .027 = 873 per ct., pro- ceeds of sale. 100 per ct. of amt. in flour — .873 per ct. = .127 = 677.90, loss. 100 per ct. = 5337.80, invested in flour. 93% per ct. + $1450 = $5337.80. 93% per ct. = $3887.80. 100 per ct. = $4146.99, cotton sold. 97^^ per ct. = $4043.31, invested in cotton. 40O X .05 = $20, value of eacli bale. 404.. 31 -f- 20 = 202.165+. Ans. 6. 100 per ct. = what horse cost Jones. 233^ per ct. — 100 per ct. = 133^ per ct. = $600, Jones' gain. $600 -f- 1331^ per ct. = $450, what horse cost Jones, (a) $450 + $600 = $1050, what horse cost Brown. $1050 X 33^ per ct. = $350. $1050 — $350 = $700, price paid to Brown (b). 7. DeFuniak Springs, Fla., Sept. 10, 1895. :$250. Ninety days after date, I promise to pay C, or order. Two Hundred Fifty Dollars, with interest at 8 per cent, from date, for value received. B. Discounted Oct. 17, at 10 per ct. Note falls due Dec. 12. Int. on $250 at 8 per ct. for 93 da. is $5.16| Amt. $255.16| " ~~^T^ Int. on $255.16 1 at 10 per cent, for 56 days is $3.97, bank discount. (c) From Oct. 17 to Dec. 12 = 56 days, time note has to run. (d) $255.16| — $3.97 = $251.20, proceeds. 8. See 8, Nov. 1901, 1st Grade. (345)== + (345)2 = 238,050 sq. ni. V 238050 + 119025 = 597.557+ in., diam. circ. sphere. 597.557 in. -^ 2 = 298.7785 in., ra- dius circ. sphere. 10 5 -f- 2 = 2i^, radius of base. (21^)^ X 3.1416 X 10 -= 196.35, cu. ft., vol. of cylinder. (2%) 2 X 3.1416 X 3| =65.45 cu. ft., vol. of cone. 196.35 cu. ft. — 65.45 cu. ft. = 130.9 cu. ft. Hence 130.9 cu. ft. was cut away. 130.9 2 = — , part cut away. 196.35 3 June '96. 1. 12| X 2r^ = 32. 32 — 20% = 11%, Ans. (a) 314 cords = $11,371/2. 1 cord 11.37^ 20ys cords = 31/2 11.371^ X 20% 3^ = $65.40%. Ans. (b) 2. 25 ft. X 25 ft. = 625 square ft. 2(121^ ft. X 121/^ ft.) = 3121^ sq. ft. 625 sq. ft. — 312^ sq. ft. = 312i^ sq. ft. Ans. 3. 124°— 96' = 28°, dif. in longitude. 15)28° 1 hr. 52 min. . :. 1:52 P. M. Ans. 4. 10 acres = 1600 sq rd. 9. V41063625 = 345 in., edge of cube = diam. inscribed sphere. 345 -4- 2 = 172% inches, radius of inscribed sphere. V1600 = 40 rd., ide of square. 40 rd. X 4 = 160 rd. = 2640 ft, pe. rimeter of field. 4 in. + 10 in. + (3x6 in.) = 32 in. = 2f ft., sum of widths. 2640 ft. X 2| ft. = 7040 sq. ft., lumber required. $12 50 X 7.040 == $88. Ans. 5. See 6, Sept. '94, Ist grade. 6. Int. on $1, at 6 per ct. for 9 mo. 15 da. is .0475. $6285 -f- 1.0475 == $6000, pres. worth. 166 6 — Continued $6285 — $6000 = $285, true dis- count. Int. on $0285, at 6 per ct. for 9 mo. 18 da. is $301.68, hank dis- count. $301.68 — $285 = $16.68. Ans. 7. 6 22.5 — 45 3 : 17.8 :: 12 : 34.6 10.25 10.25 8.2 12.3 = Sm Ans. 8 (a) V 16499844 = 4062 194. : 245| sq. ft.. 318 14 sq. ft, (b) V 7301384 9 . 16% X 14| = ceiling. 2(16% X 91/2) side walls. 2(14f X H) = 278f sq. ft. end walls. = 842| sq.ft., total area. 3(6x 2%) = 491/^ sq. ft., windows. 2(7 x 3) =42 sq. ft., doors. 842j-V sq. ft. — (4914 sq. ft. +42 sq. ft.) = 751^2 sq. ft., to be plastered surface. 751t1j sq. ft. = 83iV8 sq. yds. SS/o'V x .25 = $20.86x. Ans. 10. (11/2)' x 3.1416 x 4 = 28.2744 cu. ft. = 48858.1632 cu. in., volume. 48858.1632 cu. in. -^ 231 cu. in. = 211.5072+, cap'y in gals. 211.5072 X $.193 == $40.82+, cost. Ans. Sept. 96. 1. , Let f = amt. each girl receives, f X 3, or 3 = amt. 3 girls receive. % = amt. each boy receives. 5 X % or 3% = amt. 5 boys, receive. 3 + 3%, or 6% = 7%. 1 $31 If — : vTo's"- f = $l/y, amt. each girl receives. |l/y X 3 = |3|, amt. girls get. f = $fi' ^T^t. each boy receives. $M X 5 = $4^1, amt. boys get. 2. 2 3 — of time past noon = — of time 3 4 till midnight. 1 3 — of time past noon = — of time 3 8 till midnight. 3 9 — of time past noon = — of time 3 8 till midnight. 8 Let — = time till midnight. 8 8 9 17 — + — = — = 12 hrs. 8 8 8 1 12 — = — ■ hrs. 8 17 Time past noon, 9 108 — = hrs. or 6 hrs. 21 min. 8 17 10 if sec*i. Hence ,time is 21 min. lOif sec. past 6 P. M. Ans. . See 3, Nov. 1901, 1st grade. . See 7, Sept. '95. . N. W. corner of Sec. 6, Township 2N of R.3W is 2 X 6 or 12 miles N. of the base line, and 3x6 or 18 miles W. of principal meridian. S. E. corner of Sec. 35, Township 3 S. R. 3B. is 3 X 6 or 18 miles E. of the prin- cipal meridian. Hence, line joining these points is the hy- potenuse of a rt. triangle whose legs are 12 + 18 == 30 miles and 18 + 17 = 35 miles respective- ly. V(35)^ + (30)^ = 46.097+ miles. Ans, 6. 82^ per ct. + % per ct. = 82% per ct. 82% per ct. of $100 =z $82.75, cost of 1 share. $82.75 X 35 = $2896.25, the entire cost 10914 per ct of $100 = 109.25, sell- ing price of 1 share. ' $109.25 X 35 = $3823.75, entire selling price. % per ct. of $3823 75 = $14.34, com. on sale. .$3823.75 — $14.34 = $3809.41, sell- ing price, less com. $3809.41 — $2896.25 = .$913.16, net gain. Ans. 167 Due Amt. Days 1 Product Paid Amt. 1 Days Product April 10 April 30 May 16 $ 150 400 100 500 75 55 39 11250 22000 3900 April 12 May 1 June 7 $ 250 73 200 54 400 17 18250 10800 6800 June 24 850 H — 5 days = note should h for 2 mo. 19 is $305.27, su 35850 1150 850 37150 35850 1300 -^ 300 = June 24, '96 '96, date given. Amt. of $300 per cent, due. June 19, ave been da. at 8 m now 300 1300 . . 8. 1 gal. = 231 cu. in. 1000 gal. = 231,000 cu. in. 133.6805 cu. ft. 9 V 133.6805 = 5.11+ ft., edge of cube 5.11 X 5.11 = 26.1121 sq. ft , area of each surface. 26.1121 sq. ft. X 5 = 130.5605 sq. ft. Ans. (12)' -H (3)5 = 64, no. balls if same material. 64 X y". = 40^1 lead balls. 10. 25.1328 in. ~- 3.1416 = 8 in.; diameter of cylinder, if solid. 8 in. — 2 in. = 6 in., diam. of smaller cyl. (hollow), (i) ? ft. X 3.1416 X 12 = 4.1888 cu. ft, vol. of large cyl. (%)= ft. X 3.1416 X 12 = 2.3562 cu. ft., ol. of smaller cyl. 4.1888 cu. ft. — 2.3562 cu. ft. = 1.8326 cu. ft vol of col. 021^ lbs. X 1.8326 x 7 = 801.7625 lbs. wt. of col. 3. G. C. D. of 201| rds. and 4.1^ rods = If rods, side of re- quired square. 2 55 201 ; = 44, lots facing longer 3 12 side. 1 55 41 ^- — = 9 lots facing shorter 4 12 side. 44 X 9 = 396 lots. Ans. June '97. j-g= part A and B can do in 1 day. yij = part A and C can do in 1 day. 9 = part B and C can do in 1 day. T8+T2+i=T = twice-' what all to- gether can do in 1 day. Ys =^ part all together can do in 1 day. Hence. ^ or entire piece of work will require 8 days. Ans. 2. 1 1 3 2 5 2 3 17 109 — + — = — 2 18 2 25 50 2 18 -f- .0005 = 4360. 4. 100 per ct. — 3 per ct. = 97 per ct., proceeds from sale of cot- ton. .97 X .02 =a .0194, com. on 2d trans- action. .97 _ .0194 = .9506, invested in city lots. .03 X .0194 = .0494, entire commis- sion. $265 -^ .0494 = $5364.37. 100 per ct. ^ $5364.37. .9506 =: $5099.37 +, price of city lots. 5. See 8. Sept. '98, 2d or 3d grade, as 8 example. 6. $1000 -=- $6 50 = 15311 shares. 153t3 X $100 = $15384t\ inv at par value. $15384 X 1.05 = $16153.85 inv. at 5 per ct. premium. 36 in. X 16 in. x 3 in. bic inches. 1728 cu- 12 inches. Ans. V1728 8. 35000 bu. at .32 per bu. = $11200. $11200 X .02 = $224, commission for selling. $11200 — $224 = $10976, proceeds. 8 — Continued. $10976 + $4000 = $14976. $14976 -T- 1.02 = $14682.35, invest- ed in prints. $14682.35 -^ .055 = 266.95+ yds. Ans. 9. (22 ft.) 2 X 3.1416 X 6i^ ft. = 145.21171 cu. ft. 145.211711 cu. ft. X .2385 = $34.6329984. 10. 2 ft. = 24 in. 24 X 24 X 3.1416 = 1809.5616 sq. In. 1809.5616 sq. in. x .0965 = $174.62. Ans. 168 4. Sept. '! 57. 1. 1 2 13 — + — = = — 4 5 20 20 13 7 — — = — left. 20 20 20 ' 3 7 3 — of — = — , to D. 7 20 20 7 3 1 left 20 20 = 5' 3 1 3 — of — or — = 48, left. 16 5 80 1 — = 16 80 80 — = 1280 head . Ans. 80 Let — = B's; then — = A's. 8 8 8 32 — for 4 mos.= — for 1. mo. 8 8 — for 8 mos. = — for 1. mo. 3 3 5 20 — for 4 mos.= — for 1. mo. 8 8 15 120 — for 8 mos. = — for 1. mo. 32 32 20 B's cap = — for 1. mo. 3 120 A's cap = — for 1. mo. 4 20 25 or 155 — + — or = $400. 3 4 12 Whence, 20 14 — = $206 — B. 3 31 25 17 — = $193— A. 4 31 2. See 2d ex., 1st grade, Nov. 26, 1901. 3. 115^ ft. + 1281 ft. + 1343/4 ft. = 3785?2 ft. G. C. D.^ of 115^ ft, 128^ ft., 134% ft. = 6tV ft, length of each board. 3783V ft. -^ 6j\ ft. = 59, boards. 59 X 5 = 295 boards. 10 in. + 2(6in.) +2(4 in.) = 2i^ ft. 378xV ft. X 2^ ft. = 9461^^ sq. ft. 946H X $71^ = $7.10. Ans. 5. See ex. 8, 1st grade, Sept. 1896. 6. 1231/^ per ct. + % per ct. = 123% per ct. $123%, one share. One share yields 5%. 5% -- $123% = 4|f per ct., in- come on inveSstment. 4% per ct. = $4% per share. Hence $4y8 net. $4i-H4f|=$J^8r^, per share. |100-$88ii=$lltV. Hence 11 \ per ct. below par. 7. Difference in time 5 hr. 12 min. hr. min. 5 12 15 78°, difference in longtude. 77° + 78° = 155°, West. ;. 21/2 X 160 = 400 sq. rd., area lot and walk. 169 8— Continued. $600 x 15 =: $9000, cost of land. 6. 640 polls at $1.50 each = $960. ,.-— ; ^ ^ .^ „ $10400 — $960 ^ $9440. Yfi^ T^ ^.l^-' -.of^ f square. $9440 _^ $2360000 = .004. Ans. (20 + 20 + 18 + 18) X 5/, X 1 = 418 ^^ $5^^ ^ '^-^505 = $84.28 bank dis- sq. yds., area walk. count 418 X .25 = $104.50. Ans. $5^0 _ $§4.28 = $475.72, proceeds. :9. 2ft. 1 in. : X :: V^ : V^^^ ^'"'wartf''' ^ *^'''-''' ''''''"' 10. (4); X 3.1416 X 1| = 67.0208 cu. ^486.96 _" $475.72 = $11.24. Ans. 8. See ex. 10, 2d or 3d grade, May, ft. 67 . 0208 1^ z= 53.61664 bu. Ans. 1895. June '98. lb. 1. 27 - lb. lb. 1 2 4— = 22— 3 3 9 1 : X :== V120 : V6400 1 : X = 4.93+ : 18.55+ X = 3.76 in. 10. See ex. 8, First Grade, Sept. 4, 1900. 8 1 29 — 4— = 24— Sept. '98. 3 11 9 9 1 . 2— + 2— = 5— 4 2 4 1 3 40 — 7— = 32— 5 8 4 4 7^ 2— = -- lb. lb. lb. lb. 8 3 2 1 3 19 1 8 22— + 24— + 32— = 79— 5 — X — = 14 3 9 4 36 4 3 19 2 12 '79— lb. cost $28. 36 3 2 3 144 2 1 1 lb. cost 14 = 13— 409 3 3 ■2. , See ex. 3, 1st grade, June, 1902. 2^ 10 3. 35£ + 13i^£ + 65s + IO21/2 s + 21s + Is = 57.975£. 3^ 13 57.975 X $4.8665 = $282,135. Ans. 4, pt. bu. 10 8 1 ; =5 1 = — bu. 13 52 64 1 8 2 1 1 13 ^- 5 = — or 2— . = 3 3 3 100 6400 65 65 4 Ans. 100 = =z .01015625 bu. 6400 — of 8 acres costs $53 — 5 3 5. $150 X 12 = $1800, increase. $1800 -^ 3 = $600, original invest- ment of each. 1 5 — of 1 acre costs $ — 5 3 170 1 acre == — 3 .01 acre 1 12 .12 acre. =: $1.00. Ans. 3. 1240 + .001 + .01 1240.011 1963.5 sq. ft. x 4^ = 8181.25 cu. ft, contents. 13 251 1745 81— X $3 = $250 16 8927 2618 1 1745 7853 $249— + 250 = $499 . 3 2618 7854 Ans. 1240.6985 .6875 = 1 June '99. 1240.011 1. longer, shorter. Ans. 4. (a) 100 per ct. — 34 per ct. = 66 per ct. 66 cts. -^- 60 per ct. = $1.00, cost of hat. (b) $12480 at 1 per ct. for 3 yrs. 1 mo. = $384.80. $384.80 -^ $384.80 = 1. Hence rate 1 per ct. Ans. 5. 3% : X :: V5145 : V120 6. 24^f francs --- 5.20 = $4.7619+. 5 per ct. of -4.7619 = .238095. $4.7619+ .238095 = $5.00. 7. $750 ^ 4 = $187.50, cost of i^ of cloth. $187.50 — $100 = $87.50, rec'd for l^ of cloth. $87.50 -r- $1.25 = 70 yds. :^ = 70 yds., . •. I = 280 yds. 280 yd. — 70 yd. = 210 yds., re- mainder. $750 X 151f per ct. = $113^7.50, to- tal selling price to gain 51| per ct. 3 4 3 1 — or — 12 4 5 9 1 + — = — 4 4 9 . • . — == 63 4 1 4 4 $5.00. Ans. 71/ Ans. $1137.50 — 87 50 210 8. 82i^ : 110 10 : 5 110 X 71/2 X 5 82i^ X 10 9. l—ii X 0) 1 ■ =: — =5. Ans. 1 — f i 10. (25)^ ft. X 3.1416 = 1963.5 sq. ft. = 218^ sq. yds. 218i sq. yds. at $1} a sq. yd. = $2494 . 2. 3! = 28 ft., shorter piece. 63 — 28 = 35 ft., longer piece. . See 4, Nov. 1901, 1st grade. 1 18° = — of 360° 20 1 — = 21 in. 20 20 20 = 420 in. or 35 ft. circ. 35 -^ 3.1416 = 11.1408+ ft. diam. 4. $360 X .12^ = $45. $360 — $45 = $315. $315 X .08 = $25.20. $315 — $25.20 = 289.80. $360 — $289.80 = $70.20. $70.20 -^ $360 = $191/2 per ct. Ans. 171 5. Proceeds of $1 at 5 per ct. for 1 mo. 18 da. = .9929i $1869.35 -i- .9929 J = $1882.G8. Ans. G. 100 per ct. + li/i per ct. = 101% per ct. $1.0125 — .0105 = $1,002. $650 H- $1,002 = $648.70. Ans. 7. 5 : 10 :: V100.44 : Vx X = 803.52 bu. Ans. 8. 125 rods = radius of park. (125)' X 3.1416 = 49087.5 sq. rds., area of park 125 -^ 3.1416 = 39.7886+ rds., di- ameter of lake. 39.7886 H- 4 = 9.947, ^^ radius of lake. 9.947 X 125 = 1232.375+ sq. rd., area of lake. 49087.5 sq. rds. — 1232.375+ sq. rd. = 47855.125. 47855.125 sq. rds. -^ 160 = 299.025 acres. Ans. 9. 3 3 — of gain. = — of selling price. 4 16 1 3 — of gain. = — of selling price. 4 48 4 12 1 — of gain. = — or — of selling 4 48 4 price. $5 ^ .75 = 6.66| , selling price per yd. $6.66|x:-^i = $22.22f . Ans. 10. (li^)= X 3.1416 = 7.0686 sq. ft., area of butt. (y2)^ X 3.1416 = .7854 sq. ft., area upper extremity. 7.0686 + .7854 = 7.854 sq. ft., sum of areas. 7.0686 X .7854 = 5.55167844, prod. areas. V 5.55167844 = 2.3562, sq. root of product. 7.854 + 2.3562 = 10.2102 1. of 40 = 13^, one third of alti- titude. 10.2102 X 13 1 = 136.136+ cu. ft, Ans. Sept. '99. 1. 1 acre = 160 sq. rd. 160 sq. rds. -4- 12 rds. = 13i rods. 2. 18.36 ch. X 10.54 ch. = 193.5144 sq. ch. 19.35144 -- 2 = 9.67572 acres. 9.67572 X $70 = $677.30+. Ans. 3. 186 -4- 15 = $12.40, selling price muslin. $12.40 H- 24 = 51f pounds. 4. In 1 da. C can dig 2^^, of well. In 1 da. C and D can dig j\- of well. ^— 2\=f3, part D can dig in a day. I — J^l, what remains. |-H^?5=.2 2 5 — 28y8 days. Ans. 5. 1 represents what F earns. 3 represents what B earns. 12 represents what D earns. 16 = $3936. 1 = $246 F. 3 = $738 E. 12 = $2952 D. 6. 18 X 60 = 1080 yds. 1080 yds. at .45 per yd. = $486. $486 X .35 = $170.10, ad valorem. duty. 1080 X .38 = $410.40, specific. 170.10 + 410.40 = $580.50. Ans. 7. $10 -f- .07 = $142 f $142i = 142f per ct. of par value. Ans. 8. 20 + 12 = 16 in. or li ft, av. 2 width. 18 X 1^ = 24 ft. Ans. 9. Let i| = number of minute spaces traversed by min. hand. Then ^^ = number of minute spaces traversed by hour hand, and 50 =: number of minute spaces to X on dial. (Min. hand to be opposite hour hand, between 4 and 5 o'clock must obviously be between X and XI.) 12 — , or spaces traversed by min. hand 12 1 = 50 + — , spaces traversed. 12 11 — = 50 12 1 12 50 11 172 12 6 — = 54— 12 11 6 $3468 X 2 per ct. = $69.36. $3468 — $69.36 = $3398.64, net cost for cash. $3398.64 — 3388.922 = $9,718. Ans. 5. $840 -4- $7 = 120 shares. Hence 54— mins. past 4 o'clock. 120 shares = $12,180. 11 Vs per ct. X 120 = $15, commission. 10. (18)» X .5236 = 3053.6252 cu. in., $12180 + $15 = $12195, cost of or 1.76715 cu. ft., vol of ball. stock. Ans. 1.76715 X 450 = 795.2175 lbs. Ans. 6. 100 per ct. — 40 per ct. = 60 per cent. $4.50 -I- .60 = $7.50. 100 per ct . — 10 per ct. = 90 per ct. $7.50 H- .90 = $8.33^ 7. $1 00 + .0125 =: $1.0125. Int. 2 mo. 3 da = .0105. 1.0125 — .0105 = 1.002. $1260 ^ $1,002 = $1257.4854-. 8. 1 =: wt. of cover. 16 oz. + 1 = 1st wt. with cover. (4 X 16 oz.) — 1 = wt. of second cup. 16 oz. + 1 = 3(4 X 16 oz.) — 1 = 192 oz. — 3. 4 = 176 oz. 1 = 44 oz. wt. of cover. (4 X 16 oz.) — 44 oz. = 20 oz., wt. of second cup. 9. (18)^ + (16)- = 549. (9)2 =- 81. 549 + 81 = 630. June 1900. 1. $125 = cost of horse. f of $125 = $100. $100 = 4 times cost of harness. $25 = cost of harness. 2. 3 — = A's part of work. 7 = B's part of work. — = 12 da. 7 4 da. — = 28 da. A. 7 = 12 da. 10 1 — 3 da. 7 — = 21 da. B. 7 B. 7000 gr. = 1 pound Avoirdupois. 14000 gr. = 2 pounds. 480 gr. = 1 oz. Troy. 14O00 H- 480 = 29,1 ounces. 291 X $16 = $466,661, selling price. $220 X 2 = $440, cost. $466.66f — $440 = $26.66|, gained. 4. Amt. of $1 for 3 mo. at 7 per ct. = $1,021 /630 = = 25.09. Ans. Let 3 3 - = son's share. then 1 3 = wife's share. and 1 9 = daughter's share. 3 1 19 3 1 — + 3 3 9 9 9 9 13 — of 9 : sons share = entire estate. 13 — of son's share = $6591. $3468 -V $1.02| = $3388.922 ent worth. pres- — of son's share = $507, daugh- 9 ter's share. 173 ' 10 — Continued. 1 3 — or — of son's share = $1521, 3 9 wife's share. 3 9 — or — of son's share = $4563, 3 9 son's share. Sept. 1900. 1. 4 3 $41.25. — = $165.00. 4 2. 16f per ct. = $300, gain. 100 per ct. = $1800, cost. Ans. 3. $1 + .00125 = $1.00125. Int. on $1 at 6 per ct. for 2 mo. 3 da. = .0105. $1.00125 — .0105 = .99075. $450 -^ .99075 = $454.20. Ans. 4. Int. on $1000 for 3 yrs. 4 mo. 15 da. at 1 per ct. = $33.75. 168.75 -f- 33.75 = 5. Hence rate is 5 per ct. 5. (5)^ X 3.1416 = 78.54 sq. ft, area of circ. plot.- 16 X 78.54 = 1256.64 sq. ft., area of similar circ. plot. 1256.64 -^ 3.1416 = 400, square of radius. ViOO' = 20 ft. radius. 2 X 20 =^ 40 ft. diameter. Ans. 6. 100 per ct. = C's. 110 per ct. = A's. 132 per ct. = B's. 132 per ct. = 100 per ct. + $128. 32 per ct. = $128. 100 per ct. = $400 = C's. 110 per ct. = $440 = A's. 132 per ct. = $528 = B's. 7 jj X side of square, in feet = no. boards required for one side. 4 X ^ X side of sq., in feet = no. boards required to enclose square. area i3 x side of square 43560 Area = (31680)= = 1,003,622,400 sq. ft. = 23,040 A. Ans. 8. Ratio is 2. 2'^ = 2097152. 2097152 X .01 = $20971.52. 20971.52— .01 = $20971.51. Ratio 2 less 1 = 1. 20971.51 -^ 1 = $20971.51 9. 150 is first term. 3.207136 X 150 = 481.0704, last term. 1.06 is ratio. 481.0704 X 1 .06 — 150 1.06 — LO. 2045 = . 2025 9900 ■-" »pt>t7t70.yJLU'i, 1 sum of series. Ans. 45 20 45 20— -= + 99 100 9900 9 — Ans. 44 L. 8 — of A's : 19 4 = — of B's. 9 1 — of A's -- 19 1 = — of B's. 18 19 = — of B's. -- 19 19 = — of B's. 18 19 — = A's 18 18 — = B's. 18 37 — = 2553 18 1 — = 69. 18 19 — = $1311 18 ., A's. 19 — = $1242, B's. For one acre contains 43,560 sq. ft. . •. side of square = 31,680 ft. 18 2 — yds. 1 yd. wide = 6 — oz. 4 2 26 1 yard 1 yard wide = — oz. 9 174 2 — Continued. 3 83 26 20 — yds. 1 yd. wide = = — X — oz. 4 4 9 3 2 20 — yds. 1 — yd. wide 4 3 83 26 5 49 = — X — X — = 99 — ounces. 4 9 3 54 3. $49.56 — $2850 = $2106, cost of thirteen at $12 more eacli. $12 X 13 = $156. $2106 — $156 = $1950, cost of thir- teen, at price of ones bought. $1950 H- 13 = $150, cost of one at price ones bought. $2850 H- 150 = 19 horses. Ans. 4. Cube root of 15625 = 25. Bach edge of equiv. cube is 25 ft. Each surface is 625 sq. ft. Cube has 6 faces. 6 X 625 = 37.50 sq. ft. Ans. 5. 120 per ct. ^ $480, selling price of first. 100 per ct. = $400, cost of first. 80 per ct. = $480, selling price of second, 100 per ct. = $600, cost of second. $400 + $600 ^ $1000, cost of both. $480 + $480 = $960, selling price of both. $1000 — 960 = $40 = loss. $40 -^ $1000 = 4 per ct. = loss. 6. 5 per ct. — 2 per ct. = 3 per ct. = $315. 100 per ct. = $10,500. 5 per ct. of $10,500 = $525. $10500 — $525 = $9975. Ans. 7. One pound of gold = 5760 grains (Troy). One pound of lead = 7000 grains (Av.) One ounce of gold = 5760 -^ 12 = 480 grains. One ounce of lead = 7000 -f- 16 = 437^ grains. 480 gr. — 4371/2 gr. = 42i^ grains. Grold 42^ grains. Ans. 8. Int. for 78 da. on sum unpaid = Int. 15 da. sum paid. (Int. on $1 for one da. at 5 per ct.= •GO^L) 78 15 26 5 — X sum unpaid = — x sum paid. 24 72 1 5 — X sum unpaid = — x sum paid. 24 024 24 5 — X sum unpaid = — x sum paid. 24 26 26 Let — = sum unpaid + sum paid=$100 26 — = $19.23, paid Nov. 7. 26 21 — = $80.77, paid Aug. 20. Ans. 26 9. 20in^ X 5236 = 4188.8 cu. in., contents of solid sphere 20 in. in diameter. 4188.8 -H 10 = 418.88 cu. in., con- tents of given hollow sphere. 4188.8 cu. in. — 418.88 cu. in. = 3769.92 cu. in., contents of a solid sphere that hollow will contain. 3769.92 cu. in. -~ .5236 = 7200, cube of diameter. V7200 = 19.309+ in. diameter. 20 in. — 19..309 in. == .691 in., thicliness of shell. 10. 15= in. X 3.1416 = 706.86 sq. in. area of grindstone. 706.86 sq. in. -^ 3 == 235.62 sq. in., area each must grind off. 1235.62 Y3.I4I6 8.659-1- in. radius central area. of 8.659 X 2 = 17.32-f in. diameter of central area, and share of 3d man. V 1235.62 X 2 sum unpaid = — x sum paid 72 = 12.247+ in. radius 3.1416 of central and middle areas. 12.247+ X 2 = 24.494+ 24.494+ in. diameter of central and middle areas. 24.494 — 17.32 = 7 174 in. share of 2nd man. i 175 10 — Continued. 5. (a) West. (b) 4 hrs. 30 min. dif. in time. 30 — 24.494+ = 5.506 in. share of 15 • 1st man. 07° 30', or 07i/^°, dif. in longitude. Nov 1901 ^^ miles x 67% = 3875 mi. Ans. 1. See 1, Sept. 1901, 1st grade. ^ g . j ^g„Q . 2. The seventh man gains on the ^ ^ff ^ Vt f W -. + ^ first 01/4 miles per hr.; on the A' ?f ^ J'/^P*" ^^%^'^ f/^,'^^'. '* i:' . g_ Depends upon rate. Not given. second 5 miles; the third 3ii por method, see 9 Sept. 1.5900, 2d the fourth 3; the fifth, 1%; the q^ 3(J grade. sixth, 1. " . 120 9. 1 : X :: V120 : V6400. = no. hrs. required to pass 1st x = 3.76 in. Ans. 6% man once. 10 See" 10, Sept. '99, 1st grade. 120 =: no. hrs. required to pass 2nd 5 man once. 1. 108 bu. at .65 a bu. = .$70.20. 120 -55 + .75 = $1.30. = no. hrs. required to pass 3rd $70.20 h- $1.30 = 54 bushels. SU man once. 2- ^^ ^^ ^i'f: ^^^P- P^P^ ^^ts into cis- ^2 tern 240 gals. 19Q In 1 hr. sup. pipe lets into cistern =^ no. hrs. required to pass 4th , ""f ga s. ^ , , . ^ 3 man once ^^P* P^P^ ^^^^ ^^*° cistern ■ : I ^ 144 gals. In 1 lir. dis. pipe lets out of cistern 120 no. hrs. required to pass 5th gals. 1% man once. 120 144 = 9, no. hrs required. 40 — 24 Ans. := no. hrs. required to pass 6th 1 man once. o / .->o/ o ^ o 120 ' '^ ' ^ L. C. M. of above intervals = [ ~ "^ ^7^, ^ T "^ '^'^' j_ ( 4| 414 ) 9 13 = 1440 hrs. Hence 120 da. = .677857+. Ans. ■3. 1 bu. == 21.50.4 cu. In. 4. 80 x 3.1416 = 251.328 rd, length 5 bu. = 5 X 2150.4 = 10752 cu. in. of wire fence. 1 qt_. liquid measure = 57.75 cu. 2.51..328 -^ 4 = 62.832 rd., length of in. one side of square field. 10752 ^ 57.75 - 186 ^^ quarts (li- (62.832)^ = 3947.860224, area in quid measure). sq. rds. 186;v X .10 = $18. 61^^^, selling 3947.860224 ^ 160 = 24.67412.51+A. price Ans. 5 bu. at $3 per b_u. = $1.5, cost. ^ |r/o0%'= ?00%' ^'''" $18.61,\- — $15 — $3.61 1'i-, gain. i^^_ ^^ ^ ^,,. ^ p^^, ^^_ ^^^ 33 ^^^^ ^^ $3.61 i^j. -f- $15 = 243^ per ct. Ans. ()Q32 ^•5 X '370 'oz '''■ 16S60 ^ ''''• ''• *1 00t-.003t = $1.00259. L'of -T5.T5'ori'^25 or %. . $550 x ^l.Ooko = $551.42. Ans. 16860 oz. X Vi = 4215 oz. < . S^ o, June 1900, 1st grade. 4215 oz. ^ 16 oz. = 263tV lb. 8. V5 : V20 : : 100.44 : x 263j-V lb. at 5 cts. per lb. = $13.17 t\" 9 252.96 gr. x 7.21 = 1823.8416 gr., Ans. wt of cu. in. of iron. 6' X .5236 = 113.0976 cu. in., vol. of ball. 1823.8416 gr. x 113.0976 = 206272- .10774016 gr., wt. of ball. 7000 gr. = 1 lb. .\ 206272.10774016 gr. -^ 7000 gr. = 29.4674+ lbs. Ans. 10. 115^, 128 , 134% 231 385 539 231 385 539 G. C. D. of ft., ft., ft, 2 3 4 77 = — ft. 12 5 6— ft. 12 170 Amt. of $.360 for 3 mo. 3 da. at S per cent. = $365.58. From July 15, 1902 to Sept. 27, 1902 = 74 da. Int. on $365.58 for 74 da. at 6 per cent. = $4.51. $365.58 — $4.51 = $361.07, pro- ceeds. Ans. 4. Dec. 15, 1891 due $300. Jan. 1, 1892 due $750. Apr. 15, 1892, due $400. Jan. 10, 1892, due $300. $300 750 X 17 = 12750 400 X 121 = 48400 300 X 26 == 7800 115y2 ft. + 1281 ft. + 134% ft. = 378j?3 ft. Perimeter. 378xV ft. -4- 6r\ ft. = 59, no. of rails each strand. 59 rails x 7 = 413 rails. Ans. Explanatory: In order to lap six inches at each end, length of each rail = Qj\ ft. + 1 ft. = 7 ft. 5 in. However, each rail •covers only 63^ ft- of perime- ter. Therefore, perimeter di- vided by 6yV and not 1{\, gives number of rails required fov fence to be one rail high. Sept. 1902. 1. Amt. of $1 for 2 yr. 6 mo. at 6 per ct. = $1.15. $560 -4- $1.15 = $486.96, present worth. Int. on $560 at 6 per cent, for 2 yr. 6 mo. = $84. $560 — $84 = $476 = proceeds. $486.96 — $476- = $10.96. Ans. 2. 400 -^ 125 peT ct. = $320 = cost of 1st lot. $400 H- 75 per ct. = $533.33^, cost of 2d lot. $320 + 533.331 = 853.331, cost of lots. 400 + 400 = 800.00, selling price. $853.33^ — $800 = $53.33 1 = loss. $53,331 ^ $853.33-1- = 61/1 per ct. loss. Ans. 3. 3 mo. 3 da. after June 24, 1902 = Sept. 27, 1902. 1750 $68950 68950 da. -f- 1750 = 39 i days. Dec. 15, 1891 + 40 days = Jan. 24,. 1892, av. time. Ans. Last debt becomes due earlier than any other, hence date it be- becomes due is used as the^ standard or focal date. 5. Int. on $100 for 21 yrs. at 6 per cent. = $126, last term. $126 + — X 20 = $1260, total int. or 2 sum of terms. $100 X 21 = $2100, principal. $2100 + $1260 = $3360, amount. 1 = 1st term. 2 ^ ratio. 21 = number of terms. 2-1 = 2.097,152, ratio to power equal no. of terms. (.01 X 2097152) — .01 Hence, $20,971.51, sum of terms. $20,971.51 — $3360 = $17611.51, loss. Ans. . 1,400.000 X .002 = $2800, annual 12„500 X .08 = .$1000, interest. 2800 — 1000 = 1800, annual re- serve fund. 12.500 -T- 1800 = 6 yrs. (approxi- mately). Ans. Note: If the $2800 is applied to debt each year, time required is approximately 6 yrs. 7. See 9, Sept. 1900, 1st grade. 8. (a) 1 1 2i 7 28 7 3 ^ 9 ^ _ ^ 2' 3 4 2' 3' 12 G. C. D. of 7, 28, 7 = 7. L. C. M. of 2, 3, 12 = 12. 1 1 21 7 .:. G. C. D. of 3—, 9—, — = — . 2 3 4 12 6 First clock makes 1 beat in — sees. 5 28 Sec. cloclf makes 1 beat in — secss. 25 17 Third clock makes 1 beat in — sees. 15 L. C M. of numerators, 6, 28 and 17 = 1428. G. CD. of denominators 5, 25 and 15 = 5. 177 9. Perimeter = 80 ft. Slant ht. = 100 ft. 80 ft. X 50 = 4000 sq. ft., or 444| sq. yds., lateral surface of stee- ple. 1 franc x 444 1 = 444 f francs, cost. 1 franc = $.193. 444| francs = $.193 x 444f = $85. 777 1 Ans. 10. 3.1416 X 3 X % = 7.0686, area lower end. 3.1416 X 1 X 14 = .7854 area up- per end. 7.0686 XX .7854 = 55.5167844, prod. of areas. .-. L. C. M. of fractions = =285,^ sees. Ans. 1428 V 55.5167844 = 7 4509+, sq. root of prod. 40 1 — = 13 — , one third of alt. 3 3 Hence (7.0686 + .7854 + 7.4509) x 1.^1 = 204.0653+ cu. ft., vol. of pillar. 3' X .5236 = 14.1372 cu. ft., vol. of ball. (204.0653 + 14.1372)4501^ = 98300- .22625 lbs. Ans. Sept. '94- 1. Algebra is that branch of mathe- matics which treats of the rela- tions of numbers as expressed , The degree of an equation depends on the highest exponent of the unknown quantity in the equa- tion. 2. (a» — b«) = (a* + b*) (a^ — b*) = (a* + b*) (a^ + b=) (a^* — b^) = (a* + lb*) (a^ + b^) (a + b) (a — b) 3. x^ + 3xy -h y'' — 1 -4- X + y — 1 = X- — xy -I- X + y- + y + 1. (Terms arranged acording to de- scending powers of x). 4 (a). (x -I- y)m (x + y)o = (X + y)m-l-o =r (x + y)m I? [J 178 ALGEBRA. G. — Continued x=— 2x+l|x='— 1 X- -111 (X + y)o = (x + y)m (x + y)m a" 16 V— v= Equate values of x^ 120 16 v+1 V — V- 120v— 120v- = 16V+16 — 120v^-+104v = 10 Divide by 8, 15v=— 13v = —2 Complete the square 900V-— 780v+(13)-" = —120+169 = 49 30v— 13 = 1-7 30v = 6 V : = — or — 5 3 1 If V 5 X y ^ vx 5 Subst. in (1), x^ x=- 5 ■ = 120 6 — Continued 5X-+X- = 600 6x= = 600 x^lOO X = 10 Large number. Subst. value of x in (1), 100+lOy = 120 lOy = 20 y ^ 2 Smaller number 7. X = Money A had at first 9800 — X =^ Money B had at first. = A's money now 6 183 10 — Continued y = number of yds. B ran in one second. 1760 1672 — — , = number of sees. A ran XX in first and second trials respectively 1716 1760 , = number of sees. B ran, y y in first and second trials respectively Then 1716 - 1760 =51 (1) y X 9800— X (9800— X) Hence, = B's money now X = (980O— x) — 6 30x— 5x = 294000 — 30x +6x 49x = 235200 X = 4800 9800— X 5 — 58800 — =: 4000 = Amt. each has 6 now Let X : 100— X larger number - smaller number Hence Vx+VlOO— x = 14 By squaring, x+2Vx(V100- +100— x -X) 2\/100x— x'^ = 96 9 VlOOx— x^ = 48 By squaring lOOx — x' = 2304 x= — lOOx = —2304 Completing square, x^ — 100x+(50)' = — 2304+2500 = 196 Extracting root, x — 50 = ±14 X := 64, larger number. 100 — X' = 36 smaller number. (a) (X— rj (x— r^) (X— 5) (x— 2) = x= — 7x+10 = or x^ — 7x = — 10 l=arn-J Substitute. 192 =. 24r3 (b) r^ = 8. ■ r = 2 Hence series = 24. [48, 96], 192. 10. Let X = number of yds. A ran in one second 1672 1760 and = = — 75 (2) X y Multiply (1) by 19. 33440 32604 + 969 1500 X y Multiply (2) by 20, 33440 35200 X y 2596 Add, = —531 y y =4f 1760 = 360 sees. = 6 min. Substitute value of y in (1), X = 5Jf 1760 = 300 sees. = 5 min 513 June 1896. 1. (a) See 1(a), Sept. 94. (b) Quantity is anything that can be measured or compared. An. algebraic quantity is a quanti- ty expressed in algebraic lan- guage. (c) The root of a number is one of the equal factors of that num- ber. (d) A radical is the indicated root of number; as Vab (e) See 1(c), Sept. '94. 184 2 a^— b* = (a-+b=) (a^— b=) ==(a°+b-) (a+b) (a — b) a«— b" = (a^+b^) (a=— b^) = (a+b) (a= — ab+b^) (a — b) (a-+ab+b') .:. G. C. D. = (a+b) (a— b) = a^"— b^ 3. a^— b^ = (a+b) (a— b) a*— b* = (a-+b-) (a=— .b-) = (a^+b^) (a+b) (a— b) af— 2ab+b2 — (a— b) (a— b) .-. L. C. M. = (a+b) (a— b) (a— b) (a=+b=) 4. Let Then, number XX XX — + — > — +• — 6 5 6 8 20x+24x > 20x+15x . (1— x)" = (1)."— 6[(l) = (x)]+ 15[(l)Mx)==] — 20(l)Mx)^ +15[(l)='(x)*]— 6[(l)(x)'^] +x« = 1— 6x+15x=— 20x5+15x^— 6xs+x« . X = hundred's digit. y = ten's digit z ^ unit's digit. lOOx+lOy+z = number x+y+z = 9 (1) lOOx+lOy+z = 42(x+y) 58x— 32y+z = (2) z = 2(x+y) — 2x— 2y+2z = 0. (3) Multiply (1) by (2), 2x+2y+2z = 18 (4) Add (4) and (3), z = 6 Subs, value of z in (1), x+y = 3 (5) Subs, value of z in (2), 58x— 32y = — 6 (6) Divide (6) by 2, 29x— 16y = — 3 (7) Multiply (5) by 16, 16x + 16y =- 48 Add (8) and (7). x = 1 Subs, value of x in (51, y = Therefore the number is 126. ( i/x -/y ) ' X r t/x1 r Vy^ x= y== + 2b=c-+1520 a«b^c''+22.680a«b^c*+20,412a*b=c' +10,206a=b''c«+2,187b^c^ . V6x— 2 4V6x— 9 a b — c a=+b-+c=+2ab+2bc+2ac a+b+c = a+b+c X = rate per hour boy must ride (20 min or ^ hr. = time boy rides. Then distance boy rides (50 min. or ^ hr. = time man walks) 5 20 Then 4 x — or — = distance he 6 6 walks V6x+2 4V6X+6 (V6x— 2) (4V6X+6) = 24x— 2V6x— 12 (4V6x— 9) (V6X+2) = 24X—V 6x^18 24x— 2\76x— 12 = 24x— V6x^l8 V6x == 6 Ox = 36 X = 6 9. Let X = number spaces hr. hand moves over, and, x+45 = number spaces min. hand moves over. (Min. hand moves 12 times as fast as hour hand). Hence, x+45 = 12x — llx = —45 1 II 1 x+45 = 49 — 11 . •. 49^!,- mins. past 3 o'clock. 10 Let X = A's stock 1000— x = B's Hence, x 20 2x == 20 X = 10 Therefore boy must ride at speed of ten miles per hr. 3 . ( a ) m^ — ^n'' = ( m — n ) ( m-+mn+n=' ) (b) a^+n' = (a+n) (a^ — an+n=) (c) a«— b^ = (a^+b^) (a*— b^) = ( a*+b* ) " ( a=+b= ) ( a^— b= ) = (a*+b*) (a=+b2) (a+b) (a— b) (d) p*+p^+l = (p*+2pHl) — p= = ( p^+1 ) =— p=^ = ( p=+l+p ) (p^+1— p ) (e) n^ — 2no+o- = (n — o) (n — o) (a) G. C. June '97. D. = x=— 3. See 3, 4. (b) (Divide each expression by G-. C. D. just found) Then x*— 2x8+6x— 9 = (x^— 3) (x=— 2x+3) 6x*— 4x='— 1 6x=+l 2x— 6 = (x^— 3) (6x2— 4x+2) Therefore L. C. M. = (x=— 3) (x^— 2x +3) (6x2— 4x+2) 187 ■5. X = A's hits 2x ^ B's hits 15 — X := A's puts 15 — 2x = B's outs Hence, loxx = Ij (15— 2x) 1G5— 22x 15— X = 105— 7x = 105— 22x 15x == 60 X = 4 2x == 8 15— X = 11 15— 2x ^ 1 6. (2a^+4b'')' = (2a2)^+7(2a2)«(4b3) +21 ( 2a- ) ^ ( 4b« ) =+35 ( 2a= ) * ( 4bs ) " +35 ( 2a^' ) M 4b^ ) *+21 ( 2a^ ) = ( 4b« ) ^ +7(2a=) (.4b^)''+(4b=')^ = 128a'*+l,792a^=b^+10,752^0b''+35,840 a'b»+71,680a«b"+86,016a*b^5+57.- 344a=b^^+16,384b2^ (7) (X— y)« X (x+y)* = (X— y)^- X (x+y)'= =V(x— y)8xV(x+y)' = V(x— y)« (x+y)» x— 1 2 2+ Vx 2 X = 3 Vx xVx— 2 = 3Vx xVx— 3Vx = 2 Multiply by Vx, x=— 3x = 2Vx Squaring, x* — 6x^+9x= = 4x X*— Gx-VOx^^- 4x = (X— 4) (X— 1) fx— 1) (X) = Hence, x = 4 or 9. 1 1 =3 (1) X y 1 1 =21 (2) x= y^ Divide (2) by (1), 1 1 _ + _ = 7 (3) X y Add (3) and (1), 1 1 X y 1 1 'x y 2 — = 10 X 1 X = 5 Substitute value of x in (1) 1 1 1 __ q 5 y 1 5 = 3 y 5y — 1 = 3y 2y = 1 y = — 2 10. 8x = length of field, in rods. 5x = breadth of field in rods. 8x = number dollars paid per acre. 26x = number rods around field. 13 x 26x= number dollars paid for field. 8x X 5x or 40x^ =: area of field in rods. 40x2 160 = area of field in acres. (40x= ) Hence, 8x( ) = 13 x 26x = 338x (160) (x=) 8x (— ) = 338x (4) 8x» = 338x 188 10 — Continued 8x» = 1352X. Divide bv x, Sx^ = 1352 x= = 169 X = 13 8x = 104, length of field 5x = 65, breadth of field. June 1898. 1. (1) See 1, Sept. '94. (2) axbxc; abc; a-b:c. (3) — ; a-^b b (4) 6x; bx; xn. (5) , — 1 x* or Vx'; a+b (4) 6x; bx; xn. 2. (1) X = a+b (2) x< a+b (3)x > a+b (4) X d= y (5) X > y (6) X 7 + 9—7—10 —5—10 +5 +10 Hence (x+5) a factor. Determine first two factors by syn- thetic division as per above. 5. (a) H. C F. = 2x— 3. See 3, June '97. (b) 2x=+5x— 12 = (2x— 3) (x+4) 6x=— 13X+6 = (2x— 3) (3x— 2) 6x-— X— 12 = (2x— 3) (3x+4) L. C. M. = (2x— 3) (x+4) (3x— 2> (3x+4) m — n m — n m + n m+ n m — n m n m — n m — n m ; n m + n m — n m(m^ — n) + n(m+n) (m+n) (m — n) m- — mn+n^+mn Therefore, l-^- m== — n^ m^— n^ (m + n) (m — n) 1 X m=^+n^ m^+n^ 189 14 7 1 — + — = 4— X y 3 21 6 — — - — = -- 1 X y Multiply (1) by 6, 84 42 78 — + ■ — = — X y 3 (1) Simplify, 240x = 2100 (2) 70 X ^ — or 8 ;%, amt. all can earn in one day 70 50 20 = — or $214, amt. C can 8 8 8 earn in one day. Multiply (2) by 7, 147 42 = 7 X y Add (3) and (4), 231 99 = — = 33 X 3 33x = 231 X = 7 Substitute in (1), (3) (4) 69 i 12 72 — or $3, amt. B. can 24 earn in one day 3 1 4 2 1 = $3 — amt. A can earn 4 in one day 1 1 X ' X+V2 — X- X— \/2— x^ 2 14 7 7 y 1 4— 3 9. Clearing, 2x— 2 V 2 — x=+2x+2 V 2 — x^ = x^— 2x+x3— 2xH6 = 2x(3— x^) = X = or 5V3 10. X = number sheep bought 468 = cost of each X 50 7 7 y " 3 7y = 21 y = 3 X = amt. all together can earn in one day. = Amt. A and B. can earn in 1 day 468 + 1 ^ selling price 69 — = Amt. A and C can earn in 1 12 day X — 8 = number sold. (468 ) Hence, (x— 8) ( H)= 468+12 ( X ) Simplify, x^— 20x = 3744 Com. square, x-— 20x+100 = 3744-t-lOO = 3844 X— 10 := t62 x = 72, number of sheep bought 55 — = Amt. B and C can earn in 1 Sent '98 10 day V . . 50 69 55 1 1 == Twice amt. earned 8 12 10 in 1 day by all. That is, 50 69 55 2x == — + — + — 8 12 10 . When a number consists of the product of two or more num- bers, each of these numbers is called a factor of the product. Ex. 8a'b = 2x2x2xaxaxaxb An algebraic equation is a state- ment in symbols that two ex- pressions stand for the same number. (Ex. 3x+2=13) 190 1 — Continued. A known factor of a product pre- fixed to another factor to show the number of times factor is taken is called a coefficient. Literal coefficients are expressed by letters. (Thus, in abx, ah is the coefficient of x) A numerical exponent is a figure written at the right of and a little above a number to indi- cate how many times the root or factor is taken. (Thus a- denotes that a is taken twice as a factor). If the product of two numbers is equal to 1, each of the numbers is called the reciprocal of the other. (Thus, the reciprocal of a b b a ba — is — , for — X — =: — =1) b a a b ab The radical sign V indicates that a 3 root is to be found. Thus, V27 means that the cube root of 27 is to be taken. The number symbol written above the radi- cal sign is called the index of the root. The sign >■ read is greater than, indicates that the number pre- ceding sign is greater than the number following it. Thus 4+3 >■ 6, means that 4-1-3 is greater than 6. The sign <;, read is less than, indicates that the number preceding sign is less than number following it. Thus 4+3 < 8 means that 4+3 is less than 8. The sign . •. stands for the word "therefore"' or "hence." The sign or stands for the words "and so on." The signs of aggregation are the bar I, the vinculum — , the pa- renthesis ( ), the bracket [ ], and the brace ^ I.. a| Thus each of the expressions, b|, a+b, (a+b), [a+b], ^a+bl,, sig- nifies that a+b is to be treated as a single number. 2. (1) An alffebraic term is an expres- sion the parts of which are not separated by the sign + or — . (2) The signs + and — indicate oper- ations between terms, while the signs X and -^ indicate opera- tions within a term. (3) The expression a-bx4H-2a is one term. (4) Monomial: 4xy; binomial: 3x+2y; trinomial: 3a+b — c; a polyno- mial is an algebraic expression consisting of two or more terms; as, 3a+2b+2x+y. (5) Terms which have the same com- bination of letters are called similar terms; as, 4ab-, — 9ab-,. are similar terms. 3. (a+2b+c) (a- — 2abd) -f- \/3b-c— (a-+b) == (5+4+3) (5-— 20) -- V3 (2^x3) — (5^+2) = 12x5 H- V36— 27 60 -= — = 20. 3 4. x^ xy^ y3 — + — + — 4 72 12 x^ x-y xy2 4 6 8 x-y xy2 y^ 6 9 12 x=y xy= y» 6 9 12 x= xy y2 2 3 4 - Ans. . x^ — y^ = (x*+y*) (x* — y*) = (x*+y^) (x-"xy=) (x2— y=) = (x^+yM (x-+y=) (x+y) (x m" — n'' = (m^+n^) (m" — n^) = (m+n) (m- — mn+n=) (m — n) (m'^+mn+n-) a^— 10a=+9 = (a=— 9) (a=— 1) = (a+3) (a— 3) (a+1) (a— 1) y> 191 5 — Continued. 81x^— 72x-y-+lGj'* = (9x^— 4y^) (9x-— 4j-) = (3x+2y) (3x— 2y) (3x+2y) (3x — 2y) x' — 2x'* — 16x-+2xfl5 = (X— 1) (x+1) (x+3) (X— 5) By synthetic division. ( a — b » ( (1 + ) ^ (1 ( a +b) ( a— b) a +b) a — b 1 + a+b Ka+b) + (a — b) a+b a+b+a — b 2a a+b a+b a — b l(a+b) — (a — b) a+b a+b a+b — a+b 2b a+b a+b 2a 2b 2a a+b -i- = X a+b a+b a+b 2b 2a a = — = — 2b b X = B's age seven yrs, ago. 3x = A's age seven yrs. ago. x+14 = B's age seven yrs. hence. 3x+14 — A's age seven yrs. hence. Hence, 3x+14 ^ 2 (x+14) = 2x+28 X = 14 x+7 = 21, B 's age now. 3x+7 = 49, A's age now. 8. 2Vx— V4x— 11 = 1 Divide (2) by (1), x— y = 5 (3) Square (3), x=— 2xy+y^ = 25 (4) Subtract (4) from (1), 3xy = 150 xy == 50 (5) Add (5) and (1), x-=+2xy+y^ = 225 Extract the root, x+y = $15 (6) Add (0) and (3), 2x = 20 or — IQ X = 10 or —5 Substitute in (3), y == 5 or — 10 (Formula) 1 = a+(n — l)d Substituting, 1 l+(n— 1)1 1 = n n (Formula) s = — (a+1 ) 2 n Substitute value of 1, s = — (a+n) 2 an+n^ 9870 — 2 n^+an = 19740 Substitute value of a, n-+n = 19740 Completing square, 4n-+4n+l = 78960+1 = 78961 Extracting root, 2n+l = $281 2n = 280 n = 140 Therefore 140 days are required. June 1899. 1. (a+b)= = a-+2ab+b- (2) (a— b)- = a^— 2ab+b= (3) (a+b) (a— b) = a=— b^ (4) a=+b^ a+b a=+b^ a+b a^^ab+b^ — = a*— a='b+a2b---ab»+b* Squaring, 4x — 4Vx^ — llx+4x — 11 = 1 an+bn is divisible by a+b if n is odd, and by neither a+b nor a — b if n is even. Transposing. — 4v'4x^ — llx = 12— 8x Dividing by - = 2x— 3 (5) a- Squaring, 4x2 — -^-^ x=9 V 4x2— llx 4x=— 12X+9 xr+xy+y- = 175 875 (1) (2) a — b a*— b^ a+b = a=+ab+b^ = a^+a^b+ab^+b* = a^ — a^b+ab^ 192 1 — Continued = a*+a'b+a=b=+ab'+b* a — b an — bn is divisible by a — b if n is odd, and by both a+b and a — b if n is even. 2. x^— y« = (x^+y*) (x*— y*) = (x*+y^) (x^+y^) (x=— y^) = (x*+y*) (x=+y^) (x+y) (x— y) m" — n" = (m'+n^) (m^ — n^) = (m+n) (m- — mn+n) (m^ — mn+ n^) (m^+mn+n") x«— 64 = (x^+S) (x3— 8) = (x+2) (x=— 2x+4) (X— 2) (xH2x+4). X*— 2x='— 16X-+2X4-15 = (X— 1) (x+1) (x+3) (X— 5) See 5, Sept. '98. x'+7x''+9x"— 7x— 10 = (x+5) (x+2) (x+1) (X— 1) See 4, June '98. 3. H. C. P. = x+1. See 3, June '97. x5_2x^— x= = (x+1) (x^— x^— x=) x^+2x=+2x+l = (x+1) (x^x+l) Therefore L. C. M. = (x+1) (x*— x^' — x^) (x=+x+l) (Factors found by first finding H. C. F. of the expressions and then dividing each expression by this H. C. F., x+1.) x= + 20 + 96 x^— 8x— 20 x==+10x+lG X ' x2_15x+50 x' + lOx— 24 x=— 7x+10 (x+8) (x+12) (x— 10) (x+2) ~~ (X— 10) (X— 5) (x+12) (x— 2) (x+2) (x+8) Add (1) and (2), 2 — = a + b X x(a+b) = 2 2 a-tb Subtract (2) from (I), 2 — = a — b y ^ y(a— b) =2 2 a — b . Let v= first number. X = second. y = third. z = fourth. Then, v+2x+2y+2z = 46. (1) x+2v+2y+2z = 43. (2) y+2v+2x+2z = 41. (3) z+2v+2x+2v = 38. (4) Subtract (2) from (1), x=3+v. (5) Subtract (3) from (2), — x=2— y. (6) Add (6) and (5), y = 5+v. (7) Subtract (4) from (1), z=8+v. (8) Substitute values of x, y ajid z res- pectively in (1), Then v+2(3+v)+2(5+v)+2(8+v) = 46, or V = 2. X = 3+v = 5. y = 5+v = 7. z = 8+v = 10. . 2v'3+3V2 (X— 5) (X— 2) (x+8) (x+2) (x+2) (x+8) = (X— 5)(x— 2) (X— 5)(x— 2) 1 1 — + — = a X y 1 1 X y (1) 3V3+4\/2 (2V3+3V2) (3V3— 4V2) (8V3+4V2) (3V3— 4V2) 18+V6— 24 6— V6 27—32 5 , (X— rj (X— r^) = 0. Substitute, (x— 2+\/3) (x— 2- = 0. -V3) (2) or, X- — 4x+l = 0. or, x^ — 4x = — 1, Equation required. 193 X = number lbs. bought. GOOD = cost per lb., In cents. X 6600 + 1 X cost per lb. cent rise. after one 0600 6600 = number lbs. for same money, at advanced + 1 price. G600 Hence, 50. 6600 + 1 6600X 6600+x 50. 6G00x = X-+6550X — 3.30.000. X-— 50x = 330,000. x^— 50X+625 = 330,000+625 = 330,625. X— 25 = ^575. x = 600. (c) See 1, Sept. '96. (d) The degree of a term is the num ber of its literal factors. Thus 4a^ and 4abc are each of the third degree. (e) A quadratic equation is one which contains the square of the un- known, but no higher, power. 2. (a) Additions and multiplications may be performed in any order. (Thus, a+b = b+a and ab = ba.) (b) The terms of an expression, or the factors of a product, may be grouped in any manner. (Thus, cx(axb)=ax(bxc)^bx(axc.) (c) The sum of several numbers mul- tiplied by a given number equals the sum of the products of the several numbers multiplied by the given number. (Thus, a(b+c+d) = ab+ac+ad.) The sum of several numbers divided by a given number equals the sum of the quotients of the several numbers divided by the given number. b+c+d b ( Thus, c d + — + — ) 10. X = length of shorter side. 3x = sum of diagonal and longer side. y = longer side. Then, 3x— y = diagonal. Hence, y — x =4. (1) (The square described upon the hy- potenuse is equivalent to the sum of the square upon the other two sides.) Hence (3x — y)^ = x'+y^. 9x"— 6xy+y^ = x^+y^ 8x^— 6xy = 0. (2) Divide (2) by 2x, 4x— 3y = 0. (3) Multiply (1) by 4, 4y— 4x = 16. (4) Add (3) and (4), y = 16. Substitute value of y in (1), 16 — X = 4. X = 12. Therefore the area of the rectangle ^ 12x16 = 192 sq. yds. Sept. 1899. IV (a) See 2(e), Sept. 1895. (b) See 2(e), Sept. 1895. (d) The exponent of the product of two or more powers of a number is equal to the sum of the expo- nents of the given powers. (Thus, a-xa==a8-l-^ = a") . 3. 5x — ^5y— [X— (.3z — 3y)+2z — (.5x — 2y — z)] V - = 5x— 5y+[x — (3z — 3y)+2z — (5x — 2y — z)] = 5x — 5y+x — (3z — 3y)+2z — (53^ — 2y — z) . - = 5x — 5y+x — 3z+3y+2z — 5x-f- 2y+z ^ X. 4. See 4, Sept. 1898. 5. The greatest common divisor of numerator and denominator is found to be, x^ — 5x+4.,__ Therefore, . - . . 2x^— 13x=+23x— 12 2x— 3 7x^— 33x2+18x+8 - 7x+2 -m) ( m 1 ) m ) (1+m 1 — m^) in(l+m) (1+m) (.1— ni=) 1 (l+m)(m=^— 1) in(l+m) m=+l m— 1 1— m in(m^ — m+1) m* — m''m 7. X = number days idle. m= — X = number days he worked. a+t» = loss each idle day. am = dollars received had he worked full time. (a+b)x = entire loss. Hence, am — (a+b)x = n. (a+b)x = am — n am — n X = a+b a+b am+bm— -am+n bm+n a+t ) a+b , Let X ^ numerator. y = ■ denominator. Then, X y : fraction. 2x Hence, y+2 1 or 2x— y=2. (1) and x+3 2y — or X — y= — 3. 2 (2) 9. 2 1 1 — + 1— + 1 2V3 3V2 "1 n SV 3 2V2 72 n \T 1 — + I— + 1 — 6V9 9VG 3V3 1 1 - 3 " |1 — 4V3 2V 2 Subtract (2) from (1), x = 5. Substitute value of x in (1), 10-y = 2. —y = —S. . ' X 5 Therefore, — = — . Required frac- y 8 tion. + 6V 9 9V G I 1 I- 2\/2 I 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I— x2+ I— x6— I— x3— I— x2— 3 = 6V9 9V3G V9 2V 4 = 2V2 + — V6 2 8 = V2 + — V6 2 -V3 — V2 — 3 -V3 10. X = greater number. y = smaller number. Then, x=+y- = 2xy+9 or x^+y^ — 2xy =9. (1) and, X- — y- = xy — 1 or x^ — y^ — xy = —1. (2) Rearrange (1), x= — 2xy+y^ = 9. Extract root, x — y = t3. (3) X = 3+y. Substitute value of x in (2), 9+Gy+y=— y-— (3+y)y = —1. — y=+3y = —10. y2_3y = 10. (4). Completing square. 9 9 49 y=— 3y^- = 104— = — 4 4 4 3 7 2 2 y = 5 (Same result is given by taking x = y— '3). Substitute value of y in (3), x = 8. 195 June, 1900. 1. (al See 2(e), Sept. '95. (b) See 1(e), Sept. '9(;!. (c) See 1(c), Sept. '94 (d) See Kd), June '9(3. (e) See l(j), Sept. '96. 2. x''— 2(;x-^+(>x-+5x— 1 := X-+5X — 1. 3. x' — 5xHl .x-+(a — c)x — ac = x-+ax — ex — ac. = x(x+a) — c(x-)-a). = (X— c) (x+a). . X y m n X y n m 1 Multiply (1) by — , n X y 2 mn n- n 1 Multiply (2) by — , m X y 1 (1) (2) (3) (4) mn m' m Subtract (4) from (3), y ^ _ J _ ^ n= m^ n m Clearing of fractions, . m^y+n=y = 2m^n — mn^ (5) y = mn ( 2m — n ) m-+n- Multiply (1) by — , m X y 2 m^ mn m 1 Multiply (2) by — , n X y 1 X X 2 1 Add,— + — = — + — m- n- m n Clearing of fractions, n'-x+m-x = 2mn-+m-n. mn ( m+2n ) m-+n- . X = ten's digit, y = units digit. lOx+y =^ number. lOxy+y = 4x+4y. (1) lOx+y+18 = lOy+x. Gx— 3y = 0. (3) X— y = — 2. (4) Multiply (4) by 3, 6x— 3y = (3) 3x— 3y = — 6 (5) (2) Subtract (5) from (3), 3x = 6. x = 2. Subst. value of x in (3), 12 — 3y = 0. — 3y = —12. y = 4- . •. number is 24. (). (2a=+b— c)* (2a^+[b— c])« = (2a^)='^-3(2a=^)•Mb-e<• +3(2a=) (b— c)^+(b— c)^ = 8a<'+12a*b— 12a*c+Gab-— 12a-bc +(Ja'c-4-b''— 3b-c+3bc-+c^ 7 a''+3a.'+t>a*+Ta='+Ga=+3a+lj a=+a+l a'' • ~ mn, n 3aHfia^+7a=' 3a"+3a*+ a^* 3a*^-Ga^+6a-+3a^-l 3a*+Ga-''+6a=+3a+l 3a*+3a=+a'= ' 3a*+6a='+3a2 3a-+3a+l 3a*+6aH6a=+3a+l 8. 18x=— 27x = 26. Multiply by 2, 36x^— 54x = 52. Com. square by adding (54)^ (9 )2 ( ) (9)^ (— ) = (— ), 36x^— ( ) + (— ) (12) (2) ( ) (2) 19G = 52 81 + — -- 4 289 4 (Ix — 9 2 17 2 Gx 2G — or —4. 13 2 X = — or . G 3 X ^ first number. X 2 = second number X 3 X- + = third number. X- X- — + — = 441. 4 9 36xH9x2+4x' 49x= = 15870 x^ = 324. X == 18 ( 1st = 15876 Lumber) 9 (2d number) . 6 (3d number.) -1 (1) Substitute values of X in 2, y = ±2 or ±V — -A Sept. 1900. 1. 4.3x^' 9 + — 36 16 x= + 2x 3 2 3 4 2x'' 3x- X- 2x 3 6 8 2 3 4 — 2x» 59x^' 9 6 72 16 — 2x^ 4x- 6x G 9 12 — 3x= 8 — 3x^ 8 6x 9 12 16 6x 9 12 16 a-x* — 2abx^+b-x'* — ^^a-y* +2aby* — b-y* — xMa- — 2ab+b") — y-(a- — 2ab+b=) = (X* — y*) (a-— 2ab+b-) == (x-+y-) (x+y) (X— y) (a— b) (a— b). ■ H. C. F. = x+1. See 3, June '97. 10. 3x^— 7y= xy = G. (2) Square (1), 9x*— 42x=y-+49y*=l (3) Square (2). xV° = 36. (4) Multiply (4) bv 84. 84xV = 3024. (5) Add (3) and (5), 9x''+42x^y-"+49y* = 3025. (6) Extract root 3x^+7 Y= == t55. (7). Add (1) and (7). 6x= = 54 or —56. X X— 1 x' — 1 — x(x— 1) -x=+x 1 X 1 X-- x(x— 1) (8) Let X ^ smaller. x+8 ^= larger. (1 1 ) (1 Then, 2(— + ) = 3(— ( x x+8 ) (X ( X+8+X ) ( x+8— x) 2 = 3 1 ) x+8) 56 X- = 9 or 6 x(x+8) x(x+8) x= ±3 or/— V=±^i/-21 4x+16 = 24. 4x = 8. x ^ 2, smaller number. x+8 =: 10, larger number. 197 G. X — 3 X — 3 X — 3 ■1 1 V ■1 1 V ■1 T V 27(x+l.) (X— 1)^ 27(x+l) (X- -1) (X— l)^(x- -1) 27(x^— 1) (X— D" X— 1 I 1 3|27(x=— 1)X 3 V (X— 1)» ( 1 )(x— 1 I ) = (3)( )( ,,! ) (X— 1)( 3 V^— 1) = Vx=— 1 7. Vx+l+Vx = Vx+1 x+l+Vx^+x = 3. Vx^+x X-+X = 4 — 4x+x* 5x = 4. 8. Let X — rate of steamer down stream, and X — 3 = rate of steamer up stream. 150 = time required for down X trip. 150 X— 3 time required for up trip. Then, 150 1 150 X 2 X— 3 300x— 90(M-5x=— 15x = 300x. 5x-— 15x==900. x^— 3x = 180. Completing square, 9 9 x^— 3xH — = 180H — = 4 4 729 4 3 27 2 2 x = 15. X = one y := other. xy(x+y) = 180. (1). x«+y' _ igQ (2). 180 Divide (1) by xy, x+y = (3) x+y Divide (2) by (3), -xy+y-'= 21xy 20 (4) 324O0 Square (3), x24-2xy+y= = (5) Subtract (5) from (4), 21xv 32400 — 3xy = (6) 20 x=y2 Simplifying, —60x'y^21x8y3— 648000 x^v= = 8.000. xy = ±20. (7) Subtracting value of xy in (3), = 9. (8) Squaring (7), 180 x+y = 20 (9) x-"+2xy+y^ = 81 Multiplying (7) by 4, 4xv = 80. (10) Subtracting (10) from (9), x^— 2xy+y^ = 1. (11) Extracting root, X— y = tl. (12) Add (12) and (8), x+y = 9. X = 5. Substitute in (8) value of x, 5+y = 9. y = 4. 10. (a) (D* 30 l=arn-i ^ (30) (_) = — = — ( 3 ) 81 27 a rl 1— r 1— r 10 198 1 10 30 3 27 1 1 ■■ 3 1 — 1 3 5 27 22 44— 27 Therefore over in 5 17 = 89— ft. "27 entire distance passed 22 rebounds = 2x44 — 27 1 (b) 1 = o a = 30. 1 3 : . V 1 a s = 1— r rl 1— r 30 rxO AK 3. (a) H. C. F. -- 2x+y. See 3, June '97 (b) 2x-^— 3xy— 2y^ = (2x+y) (x— 2y). 6x^ — 7xy— ,5y- = (2x+y) (3x— 5y). 4x2_y2 = (2x+y) (2x— y). .-. L. C. M. = (2x+y)(x— 2y) (3x— 5y) (2x— y). 4. x^- 7X+12 1 1 x'+x-(-12 1 ( X— 4 ) ( x+3 ) ( x-l-4 ) ( X— 3 ) x+4 — x+4 1—— 1 3 3 Therefore entire distance passed over before coming to rest = 2x45 = 90 ft. •; (X— 4) (x— 3) (x+4) 8 (X— 4)(x— 3)(x+4) X = number spaces min. hand moves over. X — 20 = number of spaces hour hand moves over. Since min. hand moves 12 times as fast as hour hand, 12 (X — 20) ^ number spaces min. hand moves over. Hence x = 12(x— 20) — llx = —240. X = 21- 9 11 9 Therefore the time is 21 — mins. June 4, 1901. 1. 5a=^b ab' 2b=' + + 36 6 9 a-b 2ab' 4 6 ab 2b= 2 3 a b — + — Ans. 2 3 4a-"b 36 4a2b 36 ab- 2b' + 6 9 ab- 2b= + 6 9 2. 6x=— 7xy— 5y^ = (2x+y) (3x— 5y). past 4 o'clock. 11 2 3 ^- + — = 1 (1) X y 12 12 =1 (2) X 7 Multiply (1) by 4, 8 12 — + — = 4 (3) X y Add (2) and (3), 20 — = 5. X 5x = 20. X = 4. 199 Subst. value of x ia (1), Subtract (5) from (4), 2 3 X*— 2x=y-+y^ = 30,625 (6) — + — = 1 Extracting root, x'' — y^=£175 (7) 4 y Adding (2) and (7), 2x=^ = 800. 3 1 X- = 400. - • — = — X = 20 (length). y 2 Substituting value of x in (1), 20y = 300. y = 6. y =; 1,5. (breadth). 10. 1 = arn-L X = first number. 14,641 = 10,000r* y = second number, z = third number. 2y Then, x + — = 19 or 3x+2y=57. (1) 3 y 3z — + — = 23 or 4y+9z=276 (2) 3 4 z X — + — = y or 3z+2x = 6y. (3) 2 3 14641 10000 11 r = — . Therefore ratio of annual 10 1 increase is — 10, or 10 per cent. Multiply (1) by 2, 6x+4y=114 (4) Sept. 1901 Subtract (4) from (2), 9z— 6x=162 Add (5) and (3), 3z— 2x=54. (5) Multiply (6) by 4, 6z— 6j^=54. z — y = 9. Add (2) and (7), 4z— 4y=36 (7) 13z = 312. Subsitute value of z in (6), z=24. Substitute value of y in (1), 24— y=9 y = 15. 3x+30i557. x=9. 8. (a) V18+V32 = \/9x2+V16x2 = 3V2+4V2=7V2 4 (b) 4\/a-bx3Vab= = 4aV b= X l.(a) See 3, Sept. 1902. (b) a«— b" = (a^+b^) (a«— b*) = (a+b) (a- — ab+b^) (a — b) (a^+ab+b') 2. x^'— 9x2+26x— 24 = (x^— 5x-f6) (X— 4). x=— 6x2+llx— 6 = (x^— 5x+6) (x^t). H. C. F. = x=— 5x+6. L. C. M. = (x2— 5x+6) (x— 1) (x— 4). 3. 3 3x+2 1 1 2x— 4 2x— 3 3Vab2 =12aVab* = 12abVa 9. X = length in rods. y = width in rods. Then, xy = 300 (1) The diagonal is the hypotenuse of a right triangle. Then, x=+y- ==(25)== 625 (2) Squaring (1), x-y= = 90,000. (3) Squaring (2). x*+2xV+y'^30,625(4) Multiplv (3) by 4, 4x'y2 = 360000(5) Equation with sign of last fraction changed. 12x^— 42X+36 = 6x=— 5x— G+«x»— 8x— 8. .21 X = i — . Ans. 29 4. X = age ten yrs. ago. x+10 = age now. x+20 = age ten yrs. hence. 3x 2 — = — (x+20). 5 5 x = 40. Ans. 200 "(x+y) -(X— y) 2. 1 1 — (x+y) + — (X— y) = 10. 2 3 (1) (2) (3) Simplify, x+lly = GO. 5x+y = 60. (4) Multiply (1) by 5 and subtract (4) from resulting equation 40 9* Substitute value of y, in (1), 77 X = 4. x Simplifying, x- — 4x = 77. Completing square, x = 11. Substitute in (1), y=7. 10. 1 = a.+ (n— l)d. 600 = 400+5d. 5d = 200. d = 40 . Noy. 26. 1901. Substitute value of y in (3) to find X. 1(a). See 5, Sept. '98. (b) See 5, Sept. '98. 100 2. See 2, June, 1900. .X = . 3. See 3, June, 1901. » 4. See 4, June, 1899. Prove work by substituting values 5. See 5, Sept. 1897. thus found, in (1) and (2). 6. See 6, Sept. 1898. 7. See 7, June, 1899 8. See 10, Sept. 1899. ^ 9. See 9, May, 1895. X— y+— -^Q ggg 10^ sgp^_ ^ggg^ o I 4 4x \x^+j--i 2xyH — V 9 3 4y 3 7. (a) (Vx— V21) (Vx-fV21)= Vx^— 21